Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2019  with  funding  from 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


https://archive.org/details/glossaryofaramaiOOcook 


A  GLOSSARY 


OF  THE 

ARAMAIC  INSCRIPTIONS. 


Eontion:  C.  J.  CLAY  and  SONS, 
CAMBRIDGE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS  WAREHOUSE, 
AVE  MARIA  LANE. 

©lasflofo:  263,  ARGYLE  STREET. 


ILctpjtg:  F.  A.  BROCKHAUS. 
lotfe:  THE  MACMILLAN  COMPANY. 
Bombag :  E.  SEYMOUR  HALE. 


A  GLOSSARY 


OF  THE 


ARAMAIC  INSCRIPTIONS. 


BY 

y 

STANLEY  A.  COOK,  B.A. 

FORMERLY  SCHOLAR  OF  GONVILLE  AND  CATOS  COLLEGE,  CAMBRIDGE; 
LATE  UNIVERSITY  TYRWHITT  SCHOLAR,  AND  MASON  HEBREW  PRIZEMAN  ; 

JEREMIE  PRIZEMAN. 


CAMBRIDGE : 

AT  THE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS. 

1898 


[ All  Rights  reserved.] 


damimtige : 

PRINTED  BY  J.  AND  C. 
AT  THE  UNIVERSITY 


F.  CLAY, 
PRESS. 


PREFACE. 


mHIS  Glossary  is  based  upon  the  Aramaic  inscriptions  edited 
by  the  French  Academie  des  Inscriptions  et  Belles-Lettres 
in  the  second  part  of  the  Corpus  Inscriptionum  Semiticarum 
comprising  some  three  hundred  inscriptions  from  Assyria,  Baby¬ 
lonia,  Asia  Minor,  Egypt  and  Palestine  (fascic.  i,  1889;  fascic. 
ii,  1893).  To  these  have  been  added  about  seven  hundred 
Sinaitic  inscriptions  collected  and  edited  by  Euting,  and  one 
hundred  and  fifty  Palmyrene  inscriptions  published  by  the 
Comte  de  Vogue  in  his  work  La  Syrie  Centrale  (1868 — 1877). 
Since  the  publication  of  the  latter,  however,  numerous  not 
unimportant  Palmyrene  inscriptions  have  appeared  in  various 
journals  devoted  to  Semitic  studies,  and  a  list  of  those  which 
have  been  utilized  in  the  preparation  of  the  Glossary  will  be 
found  upon  pp.  4  f.  below. 

Finally,  besides  a  few  recent  Nabataean  inscriptions  which 
have  appeared  since  the  publication  of  the  Corpus  above 
mentioned,  I  have  included  the  well-known  inscriptions  from 
Zenjirli,  and,  with  some  hesitation,  those  from  Nerab  near 
Aleppo.  In  spite  of  the  uncertainty  of  many  of  the  readings  in 
these  old  Aramaic  inscriptions  it  did  not  seem  desirable  to 
ignore  any  evidence  which  might  possibly  throw  light  upon  the 
study  of  comparative  Semitic  philology. 


VI 


PKEFACE. 


For  the  purposes  of  this  Glossary  I  have  freely  availed 
myself  of  the  notes  given  by  the  various  editors,  and  where 
necessary  have  marked  any  useful  parallels,  notes,  references, 
etc.,  which  I  have  come  across  in  the  course  of  my  reading. 
My  indebtedness  to  the  writings  of  Robertson  Smith,  Theodor 
Noldeke,  Julius  Wellhausen,  and  many  other  scholars  will  be 
manifest  from  the  references  in  the  Glossary. 

Hitherto  with  the  exception  of  the  useful  N amen- Register 
in  Euting’s  editions  of  Nabataean  and  Sinaitic  inscriptions,  the 
only  collection  of  Aramaic  proper  names  has  been,  so  far  as  I 
am  aware,  Ledrain’s  Dictionnaire  des  JSToms  Propres  Palmy- 
r miens  (Paris,  1887).  A  complete  glossary  of  the  Aramaic 
inscriptions  does  not  exist.  The  amount  of  material  likely  to 
be  afforded  by  the  Aramaic  inscriptions  to  the  study  of  Semitic 
onomatology  (the  importance  of  which  is  becoming  ever  more 
widely  recognised)  may  be  estimated  from  the  fact  that  about 
three-fifths  of  the  headings  are  proper  names  extending  over 
a  period  of  some  eleven  centuries.  The  attempt  has  been 
made  to  render  this  department  of  the  Glossary  as  complete 
as  possible  by  the  addition  of  cognate  or  parallel  names,  which 
might  conceivably  elucidate  the  pronunciation  or  derivation 
of  a  particular  proper  name.  The  chief  sources  have  been 
the  Assyrian  and  Greek  equivalents  in  bilinguals,  the  Greek 
inscriptions  and  papyri  from  Palestine  and  Egypt,  and  the 
evidence  furnished  by  Mishnic  Hebrew,  Sabaean  and  Arabic. 
I  may  add  here  that  in  the  case  of  the  less  simple  names  I 
have  usually  followed  the  interpretation  suggested  by  the 
editor  or  editors  of  the  inscriptions ;  in  numerous  instances, 
however,  the  same  name  admits  of  more  than  one  signification, 
e.g.  “  Bel  helps”  or  “Bel  is  a  help,”  and  it  is  not  to 

be  assumed  that  the  one  I  have  mentioned  is  alone  correct. 

The  Introduction  which  follows  divides  and  classifies  the 


PREFACE. 


Vll 


Aramaic  inscriptions,  and  explains  the  method  of  references, 
and  abbreviations  which  have  been  employed  in  order  to  keep 
the  work  within  limits.  By  the  attempt  to  indicate  however 
roughly  the  provenance  of  the  inscriptions  and  their  approxi¬ 
mate  age  the  practical  utility  of  the  Glossary  has,  I  hope,  been 
increased. 

A  compilation  of  this  nature  cannot  expect  to  be  complete. 
The  vocabulary  is  constantly  enriched  by  the  discovery  and 
decipherment  of  fresh  inscriptions,  and  continued  research  tends 
to  place  upon  a  more  secure  basis  the  readings  of  the  inscrip¬ 
tions  which  are  already  known*.  The  latter  remark  applies  with 
special  force  to  the  Palmyrene  inscriptions,  the  lack  of  a  recent 
and  comprehensive  edition  of  which  has  caused  some  difficulty. 
I  have,  for  my  own  part,  attempted  to  bring  the  Glossary  up  to 
date  as  completely  as  possible  by  embodying  where  necessary 
the  corrections,  suggestions,  and  criticisms  of  scholars  labouring 
in  this  field  of  Semitic  study,  and,  as  a  general  rule,  have 
employed  brackets  and  superlinear  dots  to  indicate  references 
and  readings  which  were  doubtful  or  incomplete.  Although 
this  principle  may  not  have  been  put  into  effect  as  thoroughly 
as  could  be  wished,  the  necessity  of  avoiding  the  perpetuation 
of  errors  can  hardly  be  overestimated.  Care  has  been  taken 
to  make  this  Glossary  as  accurate  as  possible,  but  in  a  work 
compiled  from  so  many  scattered  sources,  and  involving  a  large 
mass  of  detail,  inconcinnities  and  errors  are  almost  inevitable ; 
some  of  these  are  remedied  in  the  Additions  and  Corrections, 
pp.  125  ffi,  to  which  the  reader  is  requested  to  turn  before  using 
the  Glossary. 

*  At  the  very  last  moment  I  have  been  able  to  append  a  few  references  to  an 
interesting  collection  of  Palmyrene  inscriptions  just  recently  edited  by  Professor 
D.  H.  Muller  of  Vienna  (see  pp.  123  f.).  I  have  to  apologise  therefore  for  the 
inordinate  length  of  the  “  Additions  and  Corrections.” 


Vlll 


PREFACE. 


In  conclusion,  I  wish  to  express  my  deep  sense  of  gratitude 
to  Professor  A.  Ashley  Bevan,  of  Trinity  College,  Cambridge, 
for  his  ever-ready  help  and  for  many  valuable  suggestions. 
My  best  thanks  are  due  also  to  the  Syndics  of  the  University 
Press  for  undertaking  the  publication  of  this  Glossary,  and  to 
the  proof-readers  and  staff  for  the  painstaking  manner  in  which 
they  have  accomplished  the  work. 


London, 

September,  1898. 


STANLEY  A.  COOK. 


INTRODUCTION. 


Aramaic,  one  of  the  great  branches  of  the  Semitic  family 
of  languages,  was  the  lingua  franca  of  Western  Asia.  Used  in 
Assyria  and  Babylonia  as  early  as  the  tenth  century  B.C.,  it 
was  probably  through  the  influence  of  these  countries  that 
it  first  attained  importance  \  The  Persians  at  a  later  date 
employed  it  during  their  supremacy  in  Egypt,  and  at  the 
commencement  of  the  Christian  era  we  find  it  adopted  by  the 
Arabs.  Hence  the  inscriptions  written  in  Aramaic  are  of  a 
most  varied  character,  and,  as  is  only  natural,  will  be  found  to 
contain  numerous  foreign  words  and  expressions.  The  younger 
dialects  (Nabataean  and  Palmyrene)  are  of  great  importance 
for  the  light  which  they  throw  upon  many  of  the  peculiarities 
of  Biblical  Aramaic,  and  the  more  ancient  ones  (especially  the 
inscriptions  of  Zenjirli)  present  an  Aramaic  dialect  which 
closely  approximates  to  the  Hebrew  or  Canaanitish2. 

For  the  sake  of  convenience  we  may  divide  these  inscriptions 
into  three  great  classes. 

1  It  appears  from  2  Kings  xviii.  26,  Is.  xxxvi.  11  that  Aramaic  was  under¬ 
stood  by  both  Jewish  and  Assyrian  diplomatists  at  the  end  of  the  8th 
century  b.c. 

2  Further  details  are  unnecessary  here.  Reference  may  be  made  to  the 
following  which  have  been  utilized  in  preparing  this  Introduction  and  Glossary. 
“Semitic  Languages”  by  Prof.  T.  Ndldeke  ( Enc .  Brit.  ed.  ix.).  Kautzsch, 
Gram.  Bibl.-Aram.  pp.  1 — 16.  Driver,  Introd.  to  Old  Test.  ed.  6,  pp.  502 — 504  ; 
ib.  Notes  on  Samuel ,  pp.  xvii — xxiv  (useful  for  remarks  upon  Aramaic  palaeo¬ 
graphy).  Wright,  Comp.  Gram,  of  Sem.  Lang.  14 — 18.  Bevan,  Comm,  on 
Daniel,  32  ff.,  211  ff.  Zimmern,  Vergl.  Gramm,  d.  Sem.  Sprachen,  and  Noldeke’s 
invaluable  articles  in  the  Zeitsclir.  d.  Morgenland.  Gesellsch.  xvii.  703  ff.,  xix. 
637  f.,  xxiv.  85  ff.,  xxv.  113  ff.,  xlvii.  99  ff. 


C. 


1 


2 


INTRODUCTION. 


§  1.  The  first  class  comprises  inscriptions  from  Assyria, 
Babylonia,  Northern  Syria,  Asia  Minor,  etc.,  nearly  all  of 
which  are  contained  in  the  CIS  t.  ii.  fasc.  i.  nos.  1 — 11 2  \ 
Those  from  Ass.  and  Bab.  consist  chiefly  of  a  number  of 
weights,  contracts  and  seals ;  many  of  which  are  bilingual 
(Assyrian  and  Aramaic)'1 2. 

Nos.  1 — 52  from  Niniveh,  Kouyunjik,  Nimroud,  Khorsabad,  8 — 7th 
cent.  b.c.  Nos.  53 — 71  Babylonia,  6th — 4th  cent.  b.c.  No.  72  from  Tello, 
bilingual  in  Aramaic  and  Greek,  3rd  cent.  Nos.  73 — 107  uncertain  origin, 
ranging  from  9th  to  4tli  cent.  b.c.  No.  108,  the  well-known  bronze  lion 
from  Abydos,  6th — 5th  cent.  v.  s.  pBDK.  No.  109  from  Limyra,  5th — 4th 
cent.  No.  110  from  Caucasus  Mts.  No.  112  from  Olympus  (Phoenician 
workmanship  apparently)  7th — 6th.  To  these  is  added  an  inscr.  from 
Cilicia,  referred  to  as  Cil. 3 

The  most  important,  not  only  of  this  class,  but  of  all  the 
Aramaic  inscriptions,  are  those  discovered  at  the  village  of 
Zenjirli  in  N.  Syria,  situated  at  the  foot  of  the  Amanus 
mountains  (37°  6'  N.,  36°  41'  E.).  Only  three  as  yet  have  been 
published,  and,  mutilated  and  obscure  as  they  are  in  parts, 
they  form  a  most  valuable  and  welcome  addition  to  our  stock 
of  inscriptions.  They  belong  to  the  eighth  century  B.C.  All 
references  to  these  inscriptions  are  made  by  a  prefixed  Z,  and 
it  should  be  pointed  out  here  that  opinion  differs  considerably 
with  regard  to  many  of  the  readings,  and,  generally  speaking, 
only  those  are  quoted  about  which  the  various  editors  were 
more  or  less  agreed4. 


1  All  references  to  Aramaic  inscriptions  in  the  CIS  are  cited  by  their 
numbers  only. 

2  No.  96  a  bilingual  in  Aram,  and  S.  Arabian,  5 — 4th  cent.  b.c.  ;  v.  s.  Dm. 

3  See  Anzeig.  d.  kais.  Akad.  d.  Wissens.  Vienna,  Oct.  19th,  1892 ;  and  ZA 
Dec.  1892,  pp.  350  ff. 

4  The  following  editions  have  been  consulted:  Sachau,  Ausgrabungen  in 
Sendschirli  in  the  Mittheilungen  of  the  Berlin  Univ.  (1893),  cf.  also  the 
Sitzungs-berichte  of  the  same,  Oct.  22nd,  1896,  pp.  1051  ff.  D.  H.  Muller,  die 
altsemitischen  Inschriften  aus  Sendschirli  (Vienna,  1893).  J.  Hal^vy,  Les  deux 
Inscriptions  H6t6ennes  de  Zindjirli  (Rev.  Sem.  d'epigr.  et  d’hist.  anc.  1894,  and 
April,  1896,  p.  185  f.).  Also  Noldeke’s  admirable  article  in  the  ZMG  xlvii.  99 ff. 
For  inscr.  of  Bar-R-K-B  also  Winckler,  Mittheil.  d.  Vorderasiat.  Ges.  1896  heft  4, 
22  ff.,  and  Hoffmann,  ZA,  1897,  317  ff. 


INTRODUCTION. 


3 


Of  the  three  inscriptions,  one  is  dedicated  to  P-n-m-u  bar  B-r-s-r,  and 
is  referred  to  as  Zr.  The  second,  dedicated  by  P-n-m-u  bar  q-r-l  to 
Hadad,  is  designated  Zh;  and  the  third  Zb  is  by  Bar-R-K-B  bar  P-n-m-u. 

Finally  we  include  in  this  class  the  two  inscriptions  recently 
discovered  at  Nerab  near  Aleppo.  The  text  followed  is  that 
given  by  Clermont-Ganneau  in  the  Journal  ofjiciel  d.  1.  Repub. 
/rang.  1896,  March  23rd,  p.  1651  ;  cf.  also  Halevy,  Revue 
Semitique,  1896,  279  ff,  369  ff.;  Hoffmann,  Zeitschrift f  Assyrio- 
logie ,  1897,  Jan.  207  ff.  They  are  referred  to  as  Nerab  1  and  2. 

§  2.  To  the  second  class  belong  the  Aramaic  inscriptions 
from  Egypt,  which  date  from  the  end  of  fifth  to  beginning  of 
third  century  B.c.  They  are  contained  in  nos.  122 — 155  of 
the  CIS. 

No.  122,  the  so-called  stele  of  Sakhara,  biliug.  in  Eg.  and  Aram.,  dated 
the  fourth  year  of  Xerxes  (i.e.  482  b.c.).  Nos.  137 — 144,  154,  155,  from 
Elephantine  (141,  the  well-known  Carpentras  Inscr.  dedicated  to  fcOJI, 
prob.  4th  cent.  b.c.).  Nos.  145 — 153  papyri,  unfortunately  sadly  mutilated. 
No.  145  (consisting  of  four  fragments  A,  B,  C,  D)  the  Blacassiani  papyri, 
prob.  end  of  5th  cent.  According  to  some  the  latter  deal  with  a  tale  told 
by  an  Aramaean  who  was  hostile  to  the  Eg.  religion  ;  others  find  in  them 
an  Egypto- Judaic  Haggadah  on  Ex.  i.  They  are  too  mutilated  and  obscure 
to  allow  of  our  arriving  at  any  certain  decision  1. 

§  3.  To  the  third  class  belong  the  great  majority  of  the 
Aramaic  inscriptions.  They  date  from  just  before  the  Chris¬ 
tian  era,  and  go  down  to  about  the  third  century  A.D.  They 
may  be  divided  into  three  groups,  the  first  two  of  which  are 
especially  valuable  owing  to  their  agreement  in  many  essential 
particulars  with  the  Aramaic  of  Daniel  and  Ezra2. 

(1)  The  first  group  comprises  the  Nabataean  inscriptions 
from  Teima  in  the  N.  of  the  Hijaz,  al-Hijr,  Petra  and  the 
Hauran,  and  are  contained  in  the  CIS,  nos.  113 — 121, 156 — 307. 

1  For  122,  palaeographically  important  on  account  of  its  bearing  a  date, 
cf.  plate  lxiii.  of  the  Oriental  Section  of  the  Palaeographical  Society;  for  141,  v. 
pi.  lxiv.  (ib.)  and  Driver,  Samuel,  p.  xviii ;  and  for  145,  v.  pi.  xxv. ,  xxvi.  (ib.), 
Driver,  op.  cit.  p.  xxi. 

2  Cf.  Driver,  Introd.  Old  Test.  6th  ed.  pp.  502  ff.  Parts  of  Ezra  belong 
probably  to  the  Persian  period,  but  the  whole  has  been  remodelled  by  a  later 
writer.  Daniel  dates  from  the  middle  of  the  second  century  b.c. 

1—2 


4 


INTRODUCTION. 


A  small  number  of  these  have  been  critically  edited  by  Euting 
in  a  convenient  form  and  are  referred  to  in  the  glossary  by  a 
prefixed  N.  The  table  below,  p.  6,  gives  the  numbers  under 
which  the  inscriptions  in  Euting’s  collection  are  to  be  found  in 
the  CIS1. 

The  well-known  inscriptions  from  Teima2  (nos.  113 — 121)  are  the  most 
ancient  of  this  group.  The  first  two  belong  to  6 — 5th  cent,  b.c.,  and  the 
others  date  from  4th — 2nd  cent.  b.c.  The  remainder  (156  ff.)  start  from  a 
date  shortly  before  the  Christian  era,  and  go  down  to  the  end  of  the 
1st  cent.  a.d.  Nos.  157,  158  were  found  at  Puteoli,  159  Rome,  160  Sidon, 
161  Dmer,  162 — 193  the  Hauran,  195,  196  Moabite  from  Umm-er-resas 
and  Medaba,  nos.  197 — 307  Hegra.  To  these  we  have  added  (a)  no.  156 
Jerusalem ;  (b)  a  Nab.  inscr.  edited  by  Sachau,  Sitz.-berichte ,  Berlin, 
Oct.  22nd,  1896  (no.  xli.),  designated  in  the  glossary  Nab.  Sach.;  and 
(c)  Nab.  Pet.  a  recent  inscription  from  Petra,  v.  Barth,  Hebraica  (American 
Journal  of  Sem.  Lang,  and  Lit.),  July  1897,  267  ff.  Cf.  Journal  Asiatique , 
1896,  t.  viii.  304  ff.,  485  ff. 

(2)  The  second  group  comprises  the  Palmyrene  inscrip¬ 
tions,  most  of  which,  as  the  name  implies,  come  from  Palmyra 
(the  ancient  Tadmor),  and  belong  to  the  first  three  centuries  of 
the  Christian  era3.  The  largest  collection  is  by  Comte  de 
Vogue  in  La  Syrie  Gentrale  (1868 — 1877),  whose  readings  in 
some  cases  are  supplemented  by  those  of  later  scholars.  All 
references  to  Palmyrene  inscriptions  are  marked  by  a  prefixed 
P,  which,  without  any  further  sign,  denotes  those  in  the  above- 
mentioned  work. 

To  these  have  been  added  the  following,  which  are  alphabetically 
arranged  according  to  the  abbreviations  and  signs  by  which  they  are 
referred  to  in  the  glossary. 

PCI. -Gan.  Clermont-Ganneau,  Recueil  cPArche'ol.  Orient.  115  ff.,  300  ff. ; 
for  latter  cf.  also  Journal  Asiatique ,  1888,  t.  xi.  p.  303. 


1  J.  Euting,  Nabatnische  Inschriften  mis  Arabien ,  Berlin,  1885,  is  especially 
valuable  on  account  of  the  numerous  notes  which  Noldeke  has  contributed. 
These  have  been  freely  used  in  the  compilation  of  this  glossary. 

2  Cf.  Studia  Biblia,  Oxford,  i.  no.  x.,  211  ff.  (1885),  and  Alt-Aram.  Inschr. 
ous  Teivia,  Noldeke,  Sitz.-ber.  Berlin,  July  10th,  1884. 

3  The  oldest  (Vogii6,  Syr.  Gentr.  3)  belongs  to  Nov.  9  b.c.  The  Palmyrene 
inscriptions  which  are  dated  follow  the  Seleucid  era  (311 — 310  b.c.).  For 
another  era  in  this  group  see  p.  6. 


INTRODUCTION. 


5 


P  Eut.  J.  Euting,  in  Sitzungs-berichte  d.  Kaiserl.  Acad.  Berlin, 
(a)  nos.  1 — 40,  June  11th,  1885,  669  ff. ;  (6)  nos.  41 — 52, 
April  22nd,  1887,  407  ff.1 
PJAs.Vog.  Vogue,  Journ.  Asiat.  1883,  t.  i.  p.  243. 

Pm  Mordtmann,  Neue  Beitrage  z.  Kunde  Palmyra! s,  in  Sitz.-ber.  d. 

Konigl.  Acad.  Munich,  1875. 

P  Mull.  I).  H.  Muller,  Sitz.-ber.  etc.  Vienna,  cviii.  475  f. 

Praa  Ledrain  al.,  in  Rev.  <d  Assyr.  et  d! Archeol.  Orient.  Paris,  1884  ff. 

References  are  made  to  the  pages  of  the  different  volumes 
(vol.  i.  1884—86,  ii.  1888—92,  lii.  1894—  ). 

P  Sach.  Sachau,  ZMG  xxxv.  728  ff. 

PSchr.  Schroeder,  ZMG  xxxix.  32  ff. 

PSchr.-S.  Schroeder,  Sitz.-ber.  etc.  Berlin,  1884,  437  ff. 

PS.-Sh.  South  Shields  inscr.  ed.  by  W.  Wright,  Journ.  Soc.  Bibl. 
Archaeol.  1879,  vi.  436  f. 

Pvoj.  a,  b  D.  H.  Muller  in  the  Vienna  Oriental  Journal ,  vi.  317  ff.  and 
viii.  11  ff.  (a  and  b  respectively.) 

P  Wr.  Wright,  Journal  of  Soc. 'for  Bibl.  Archaeol.  1880,  vii.  1  ff. 

Pza  A  Palmyrene  inscription  from  Medeba  in  the  Zeit.  f.  Assyr  io- 

logie ,  April  1894. 

Pzmg  Levy  in  ZMG  xii.  214  ff,  xv.  615  ff.  and  xviii.  65  ff. 

Lastly  is  included  the  Great  Fiscal  Inscription  (a.d.  137),  a  bilingual 
in  Aram,  and  Gr.  composed  of  an  introductory  portion  of  eleven  lines 
(Pf),  and  three  columns  (Pfi,  F2,  F3).  The  editions  consulted  have  been 
those  of  Vogue  in  the  Journ.  Asiat.  1883,  t.  i.  231  ff.,  t.  ii.  15  ff. ;  Schroeder, 
Sitz.-ber.  Berlin,  1884,  417  ff. ;  Reckendorff,  ZMG  xlii.  370  ;  with  reference 
also  to  Sachau,  ZMG  xxxvii.  562  ff*.  and  Bevan,  Daniel ,  215  ff.  who  give 
only  the  introductory  part  Pf.  Here  as  in  the  case  of  the  Zenjirli 
inscriptions,  there  is  much  that  is  obscure,  and  only  those  readings  have 
been  usually  noted  about  which  there  was  some  agreement  of  opinion. 


(3)  Finally,  to  the  third  group  belong  the  latest  of  all  the 
Aramaic  inscriptions,  viz.  those  from  the  Sinaitic  peninsula. 
They  have  long  been  known  to  travellers  and  were  formerly 
supposed  to  be  the  work  of  the  children  of  Israel  during  their 
wanderings  in  the  wilderness.  They  were  first  critically  studied 
by  Beer  of  Leipzig  in  1839,  and  are  now  known  to  be  nothing 
more  than  the  names  of  various  nomads  (of  Arabian  nationality) 
followed  by  some  Aramaic  benedictory  formula.  A  few  of  the 
names  appear  to  be  Aramaic,  and  still  fewer  are  Jewish. 
Nearly  700  of  these  have  been  edited  by  Euting  ( Sinaitische 

1  No.  41  the  second  oldest  Palm,  inscr.,  dated  a.d.  21. 


6 


INTRODUCTION. 


Inschriften,  1891),  whose  collection  has  been  utilized  for  the 
purposes  of  the  glossary.  All  references  to  them  are  marked 
by  the  prefix  Sin.  The  dates  of  two  only  are  known ;  viz. 
no.  319  (=  230 — 1  A.D.),  and  no.  463  (=  189  A.D.).  The  year  of 
the  Eparchy  after  which  the  latter  is  dated  is  104  A.D. 

A  table  of  the  Nabataean  Inscr.  in  Euting’s  Nabatdische 
Inschriften ,  and  Vogue’s  La  Syi'ie  Centrale,  with  their  corre¬ 
sponding  numbers  in  the  CIS : 


Eut.  Nab. 


1  = 

CIS  332 

Eut.  Nab.  36  =  CIS 

343 

2 

197 

37 

344 

3  . 

198 

38 

338 

4 

199 

39 

339 

5 

201 

40 

336 

6 

202 

41 

337 

/ 

204 

42 

120 

8 

205 

43 

— 

9 

206 

44 

121 

10 

207 

45 

314 

11 

208 

46 

315 

12 

209 

47 

309 

13 

210 

48 

312 

14 

212 

49 

311 

15 

213 

50 

313 

16 

214 

51 

227 

17 

215 

52 

— 

18 

216 

53 

292 

19 

200 

54 

293 

20 

217 

55 

234 

21 

218 

56 

294 

22 

219 

57 

295 

23 

220 

58 

296 

24 

221 

59 

297 

25 

222 

60 

298 

26 

223 

61 

299 

27 

224 

62 

300 

28 

225 

63 

301 

29 

228 

64 

— 

30 

333 

65 

302 

31 

346—7 

66 

303 

32 

— 

67 

304 

33 

345 

68 

305 

34 

35 

340 

341—2 

69 

307 

ABBREVIATIONS. 


7 


Vo g.  Hauran  Inscr.  1 — 3  =  CIS 

4 

5 

6—8 


162—164 

166 

165 

167—169 


Vog.  Nab.  Inscr. 

1  =  CIS  170 

2  171 

3  173 

4  174 

4  a  175 

5  179 

6  182 

7  183 


Vog.  Nab.  Inscr. 

8  =  CIS  185 

9  190 

10  191 

11  192 

11a  193 

12  187 

13  186 

14  188 


ABBREVIATIONS. 

Besides  the  more  common  abbreviations  the  following  should  be 
noticed. 


Addai 

=  Doctrine  of  Addai ,  the  Apostle ;  G.  Phillips. 

al. 

=  et  aliter ,  and  elsewhere  ;  also  et  alii,  and  others. 

alt. 

=  an  alternative  rendering  palaeographically  possible. 

(For 

the  various  alphabets  found  in  the  Aramaic  inscriptions 

cf.  Euting’s  table  in  Zimmern,  Vergl.  Gramm,  d. 
Sprachen  (1898),  nos.  6 — 12.) 

Sem. 

Ass.  BO 

=  Assemanus,  Bibliotheca  Orientalis. 

B.  Ar. 

=  Biblical  Aramaic. 

Baeth.  Beit. 

=  F.  Baethgen,  Beitriige  z.  Semit.  Religions-geschichte. 

Bar.  ES 

=  J.  Barth,  Etymologische  Studien. 

„  NB 

=  „  Nominalbildung. 

Baud. 

=  Baudissin,  Stud.  z.  Semit.  Rel.-gesch. 

Bev.  Dan. 

—  A.  A.  Bevan,  Commentary  on  Daniel. 

Bloch 

=  A.  Bloch,  Phoenizisches  Glossar. 

c. 

=  circa ,  about ;  also  cum,  with. 

Chwol. 

=  Chwolson,  Corp.  Inscr.  Heb. 

CIG 

=  Corp.  Inscr.  Graecarum. 

CIL 

=  „  „  Latinarum. 

CIS 

=  „  „  Semiticarum. 

coll. 

=  collective. 

cpd. 

=  compound,  compounded. 

Cur.  ASD 

=  Cureton,  Ancient  Syriac  Documents. 

Cur.  Spic. 

=  ,,  Spicilegium. 

8 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


Dal. 

DHM 

„  Ep.  Denk. 
dim. 

Dn. 

Dr.  St.  Bib. 
dub. 
ed.  edd. 
eq.  equiv. 


Eut. 


Dalman,  Gram.  d.  Jiid.-Paldst.  Aram. 

D.  H.  Miiller. 

„  Epigraphische  Denkmaler. 

diminutive. 

Daniel. 

Studia  Biblia,  ed.  Driver, 
dubious,  doubtful. 

editor(s)  of  a  particular  inscription  referred  to. 
the  equivalent  (Assyrian,  Greek  or  Latin  in  a  bilingual 
inscription,  corresponding  to  an  Aramaic  word  or 
phrase). 

J.  Euting. 


j) 


Nab. 

Sin. 


» 
exc. 

Ez. 

fam. 

Fra. 

frag. 

gent. 

GGA 

Gray,  HPN 
Grun. 

Hal. 

IH 


»> 


a 


5) 


Mel. 

„  Mel.  Epig. 


Hebr. 

Hoff.  Jul. 

„  Ausz. 

Ibn  Dor. 

J.  As. 

Jen.  Cos. 
Jer. 

Jos.  Ant. 

„  BJ 
KAT 
Kau. 
Kerber 

Lag.  BN 
GA 
Sym. 


)  j 


» 


Nabatdisclie  Inschriften. 

Sinaitische  Inschriften. 

except. 

Ezra. 

family  (used  of  a  family  or  tribal  name). 

Frankel,  Aram.  Fremdworter  im  Arab. 
fragment,  fragmentary,  mutilated, 
gentilic. 

Gotting sche  Gelehrte  Anzeigen. 

Gray,  Studies  in  Hebrew  Proper  Names. 

Grunwald,  Eigennamen  d.  Alten  Testamentes. 

J.  Halevy. 

,,  Inscriptions  Heteennes. 

,,  Melanges  de  Critique  et  dHistoire. 

„  Mel.  d’Epigraphie  et  d  Archeol.  Semit. 

Hebraica  (or  American  Journal  of  Sem.  Lang,  and  Lit.). 
G.  Hoffmann,  Julianos  d.  Abtriinnige. 

„  Ausziige  aus  d.  Syr.  Act.  Pers.  Mart. 
(Leipzig,  1880). 

Ibn  Doreid. 

Journal  Asiatique  (8th  series,  t.  1  ff,  1883  ff. ;  9th  series, 
t.  Iff,  1893 ff.). 

Jensen,  Cosmologie  d.  Babylonier. 

Jeremiah. 

Josephus,  Antiquities. 

„  Bell.  Jud. 

Schrader,  Keilinschrift.  u.  d.  Alte  Test.  (2nd  ed.). 
Kautzsch,  Gramm,  d.  Bibl.-Aram. 

Georg  Kerber,  Religions- gesch.  Bedeut.  d.  Hebr.  Eigen¬ 
namen. 

Lagarde,  Bildung  d.  Nomina. 

,,  Gesammelte  Abhandlungen. 

„  Symmicta. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


9 


Ledr. 

Low 
Hand. 

Marti 
Hasp. 

MH 

MI 

Miller 
Min. 

Mord.  or  M. 

MVG 
N,  Nab. 

Nes. 

„  Eig. 

„  Marg. 

NHWB  “ 

No. 

»  § 

„  Mand. 

P,  Pal. 
pr.-Ar. 

PSBA 
Q 

Qor. 

RAA 
REJ 

Rev.  Sem. 

Sab. 

SB 

Schwally 
SI 

Simonsen 
Sin. 

t — after  a  numeral  =  times. 


=  Ledrain. 

=  Low,  Aram.  PJlanzennamen. 

=  Mandaean,  also  Noldeke,  Mandaische  Gramm. 

—  Marti,  Aram.  Gramm. 

=  Maspero. 

=  Mishnic  Hebrew;  the  language  of  the  Mishna,  Tosephta, 
Midrashim,  and  portions  of  the  Talmud. 

=  Mesha  Inscription. 

=  Miller  in  Rev.  Archeol.  1870,  109.  ff.  containing  numerous 
Greek  names  of  2nd  cent.  b.c.  from  Egypt. 

=  Minaean. 

=  Mordtmann  ;  see  above,  p.  5. 

Beit.  =  ,,  Neue  Beitrdge  z.  Kunde  Palmyra! s. 

—  Mittheilungen  d.  Vorderasiat.  Gesell.  (Berlin). 

=  Nabataean,  Nab.  Inscriptions ;  see  above,  §  3  (1). 

=  Nestle. 

=  „  Eigennamen. 

=  „  Marginalien. 

=  Levy,  Neu-liebr.  Worter-buch. 

=  T.  Noldeke. 

=  „  Syrische  Grammatik. 

=  see  Mand.  above. 

=  Palmyrene  ;  see  above,  §  3  (2). 

=  die  proto-arab.  Inschr.;  DHM  Transactions  of  9th  Inter¬ 
national  Congress  of  Orient.  London,  1893. 

=  Proceedings  of  Soc.  for  Bibl.  A  rch. 

=  the  Qamus. 

=  the  Qoran. 

=  Revue  d: Assy riol.  et  d! Archeol. 

=  Rev.  d! Etudes  Juives. 

=  Revue  Se'mitique. 

=  Sabaean. 

=  Sitzungs-berichte. 

=  Schwally,  Idioticon  d.  Christ l.  Paliist.  Aram. 

=  Siloam  Inscr. 

=  D.  J.  Simonsen,  Skulpturer  og  Indskrifter  (Copenhagen). 
=  Sinaitic  ;  see  above,  p.  5. 


TSBA 

Vog. 

„  Syr. 
VOJ 

w. 

W 


=  Transactions  of  Soc.  for  Bibl.  Archeol. 

=  de  Vogue. 

=  ,,  La  Syrie  Centrale. 

—  Vienna  Oriental  Journal  (  =  d.  Wiener  Zeitschr.  f.  d.  Kunde 
d.  Morgenlandes) . 

—  with. 

=  Waddington,  Inscr.  grecques  et  latines  d.  1.  Syrie. 


10 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


We.  Held, 

Wetz. 

Wi.  AF 


Wellhausen,  Reste  Arab.  Heidentumes ,  1887  ( Heid .2, 
2nd  ed.  1897). 

Wetzstein. 

Winckler,  Altorient.  Forschungen  (1893  ff.). 


Wr.  =  W.  Wright  (see  also  p.  5). 

„  Josh.  Styl.  =  „ 

Joshua  Stylites. 

,,  Mart,  =  „ 

Ancient  Syriac  Marty rology. 

„  SD 

Syriac  Documents. 

„  SG 

Comp.  Gram.  Sem.  Lang. 

WRS 
„  Kin. 
„  S 'em. 
Z,  Zenj. 
ZA 
ZMG 


j) 


» 


»> 


W.  Robertson  Smith. 

Kinship  and  Marriage. 

Religion  of  Semites  (2nd  ed.  1894). 
Zenjirli  Inscr. ;  see  above,  p.  2. 

Zeitschr.f.  Assy  riot.  (vol.  i.  =  1886). 

Zeitschr.  d.  Morgenland.  Gesell.  (vol.  i.  =  1846). 

>  indicates  that  the  preceding  is  to  be  preferred  to  the  following. 

<  indicates  that  the  following  is  to  be  preferred  to  the  preceding. 

'  sign  of  abbreviation  in  words  written  in  Hebrew  or  Greek  character. 

All  references  to  the  Aramaic  Inscriptions  in  the  Corpus  Inscriptionum 
Semiticarum  are  made  to  the  numbers  alone  without  any  further  sign  or 
abbreviation. 

Z,  N,  P,  Sin.,  are  prefixed  to  all  references  or  groups  of  references  to 
the  Zenjirli,  Nabataean  (Euting’s  edition),  Palmyrene  or  Sinaitic  Inscrip¬ 
tions  respectively.  Further  details  are  given  above. 

Letters  surmounted  by  dots  and  references  enclosed  within  brackets 
are  uncertain. 

Letters  enclosed  within  brackets  have  been  supplied  conjecturally. 

Dots  prefixed  or  affixed  to  a  word  indicate  that  its  commencement  or 
termination  is  lost  or  illegible. 

All  words  marked  with  an  asterisk  are  postulated  forms  not  actually 
found  in  the  Inscriptions.  In  the  case  of  verbs  the  3  m.  Sing.  Perfect 
always  occurs  unless  the  contrary  is  indicated  by  the  use  of  the  asterisk. 
For  the  sake  of  convenience  the  meaning  is  given  in  the  infinitive. 

Proper  names,  unless  otherwise  designated,  are  masculine. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


X 

X  perhaps  for  y  in  intPSTlS,  ItSHpinS. 

X  appears  as  a  preformative  in  the  names  yms.  yms, 
K>S"IS,  }B>S»  and  lonx,  and  as  a  prosthetic  in  pS  (2),  DJS 
and  Dt^S.  For  syncope  of  S  v.  s.  np2D^S.  In  the 
middle  of  a  word  s plene  in  SpJS',  defectiva  in  BH,  and 
in  mSl  represents  Ar.  hamza.  It  is  frequently  omitted 
in  cpd.  pr.  ns.,  e.g.  VltapD,  '^ynbns,  and  v.  s.  rV?S. 

X  at  the  end  of  a  word  is  used  to  designate  the  emphatic 
state  (v.  however  n),  and  is  sometimes  found  iustead  of 
'  in  the  cstr.  pi.  v.  s.  12,  'n,  *my.  On  the  pi.  emph. 
in  Aram.  cf.  No.  §  72,  Ivau.  §  52,  2d.;  in  the  inscr. 
S'—  is  found,  but  in  Palm,  there  are  some  examples 
of  S—  (v.  s.  “On).  Apocope  of  S  apparently  takes 
place  also  in  certain  plurals  found  in  Z,  e.g.  n*Vp,  nmn. 
rocy,  for  just  as  Sd'pEi  is  found  alongside  in 

Ass.  weights,  so  m'p  ($Ti?)  etc.  prob.  stand  for 
KHTp,  etc.,  cf.  No.  ZMG  1893,  p.  103,  n.  2. 

X  final  in  pr.  ns.  as  SD1“I,  S3^3,  S13T,  S 12 V>  KTIfl  al.  may 
be  an  Aram,  ending  or  possibly  represents  Ar.  ,  as 
is  the  case  with  s*?ys  and  Sty^Siay,  v.  also  SI  VI.  In  a 
few  cases  it  is  equivalent  to  Or.  -rj  or -779,  cf.  SH3S.  SDpS, 
S312.  See  also  Kerber,  p.  11.  is  in  transliterations  fr. 
Gr.  sometimes  represents  ev,  e.g.  SDD1S,  DnSIS. 

.  .  X  frag.  n.  pr.  N  l1,  6  r6-  S  in  653  (for  6  r6a  •  S  ?),  v.  also  IS. 

^}X  .46,  the  fifth  month,  August.  1584,  1823;  N  75,  22;; 

P  58,  285,  294,  734,  844,  1038,  al. 

“father,”  P  123,  cstr.  as  N  276,  suff.  1  S.  ms  Zpt;’  18,  b4  al. ; 
3  m.  S.  'nns  (cf.  'H-US  Dn.  V.  2)  145  a5,  1963,  N  l3, 
runs  P  Cl. -Gan.  p.  300,  nms  P  87  b3,  rms  Zp1’  7,  h28, 


12 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


Nix 


vrmnx 

ibondn 

six 

LDJDX 

nnx 

mx 

i^'tonx 

jrnx 

y^x 

Snx*. 


pN* 

px 


*jnx 

nonx 

^onx 

nnx* 

Drrax 

'iDnnx 

mrrix 


3  f.  S.  ma«  P  945,  Mi75 ;  pi.  suff.  l  s.  >nnx  Zb16  (but 
Dn.  ii.  23  'finifc?,  cf.  however,  Syr.),  see  IN  JYO. 

n.  pr.  (dub.)  154.  1.  SDS  a  common  Aram,  name;  cf. 

Wr.  Mart.  p.  »._»  and  Q^d]  ib.  p.  }_*.  Graecised  d/2/2dg; 
for  divine  names  cpd.  w.  noun  expressing  relationship 
v.  Gray  HPN  13f.,  cf.  below,  and  v.  innns. 
n.  pr.  (dub.)  Sin.  484. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  14,  161,  460,  556  ah,  v.  lfc?1S. 
n.  pr.  Praa  i.  73. 
n.  pr.  49  alt.  DDZ1S  (cf.  dq). 

v.  “to  perish,”  Zp5?  -jasn  (cf.  HlfcO  Jer.  x.  11)  145  d4, 
Nerab  210.  Caus.  impf.  pi.  nnsrp  Nerab  l11,  cf.  DU. 
n.  pr.  1221  =  SDS  ? 

/  0  y 

n.  pr.  Sin.  387,  cf.  Ar.  ^ Jbud,  v.  ions. 

n.  pr.  (“my  father  is  good”)  1232,  cf.  Hb.  nitt'QX. 

n.  pr.  Pvoj,  B3,  cf.  infr.  ? 

n.  pr.  (abyad)  N  62,  alt.  piN,  for  other  Apli.  forms  cf. 

D’iox,  iris. 

n.  pr.  frag.?  in  128  nDS1?  blS- “blessed  be... of 
Osiris.” 

(1)  “stone,”  pi.  U2S  Zh31. 

(2)  =  Ar.  ’ ibn  “  a  son,”  in  following  cpd.  pr.  ns. : 

pS  Sin.  113. 

•  •  •  JpN  pS  ib.  506. 
pS  ib.  336  ? 
pp’pS  pS  ib.  553. 
jWK  pS  ib.  523,  alt.  S 

in^D  [?]  pK  ib.  653,  cf.  n'pD. 

U1S  pS  ib.  408,  cf.  inis. 

IDip  p«  ib.  20,  175,  214d,  595,  666“,  cf.  ioip, 
(possible  alt.  Pip 's). 

v.  H33. 

n.  pr.  P  36a’3,  (SHUIX  Targ.  Dt.  xiv.  18  =  Hb  HEOS). 
n.  pr.  (“father  of  rD,”  cf.  Neh.  xi.  8  ?)  1222. 

in  i"GS  nyD'l  Zh15’21,  “he  supported  his  limbs,”  or  “he 
fed  his  strong  ones  ”  (=  HpS). 
v.  s.  DITO. 

n.  pr.  255.  His  father’s  name  is  SEH. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  490,  509a  ? 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


13 


[Vienna 
j-on 
d  mn 
nujn 
NnuN 

D3N 


mun 

nSun 

un 


un 

nuN 

NUN 

dSjiun 

DKHN 

N3HK 

UHN 


-HN 

n'dttn 


iNnnN 

dwtin 

1DT1N 


n.  pr.  Sin.  378,  cf.  1Btq&6k,  lETOO,  alt.  niTOX. 
n.  pr.  63.  Ass.  eq.  abattu. 

?  138  B5. 

“  a  contractor.”  Pf9’  n. 

“a  contract.”  Pf5,  aoiatf  (N^S)  ib.  8. 

“  also.”  Zp5.  The  x  is  prosthet.  or  D3X  may  be  a  cpd.  of 
f|K  (or  TX)  +  D3. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  630? 
n.  pr.  P  1245,  v.  xtaa. 

(1)  v.  “to  hire,  rent.”  Pf215  (?).  Pael  “las'*  N  232,  279  ; 
Aph.  “OP  N  27  jnav  ib.  143,  cf.  infr.  and  v.  XYOK,  xmax 
and  v.  PpaSK. 

(2)  in  “0X2  “for  hire.”  149  BC  11. 

30,  37,  “book,  document”;  xrTON  “a  letter,”  Pf35> 22  (v. 
Marti,  p.  51*;  Hb.  JVJJtf,  B.  Ar.  KI?^K). 

n.  pr.  (=  ayaOrj)  P  Eut.  39,  cf.  nrOX  on  Hb.  inscr.  no.  61 
(loc.  cit.). 

n  pr.  (=  dyaOayyeXos)  PzMG  xviii.  p.  104  (a  =  yy,  cf. 

■s  0  -X 

|_^Q_2LC0  =  cr7r6yyog). 

n.  pr.  P  341  (perh.  from  “ix  in  Ph.  “jxaJY  v.  Bloch,  and 
□IX  =  Audios,  the  sun-god  ?  v.  We.  Held.  61). 
n.  pr.  (“  little  lord  ”)  P  341. 

n.  pr.  162,  1694,  1831,  28  61,  P  21,  231,  ms2;  Gr.  eq. 

A  3 

c\  •  'Ose 

oSacvaOos,  ooatvaros,  v.  VOJ  vi.  313  ;  and  cf.  Ar.  *Lo3t. 
'X  the  family  name  of  the  celebrated  king  of  Tadmor 
( v .  Blau,  ZMG  xv.  440,  Vog.  Syr.  29  ff.). 

Adar  cm  the  twelfth  month,  February,  N  24G,  P  83, 
103,  133,  194,  946,  Sach.  1,  M.  75,  Schr.  I5  al. 

n.  pr.  “ruptured  ”)  319b. 

pi.  “figures,  images.”  Pf329,  Gr.  drSpiaVres,  cf.  MH 
D'PKTIX  NHWB  i.  32b,  and  Syr.  form  !&_.)>  ZMG 
xxxvi.  154,  156  on  an  inscr.  fr.  Edessa. 
n.  pr.  Pmi92. 

n.  pr.  Adrian;  P  Sach.  i.  (w.  x  also  in  MH),  cf.  DIPYin. 

J  *  oi- 

n.  pr.  “toothless”),  161,  21,  cf.  in  Lihyan,  v.  Rev . 

Sem.  1894,  April,  p.  171,  and  n.  pr.  loc.  aSpaya  ZMG 
xxxviii.  538. 


14 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


an«*  v-  in  nninx  “thou  didst  love  him,”  1503. 


m« 

rt»x 

now 


n.  pr.  (dub.)  N  252  alt.  '^"IHX,  'SlHX. 

or,  21 13,  N  26>7,  35> 6,  45>6,  105’6,  12e>7  al.,  Zh16’26,  Pfi2, 

(DX  113a>  17  dub.,  }n  IX  or  if,  224”. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  [370]  474. 

n.  pr.  ?  Sin.  399. 

n.  pr.  (=  c irvxn's'!)  P  Schr.  63,  Schr.-S.  21,  Eut.  45. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  323®,  325,  403,  519,  621,  v.  ifcjqx. 

f.  “servant”  641 ;  cf.  Ass.  avilu,  -t,  and  Hb.  (THE) 
“man  of  Merodach.” 


“inn,  restin 
al.). 


g-place”  (cf.  Syr.  hob  N  6', 


>  X3"lX  (Renan, 


n.  pr.  Osiris,  1222,  w.  xr6x,  “Osiris  the  God,”  1411, 
142;  nDX  128;  'Bn  nDIX  1 2 3 1 — 2,  Osiris-apis,  Gr.  Serapis 


v.  >sn  and  cf.  Min.  qmrix  J.  As.  1893  t.  2,  p.  524. 
Dyi£)*)fc$  n.  pr.  m.  (=  cu^povto?  ?)  N  162. 
m(«)  n.  pr.  dub.  Sin.  149,  alt.  ”o. 

N’SflK  n.  pr.  f.  Aurelia  P  67 h 

D'S'VIX  n.  pr.  Aurelius  P  41,  71,  151,  201  al.  Sacli.  1.  Abbrev. 

TlX  P  123®  (Ox.  3)2,  so  Gr.  equiv.  avp.  Incorrectly 
written  D'^IX  P  243. 

n.  pr.  loc.  Jerusalem,  320  b,  cf.  ^ *  Aland. 

DX^XTlX,  but  B.  Ar. 

P1K*  Ar.  mis ,  “a  gift,”  in  1^1X3X  and  the  following  cpd.  pr.  ns. : 

n.  pr.  Sin.  [8],  103,  147,  267,  289,  567,  ib.  142 
'^J&XBnx.  In  Sin.  48,  344,  541,  559  w.  sup- 


Htm 

lEOK 


pression  of  x. 

n.  pr.  (aus’  allah)  Sin.  41,  without  final  '  of  genitive, 
cf.  auxilaos  (y.  We.  Held.  3). 

n.  pr.  Sin.  566,  611,  633,  677,  in  555,  638  'n^1X,  cf. 
Sab.  n^DIX. 

v.  ^ynSxKnx. 
v.  nn?x. 

n.  pr.  163A,  1732,  245,  341  ;  Sin.  11,  24,  25,  33,  34  and 
43  t.  Cf.  dim.  iGjrqx,  and  frequent  avcrog  on  Gr.  inscr. 
v.  l&n. 


'&)X  n.  pr.  Praa  iii.  28,  no.  2. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


15 


•  •  •  •  • 

♦anix 

TX 

Tnr« 

i&tx 

nx 


xnonx 

nnx 

nnx 

Sinx 

’Jinx 

ninx* 

TPIX* 

vnx 

nin’nx 

naSnx 

•dVdi-ik 

loxnx 

nnx 


nnx 


v.  ^m^XPIX. 
v.  Matrix. 

n.  pr.  club.  N  278,  but  CIS  (224)  rd.  jn  IX,  “or  if.” 

Zh7,  P9,  perh.  =  TX  “whatever”  (acc.  to  Sach.  =  Hb.  TN, 
B.  Ar.  t?*!X  “then”),  cf.  nTX  a  relative  pronoun  in  Zp2, 
and  v.  Wi.  AF  105. 
v.  s.  n'x. 

n.  pr.  3362,  cf.^ejl  “a  tooth,”  alt.  1S3X. 

✓ 

“brother,”  cstr.  23 1 2,  N  145,  P  Schr.  23,  w.  suff.  3  m.  S. 
Minx  1954,  Sin.  415®  ;  P  83,  90s,  123®  (Ox.)3,  M74,  ninx 
N  652,  P  946,  1176 ;  niMX  P  825;  3  f.  S.  ninx  2261, 
.1MX  Praa  ii.  68;  nnx  P  1054;  2  m.  pi.  D3nx  Zh29  ;  pi. 
cstr.  MX  Zb14  ;  suff.  3  m.  S.  Minx  N  122,  P  Eut.  i. ;  3  f.  S. 
HMX  (cf.  and  v.  s.  13)  N  153;  3  m.  pi.  jMMX  P  734 
( v .  Vog.  Syr.  p.  153)  [123®  (Ox.1)  7].  For  cpds.  of  nx  v. 
Gray  HPN  40  f.,  and  cf.  13^nx  1  3M“MX. 

“community”  P  712,  Gr.  equiv.  kolv<jl>vov  Xafieiv,  v.  s.  “i3n. 

(1)  v.  N  552  “to  prepare,”  or  “occupy”  (CIS). 

(2)  q  |D  nnx  109  “one  of  those”  (but  nn  is  usual). 
al.  nnx  “another,”  or  perh.  “the  last.” 

n.  pr.  dub.  Sin.  504,  v.  MSnX^xniy. 
n.  pr.  (“my  little  brother”)  1544. 

“sister,”  cstr.  nnx  2246,  pi.  w.  suff.  nmnx  1508,  N  43, 
but  nnnx  N  104,  Dnmnx  N  83,  v.  nnnx. 
v.  “to  hold,”  only  in  Z,  pu,  1  S.  nMX  b11,  impf.  rnx' 
ntan  “  hold  the  sceptre  ”  h15>  20>25  1  S.  tnx  h3. 

5  > 

n.  pr.  (^^£.1  “little  brother”)  N  108,  v.  MXnny,  and  cf. 
VOJ  vi.  308. 

n.  pr.  Praa  ii.  24,  n.  3,  Wr.  Psba  viii.  n.  1,  v.  XI n\ 
n.  pr.  (cpd.  of  nx  V)  93. 

n.  pr.  231,  2  w.  n3,  “son  of  the  brother  of  or  “son 
of  'X.” 

n.  pr.  Sin.  385,  v.  1DHX. 

(1)  “posterity,”  nnX3  (w.  2  essentiae)  N  193,  w.  sufl. 
nnnx  3374,  N  22,  onnnx  2032,  N  32,  perh.  borrowed  fr. 
Lihyan.  Fern,  form  w.  suff.  nnnnx  Nerab  210. 

(2)  v.  “to  be  quiet,  silent,”  145  b2  1 


16 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


mnx 

n'mnx 

pn«* 

lann# 


\x 

ITX* 


p'StO'K 

tk 

)W'X 

rm 

xrvx 

pmt 

7VK 


(3)  prep.  }DT  TIX  “after  the  time  of  its  being  built” 
1585,  w.  H  2247,  cf.  run  nPIK  Dn.  ii.  29. 

(4)  v.  s.  nnx  (2). 

“another,”  Nerab  l13,  cf.  pnx. 
n.  pr.  (cpd.  of  nx)  147  b11c. 

“another”  (cf.  PTn^  Dn.  ii.  11  ah),  XJ"inX  2155,  pi.  m. 
pinx  145  a4,  f.  xrpmx  Pf318,  cf.  mnx. 

n.  pr.  (^*^£.1  “deaf”)  Sin.  208,  cf.  XfcJnn. 

n.  pr.  1221  (=  n-13X  nnx  “sister  of  her  father,”  cf.  Sab. 

IHDXnnx  “sister  of  his  mother”  ZMG  xix.  273,  Talm. 

-7>  n  -X  7 

Ph.  ilDnS,  Syr.  OllD3(l_»o"|,  ayia /3o<;  Jos.  Ant. 
xvii.  10.  4,  Hb.  3xnx  and  v.  YOJ  vi.  311  f.). 

in  Jpi  \x  186’  ? 

only  in  Z,  mng.  dub.  (some  read  fntx),  P3  PUX  YI'X, 
p17  nn'N,  cf.  H30,  “families”?  (v.  s.  n).  The  reading 
TflTX  p3  is  testified  by  Wi.  AF  106. 

adj.  (iraAiko?  “Italian”),  w.  JOD  Pf24°;  fp^D'X  ")DX 
F36’34;  v.  s.  "iDX . 
v.  W>X. 

n.  pr.  loc.  Sin.  551,  the  well-known  Elath  (Ll^'X)  at  the 
head  of  the  Gulf  of  Akabah. 

t*)  t 

n.  pr.  “unmarried,”  or  “a  kind  of  serpent”)  274, 
cf.  Sab.  Rev.  Sem.  Jan.  1896,  p.  66,  1.  2. 
v.  ironx. 

lyar  (“PN),  the  second  month,  May,  161,  col.  3  [2034], 
N  810,  99,  138,  2713,  P  884,  m  l4,  178. 

“man,”  1 41 2,  145  a2d5,  P  712,  written  (so  in  SI,  MI) 
ZH34). 

n.  pr.  313,  cf.  Ar.  Ibn  Dor.  229,  235. 
v.  7VX. 

mng.  dub.  “  woman  ”  (?)  Pfi46>  47  NIVX  “in  X"01  YJY  IX 
(cf.  MH  xri'X),  or  perh.  some  kind  of  measure  ? 

n.  pr.  dub.  314  A. 

particle,  “there  is,”  N  92,  27n,  w.  a  2114,  N  37,  47,  ll5, 
127,  148,  207>  11 ;  in  Pfs25  jyx,  B.  Ar.  'JVX  cf.  No.  Maud. 
293,  v.  infr.  and  cf.  s.  nK”1?. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


17 


Sa'rvx 


1133X 

piax 


Sax 

ttSox 

tax 

x'tax 

'ajax 

xiiDax 


x'joax 

xaaax 


Sx 

Sx 


Sx 

Sx 

ibtdxSx 

lEnnxSx 

abx* 

iSyaSx 


n.  pr.  1 9 63  (mng.  dub.  “Bel  exists”),  cf.  TVK  Dn.  ii.  28, 

oo  y 

>  “  whom  Bel  has  given  ” ;  cf.  Syr.  1otAij>A_»]  and  perh. 

x 

Hb.  T)\S',  “OVK,  bfrOri'N,  i6o)/3a\ov  Jos.  Ant.  viii.  13.  2, 
j.loA_»]  Wr.  Mart.  p.  }_»,  1.  3. 

n.  pr.  “great”)  Sin.  [73],  308,  310,  489a,  v.  *D“D. 

n.  pr.  75.  Sach.  reads  m“DX,  v.  ZA,  1891,  432. 

(1)  v.  “to  eat,”  2  m.  S.  rfatf  Zp9,  Impf.  145  a4  (cf. 

Dn.  iv.  30),  Juss.  137  b3  (cf.  similar  omission 
of  \  in  n2&0  Jer.  x.  11),  Inf.  ^3*6  n8  JJV  Zh23. 

(2)  “  food  ”  Zh9. 

n.  pr.  (wA.^1  “rabidus”)  1821,  1842,  v. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  250. 

n.  pr.  (cf.  Acilarius,  Aquilarius  ?)  P  Schr.  65. 

v.  •Q^N. 

Pza6,  i^eSpa,  “an  open  porch  or  lobby  before  a  door”  (cf. 
NTID2K  Targ.  Jud.  iii.  23,  n—  Middoth  l5,  Tamid  l3  al.). 
pi.  £eVoi  “foreigners,”  P  164. 

n.  pr.  (j*j£s>\  “noble”)  326. 
n.  pr.  P  Cl.-Gan.  128  no.  10? 

(1)  n.  pr.  div.  “El.”  Zh2,  p22,  cf.  cpds.  below  and  bfcOn, 
tanT,  i>.XBT  (Impf.  4-  “El,”  cf.  Gray  HPN  214  ff.); 
‘xxc'po,  b.s'by,  'pxm,  btim,  ^so'p-i. 

(2)  “people,”  or  “clan”  i. q.  Ar.  Jl,  v.  DC^oy,  VSp. 

(3)  prep,  “to”  (a  Hebraism),  wiD  144,  unless  rather, 

“El,  my  lord.”  235  A1  “in  the  days  of,”  rd. 

perh.  w.  Hal.  (Rev.  Sem.  Apr.  1894,  p.  167)  '''D'bv, 
v.  D^y. 

(4)  negat.  “not,”  Zh22>  23  (also  in  B.  Ar.). 

(5)  the  Ar.  article,  in  several  cpd.  pr.  n.,  e.g.  ^yi^KEPIX, 
etc. 

n.  pr.  (u^j^O  Sin.  548,  cf.  1S5H2D. 
n.  pr.  (al’  akhrasu)  Sin.  539. 
v.  “  to  instruct  ”  (n*?X  =  v.  s.  n)  “it  C^N*  Zh34. 
n.  pr.  (“the  Baal”)  Sin.  327,  437,  [601]. 


2 


18 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


vnSx 

xj8x* 


x’K’jSx 


ux-bx 

\iW?X 

r8x 

r8x 

nSx 

xnSx 


pnSx 

’W?x 

i^anSx 

mrba 


v.  vrttf. 

in  N^N“ny,  apparently  a  divine  name,  cf.  fcO^NDEN  on  a 
Syr.  seal  (Levy,  Siegel  u.  Gemmen ,  p.  51),  and  rd.  perh. 
agaOaXyrj  in  CIG  4643  b.  For  to  cf.  perh.  Ph. 
and  v.  Eut.  Nab.  p.  75. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  419. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  662,  cf.  1KHJ. 

n.  pr.  loc.  P  44,  Eut.  423,  oAoyeoaas,  Yologesias,  in 
Babylonia,  known  in  Mohammedan  times  as  al-Kufa. 
Named  after  the  first  king  of  the  Parthians.  v.  Mordt. 
Beit.  6  ff.,  and  No.  ZMG  xxviii.  93  fF. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  620,  cf.  12^1. 

n.  pr.  54,  w.  r\'2,  i.  q.  Ass.  el-edil-ani  (cf.  Assur-edil-ilan), 
or  bit-alid-ilani,  “  temple  of  the  father  of  the  gods  ”  ? 
v.  also  ZA  xi.  234. 

(1)  “conspiracy,”  Zp2  <  ntK  “which.” 

(2)  pron.  pi.  of  nn  1571;  N  [86],  103.  N  Pet.3,  cf. 
Jer.  x.  11,  Ezr.  v.  15  Ketib,  perh.  to  be  pronounced 
nks\ 

(3)  w.  139  b4  possibly  =  “  unless.” 

“god”  1222,  146  B43,  N  47,  P  153,  108  al.  (with  reference 
to  Adrian  P  163),  cstr.  P  123“  (Ox.  I)7,  1742,  1764, 
21 P,  N  ll6,  1 2s,  213;  coll,  in  HiO  “  the  gods  of  '•>  ” 
Zp2,  w.  sufF.  i—  N  89  dub.,  1  pi.  jr6x  145  c7,  pi. 
113a20  (w.  KOX  “gods  and  men,”  cf.  Zp23,  Judg.  ix.  13), 
Zp23,  h4’  12’  13 ;  emph.  wrbv*  185°,  21 P;  P  l3,  24,  35, 
cstr.  w.  113a6>1°,  p-|¥E  145  D2,  and  w.  h&O 

Zp22,  w.  sufF.  prpr&K  p  l4,  DiTnta  145  a2.  enters 

into  the  composition  of  numerous  pr.  ns.,  v.  s. 

'am,  's5?n,  nay,  etc. 

n.  pr.  (“Bel  is  god”)  often  in  P  37 — 58,  m  40,  Eut.  23, 
VOJ.  A  6a,  Gr.  equiv.  eAa /3r]\os. 

n.  pr.  (“  El  has  bought  ”)  P  Eut.  24,  cf.  fcOM  and  Syr.  n. 
pr. 

n.  pr.  48  ? 

n.  pr.  Sin.  529  (cf.  perh.  .  .ED^N  ib.  361). 

n.  pr.  P  34,  701,  Schr.-S.  3,  4,  eXaaaa,  for  NG^ES? 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


19 


“  Gocl  is  the  sun  ”  (Baeth.  Beit.  303),  or  perh.  for 
f6x  “  God  lifts  up.” 

xmSx  “goddess,”  N  403,  w.  suff.  Dnnr6x  1821,  v.  xn^>X. 
bx  pron.  pi.  “these”  138  a  25,  N  Pet.4’ 5,  cf.  Tallin 
MH  -lW. 

Elul ,  the  6th  month,  September,  N  l3,  P  79b,  123a 
(Ox.  I)1,  Sach.  6,  Eut.  1,  al.  ;  Wx  Pvoj.  a  l5,  Pm27. 

rniSx  n.  pr.  Sin.  347,  v.  in. 

ty'ba  v. 

v^njnSx  n.  pr.  Sin.  371,  cf.  in  Q. 

^  •  nSx  n.  pr.  ?  Sin.  45. 

it6x  n.  pr.  Sin.  131,  139,  and  perh.  ib.  8  for  VQ^X. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  43,  262,  491,  521,  598,  cf.  ^J\kL  in  Q. 
HTvSx  n-  Pr-  (“  El  gives”)  78. 

'ibx  pron.  pi.  “these”  145  bc  (cf.  B.  Ar.  1^8). 

n-  Pr*  (“soothsayer”)  Sin.  169,  217,  cf.  UPD. 

•  •  n-  pr.  frag.  Sin.  301. 

spnSx  n.  pr.  (cpd.  of  ^>x  and  P]*D  Ar.  “turn  away”  ?)  N  42. 

’Dpbx  n.  pr.  (“whom  El  covers”)  47  22  (cf.  perh.  aXeAos  and  v. 
We.  Held.  206,  ri.  1). 

DmUDriSx  n.  pr.  (aAefarSpos)  P  15’,  264,  DVID^K  Pf2.  Shortened 
in  MH  to  'D^X,  HDD^,  etc.  (Dal.  143  f.). 

n.  pr.  Sin.  170,  209,  225  al.,  cf.  PTD. 

[pinSSx  n.  pr.  18,  Ass.  equiv.  -azzi,  perh.  [ilulu]-azzi,  “may  El 


■nppa^x 


be  looking  ” 


n.  pr.  (  J-A’+’O’)  t  1  ‘  a  neat-herd,”  or  “one  who  is  cut  from 
* 

the  body  of  his  mother,”  cf.  albakir  Ibn  Dor.  175  [No.]), 
Sin.  3,  71,  82,  +  21  t.,  ib.  87  nplD^I  for  'c6xi ;  cf. 
a\/ju>(3aKK€pov  (Leps.  86). 

n.  pr.  (“El  is  king”)  28,  cf.  Hb.  and  eX/xaAayov, 

Miller  121. 

jSx  (1)  t  259. 

jSx  (2)  “gods”  ?  P  93G. 

(3)  Pron-  “these”  1115,  PI1,  33a>2,  f6,  M31,  Eut.  1, 
Wr.  p.  3,  cf.  B.  Ar. 


2—2 


20 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


v&bx 

\r\ba 

xj^x 

s^x 

s^x* 

spx 

VSxSx 

rfc'xSx 
Dfipbx 
. . .  zhx 

VDB^X 

• . .  ycAx 
r8x 


•mr8x 

DX 


max 

n&x 

W&X 

jvdx 

xbax 


n.  pr.  (“El  expels”)  N  44,  v.  VS3. 

n.  pr.  (“El  gives”)  1542,  so  in  Hb.,  and  cf.  above, 

n.  pr.  Pvoj.  B5. 

(1)  “a  thousand”  149c12,  2115,  N  39,  48,  2712,  pi.  \'zbx, 
w.  pn  N148,  w.  nn^Jl  ib.  97,  pi.  cstr.  145b7, 

(perhaps  “leaders,”  cf.  Hb.  ^N). 

(2)  v.  q'pNJV  N  27,  2010,  2710,  “to  compose  (a  book), 

write,”  cf.  Ar.  vJUt. 

(3)  “ox,”  Nab.  Sach. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  539,  574. 

Sin.  445  ? 

n.  pr.  (Alcimus)  Pf228. 
w.  JYQ  ?  1547. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  567,  cf.  Palm.  ? 

Sin.  309  1 

n.  pr.  “the  goddess  al-Lat,”  1821,  1832,  N  34,  P  86 ; 
called  in  1856  “the  mother  of  the  gods,”  1 7 04  N  “)EO 
(“priest  of  al-Lat”),  cf.  W  2203,  2308,  etc.,  where  often 
identified  w.  Athene.  frequently  found  in  cpd.  pr. 

ns.  fr.  Safa,  e.g.  rfcfcOn1’  ftasmy  (J.  As.  1882,  i.  479), 
v.  also  rbnvx,  n^nni,  rb^w,  rAnny,  and  rbvbw,  perh. 
also  Gadlat  (Isaac  of  Antioch,  i.  214)  =  “  luck  of  al-Lat  ” 
(v.  We.  Heid.  25  ff.,  WRS  Sem.  56,  n.  3,  Kin.  292, 
Baeth.  Beit.  58,  90,  97,  271,  297). 
n.  pr.  Sin.  353. 

“mother,”  cstr.  161,  21,  1855,  N  243  [276],  w.  suff.  1  S. 
*>DN  Cil.3;  3  m.  S.  1222,  N42;  3  pi.  DHDN  N  252, 
Pmi76,  cf.  -iryrox. 

n.  pr.  66,  2,  Ass.  equiv.  ummadata. 
n.  pr.  f.  (“maid-servant”),  N  V  [271 3]  [P  61  c3],  cf. 
HON  infr.,  v.  No.  YOJ  vi.  310,  n.  1,  and  Eut.  Nab. 
p.  74. 

n.  pr.  (“  faithful  ”)  320A,  3474. 

n.  pr.  f.  (<L*I,  dim.  of  riDK),  N  124  [211,  l2]. 

n.  pr.  P  891,  994  (Mordt.  rds.  iOD.K). 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


21 


J25X 

pX 

Xl&X 

“llpiX 

ISOX 

“lOX 


TDX* 

max 

nox 

xsnax 


nax 

xnax 

xnax 

’nSxnax 

xnnax 

nSnax 

x\*nax 

xix* 

XJX 

mix 

nix 


UX  •  •  • 

"aim 


(1)  “a  bond,”  Zh11  '2  JftN  rHD  “he  made  a  covenant,”  cf. 
HTON  niD  Neh.  x.  1,  and  |0*K  Is.  xxv.  1. 

(2)  adj.  Zp21,  bl'  “  an  ever-flowing  stream,”  i.  q.  Hb. 
;n'K  bn:  (Hal.). 

“a  craftsman,”  1644,  166,  Nab.  Sach.,  cf.  |EN  Cantic. 
vii.  2. 

n.  pr.  (“the  mother  helps”)  43  a1. 
n.  pr.  dub.  P  815.  Mordt.  rds.  b--2N. 

(1)  v.  “  to  say,”  149  b  c3,  145  b3,  235  b,  138  b4,  Zp21  ;  3  f. 
n-HDK,  1412,  ib.  1  S.,  Zh21’29.  PI.  iton  138  b2  [149  a1]; 
Impf.  TON'  Zh29,  jlTON'  145  d8. 

(2)  “lamb,”  pi.  K'TON  Ppi41. 

“  a  word,”  w.  suff.  3  m.  S.  HHTON  Zh26>  32. 
alt.  'TON  301  ? 

n.  pr.  P  22,  for  N&TOG^TON  (v.  s.  N6P),  cf.  a/xpio-a/xcros 
W  2587  “man  of  the  sun”  (Baeth.  Beit.  89,  YOJ  vi. 
314,  n.  2). 

x  p 

n.  pr.  f.  (£*l  “maid-servant”)  N  281,  peril,  in  TON  ':n 
“give,  hand-maid  !  ”  1506,  cf.  dim.  J"TON,  and  v.  infr. 

(1)  235  A3  in  xb  NH'l  NTO  TON  NnON  ?? 

(2)  n.  f.  “maid-servant,”  19a;  and  as  a  n.  pr.  fern.  P  531, 
59 1 ;  cf.  cpds.  infr. 

n.  pr.  (“  hand-maid  of  Allah  ”)  Sin.  602. 
n.  pr.  fam.  Pm33. 

n.  pr.  f.  (“hand-maid  of  al-Lat  ”)  P  Schr.  14,  v.  ZMGr 
xxxix.  357. 

n.  pr.  dub.  P511,  rd.  perh.  N3TON,  and  cf.  NUflblD  ? 

(1)  v.  n*:n'  N  46  “to  lend”;  but  acc.  to  CIS = N:n  “to 
profit.” 

(2)  n.  pr.  f.  Praa  i.  164,  n.  1,  ii.  144. 

n.  pr.  P  Wr.  p.  4,  Lat.  equiv.  annubathus. 

pron.  “I,”  137  A3,  340,  Zb[1]>  20,  Oil.1,  and  appended 
to  ptcp.  Oil.5,  n:N  nny,  ib.  6  niNinCTO.  So  perh.  in 
n:N  ntnD  Nerab  25,  cf.  n:N  in  B.  Ar.  (Baer  on  Dn.  ii.  8) 
and  “pN  infr. 
frag.  n.  pr.  239. 
n.  pr.  ?  146  b4>  8. 


22 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


coll,  “man,”  N  27,  93,  126,  Nab.  Pet.5 ;  in  N  144  wrongly 
written  (notice  )  written  plene,  and  that 

Dn.  iv.  13  is  not  necessarily  a  Hebraism),  cf.  WW,  GWK. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  403,  Onesimus  ? 

'■ptf  pron.  “  I,”  Zh1,  '33N  ib.  P19,  "px  similarly  in  MI. 
n.  pr.  1 9 1 1  j  cf-  ava/Aos  and  v.  ZMG  xv.  448. 

N  402,  v.  1DTN  (cf.  Ar.  anif  “  nose  ”). 

coll,  “man,”  17,  113a’20,  Zp23,  h29,  DJHD  B50K  “any  man,” 
Pf11,  pi.  perh.  in  149  bc12,  'tyjx  Zh30. 


“woman,  wife,”  cstr.  nnx  P  492,  5 1  “,  Pmi23,  Cl.-Gan. 
p.  303  (cf.  Targ.  nn'&s) ;  w.  suff.  3  S.  nnnJN  N  73,  126  al. ; 
1695,  1733,  nnntf  1584,  161  f,  P  33®’  14,  Sach.  1,  pi. 

Zp8,  cf.  |iiw:  Dn.  vi.  25.  nnx  *>3p  Pm 33,  on  a  seal  is 
rendered  “  received  a  wife,”  or  “  the  receiving  of  a 
wife”?  cf.  MH  NljK$,  etc. 

DX  part.  Eg.,  properly  aus,  “she  is  of,”  cf.  O.T.  H3DX,  and 
Gr.  aaarja'L's  (“  she  is  of  Isis  ”),  v.  infr. 

n.  pr.  (“she  is  of  Hnumu  ”)  155  A2,  cf.  DUflDD. 

D1DDX  n.  pr.  (“she  is  of  Tumu  ”)  155  A3. 

n.pl.  (=  (TTfjo/3 lXol)  “fir  apples”  Pf315,  cf.  MH  tanBDX, 
NHWB  i.  121a. 


JtFlfcDDK  ( =  o-rpar^yos)  “general,”  P  152,  in  244  JCnBDK  (for 

v.  KarnDK. 

myontDx  w.  n—  snff.  3  m.  S.  P  174,  abstr.  formed  by  adding 
Aram.  term,  to  Gr.  crTpaTrj-yos,  cf.  MH  Nni^D“lX,  and 
v.  Nnmr6s. 


[N']'lCnt5DK  pi-  =  (rrpanwrai,  P  164. 

'DK  n.  pr-  “the  deity  Isis,”  135,  146  b  44,  cf.  'DNtDD. 

X'DK  “physician,”  N  91. 

|DlS  DDK  ?  P  952  “  a  purification  from  (two)  maledictions,”  v. 
imSpDK. 


jODN 

n»DX 

niDN 

K3DSDK 


n.  pr.  (isi-men,  “Isis  is  firm,”  or  asmen,  “...  is  firm”) 
138  a1. 

n.  pr.  (“she  is  of  Mut”)  155  a1,  b1. 

f.  “  store,”  Zp6,  cf.  Syr.  }±£d"|,  Hb.  DDK . 

n.  pr.  loc.  P  54  w.  the  fortress  of  Hispasina  near 
mod.  village  of  Bassorah,  and  close  to  the  junction  of 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


23 


pSDK 

pSDX 


N2n3(DX) 

nnsox 

J&lSpDX 

X1DX 

iSinoK 

amox 

“pTDx 

HriD“lDX 

xjmax 

xtyx 

Tiyx 

rab'yx 

xSyx 

S|X* 


the  Tigris  and  Euphrates,  (nracnvov  yapa£,  v'  Yog.  Byr. 
10  £.,  Mordt.  Beit.  12  f. 
n.  pr.  P  1002  ;  cf.  p'QD. 

108  XDD3  'T  NnnD  ^p1?  'X.  Not  to  be  derived  from 
sj  12D  “  to  write,”  nor  Zend,  aspereno  “a  talent,”  but  cf. 
KTIBDK  Ezr.  v.  8  al.  “  careful,  correct  ”  (Pehlv.  spur, 
New  Pers.  ispari,  v.  Marti,  Glossar  s.  v.)  “correct,  in 
accordance  w.  the  silver  stater”  (v.  Knno). 

P  166  connected  by  Yog.  w.  WI2DK  (sup.),  v.  WID. 
n.  pr.  (“she  is  of  Ptah”)  155  b  6,  cf.  nriDLDQ  and  Ph. 
nnsiny. 

P  952  for  [Yog.],  cf.  o-KaXevOpov  “tongs,  oven- 

rakes”  (Hal.  Mel.  cTepig.  101  f.),  or  peril,  rd. 
i.e.  iTTLfxeXrjTr/s  “  superintendent  ”  (Cl.-Gan.). 

“an  As,”  ao-adpiov  Pfi41,  F223,  pi.  pDN  Fin>  48,  "IDK 

F36’  34,  cf.  “ID'K  in  Talm.  Kidd.  1,  1,  and  cf. 

NHWB  i.  68“. 

n.  pr.  (“Osiris  is  good”  [Eg.  nefer] )  155b5,  cf.  cpds.  of 
Osiris  below. 

n.  pr.  43  a2.  Ass.  asuram  for  assur-raham,  “whom 
Assur  pities  ”  1 

n.  pr.  (“Osiris  reigns  or  is  king”)  155b4,  cf.  Ph. 

-carte. 

n.  pr.  (Assur-sar-usur,  “Assur  protect  the  king”)  50, 

v.  “ivxq:. 

“general”  (=  crTpaTrjyos,  cf.  MH  'D"lDK,  'tD“lD),  N  152,  161, 
277,  1602  [1692],  1952,  1962;  fcUimDX  287  ;  M*mDK  238  : 
NamnDN  319“;  pi.  K'JmDK  235  A2,  V.  JttTODK. 
n.  pr.  a  divine  name,  N  212,  alt.  fcoytf,  perhaps  “an 
idol  or  object  of  religious  worship  ”  (Academy,  Dec.  26, 
1885,  no.  712). 

n.  pr.  P  Cl.-Gan.  122,  no.  3,  perh.  ethnic,  cf.  aov&yvoL 
W  2236,  a ovtS^ros  pa\xov  ib.  2272,  v.  RAA  ii.  24,  no.  2, 
and  cf.  1T1U. 

n.  pr.  PI2,  123“  (Ox.  3)3 ;  Gr.  eq.  aaiXaguv. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  76,  117,  151,  343  +  9  t.  tttfm  ib.  402,  cf. 
fiapeaXas  “  son  of  ts  ”  1  J.  As.  1896,  t.  viii.  329. 

(1)  “face,”  in  prep,  phrase  NftTl  'SiN  }D  113“  l4,  “from 
the  face  of  Tema”  (for  3  cf.  Dn.  ii.  46). 


24 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


S)K 

f)“0SN 


WSK 
•  •tOSK 

xsnbsx 

*3X 

tafiX 

•  3SX 
KXSX 


insx 

nnsx 


'nsx 

vnsx 

N'SXX 

Tbvn 

■rcx 

’Snsx 


trSpx 

xapx 


(2)  part.  “also,”  139  a3,  P  167,  fi46,  PS4’ 14  al. 

“a  writing,”  223  (Eut.  Nab.  26  113BN),  cf.  from 

v7roypacfi'ij,  k.£)‘r~ (in  Bar  Bahlul)  fr.  eViypat^. 
Frank.  VOJ  iv.  341  rds.  V1J1N  (^/UN)  “a  biring-out.” 
n.  pr.  CIL2,  >  '6WBN  (Hal.  cfs.  d7rd£ios). 
n.  pr.  frag.  155  B5. 

“procurator”  (=  €7riVpo7ros),  P  241,  252,  261,  272,  cf.  MH 

dibub'bn. 

in  “01  'BN  PF33’36,  idn  'BN  ib.  7,  ek  SrjvdpLov,  “per 
Denar,”  etc.,  cf.  use  in  Syr.  of 

n.  pr.  Sin.  143,  cf.  Ar.  ^0^)1  Ibn  Dor.  197. 
n.  pr.  f.  239  [d]JBK  or  [']aBN. 

n.  pr.  N  108,  248  (cf.  ISDN  DHM  Ep.  Denk.  30,  32, 

|^Z)|  “a  gall-nut”  (Low,  n.  51),  and  ^-asl  Ibn  Dor. 
196,  etc.). 

n.  pr.  146  b43,  followed  by  501  NI"6n,  cf.  perh.  uapuaitu 
(apuaitu),  one  of  the  forms  of  Anubis. 

n.  pr.  m.  320  c,  Sin.  356  [388],  394*  ;  N  910,  108,  ll8, 

j  s 

167,  cf.  ^it  “a  kind  of  weakness  in  the  finger.”  In 

N  l.  c.  the  bearer  of  the  name  is  a  sculptor,  cf.  perhaps 
Ass.  patahu,  Ph.  nnB  ( v .  Bloch)  “  to  grave,  carve,” 

Hb.  mns. 

n.  pr.  P  Eut.  48. 

n.  pr.  f.  1ST  43,  243  (an  unusual  form  for  fern.  name). 

in  Nab.  Pet.  'N  rviNfcy  dub.,  but  see  Barth,  Hebr. 
July  1897,  p.  275. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  250,  376,  655. 

Ep7  'IN'  11 N  Dy  1VN  }£>  “  from  the  treasure  of  the  power¬ 
ful  people  of  '>  ”  (Hal.). 

n.  pr.  P  31,  Gr.  aaraXeiv,  alt.  (for  Ethpe.  form  cf. 

npynx). 

n.  pr.  P  123*  (Ox.  3)4,  Gr.  eq.  olkottclov  ;  v,  ZMG  xxiv. 
99. 

n.  pr.  P  36*’  2,  125,  Gr.  eq.  aKKaXeto-ov. 

n.  pr.  f.  (=  a Kpurj)  Pm12,  Sach.  2  [3],  RAA  ii.  24,  n.  3 ;  cf. 
ZMG  xxxv.  734 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


25 


n-  Pr-  (“big-head  ”  ?)  P  Eut.  10,  12,  16. 

VmN  n.  pr.  Sin.  370  [474]. 

n.  pr.  22,  Ass.  eq.  arbailu-asirat  “  (the  goddess)  Arbail 
is  kind,”  cf.  (Arbail  [Arbel]  another 

name  for  Istar). 

n.  pr.  412  (=  “A.  increased  me”). 

jqto  num.  “four,”  N  283,  'si  pntyy  N  64,  'N1  pyanK  N  149, 
Ny2“iN  Pf  title,  F339  ;  pi.  pynnK  “forty,”  1968  ;  N  129, 
138,  149  ;  N‘^ni  x  N  163> 4,  176',  v.  ym. 
xtonm  P  262,  272  (where  xrDJnK  is  a  misprint),  Gr.  equiv. 

dp-ya7r€Tr]<; ;  =  Gr.  -7 t€tt]s,  -TraTrjs  =  Pers.  ju  “  chief  ”  ; 

—  Pers.  j)j\  “fortress,”  hence  “commander  of  a 
fortress”;  cf.  Targ.  2  Chr.  xxviii.  7,  v.  ZMG  xviii. 

90,  xxii.  107  f. 

wms  “  contractor,”  Pf338,  =  epyoor^?  >  Syr.  jjO_^.5*|  “  purple,” 
Reckendorf,  ZMG  xlii.  405. 

[*W]NT1K  n.  pr.  17,  Arad-istar,  cf.  nmy 
jnrm  n.  pr.  Pm 59  (alt.  p"imi),  in  'N  nay  =  “  'X  has  made 
peace  ”  (but  v.  ND^BHiy). 

KWTIK  pi-  “  Romans,”  161,  32,  'X  “according  to  the  enume¬ 
ration  of  the  Romans.” 
om  n.  pr.  (  J  DIN  “  betroth  ”  ?)  N  101. 

’anx  n.  pr.  109.  Gr.  equiv.  apcr<nrr 79,  cf.  Zend,  erezifya, 
Sansk.  rjipiya  “  the  falcon  ”  ?  ( v .  Darmesteter,  J.  As. 
1888,  xii.  p.  509  f.,  Lag.  GA  222,  and  on  other  hand 
ZA  vii.  96,  n.  2,  100,  n.  2). 

rm  “a  way,”  Zp18;  N“in  mNp  “for  each  journey,”  Pf210. 
n’  Pr-  m*  (aribas,  Eg.  ?)  N  141,  cf.  Gr.  apvJ3a<;. 

-pa**  v.  “  to  prolong,”  Caus.  "pstn  Nerab  23. 

JIDIN*  “  archon  ”  (=  apywr),  pi.  fcOJianK  Pf2. 

“chest,”  2021  (but  v.  &oix),  1731;  pi.  piK  1115  “sarco¬ 
phagi.” 

n.  ethnic,  (fr.  “hare”?)  P  733,  alt.  'U3K  Mordt. 

Beit.  28. 


D*ViDD*lN  n-  Pr*  (dpnxTetS^s  “  Aristides  ”),  P  Cl. -Gan.  p.  303. 
HDDDnx  n.  pr.  f.  N  151’4;  =  apurTa^r],  dptaTO^evr)  (Gutschmid 
dpicTKo vaa,  CIS  Arsaxa). 

Njnx  “  earth,  land,”  Sin.  4633,  v.  Npnx. 


26 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


DTSTN 

IVIN 

xnviN 


NjTlN 


mmx 

D'm[N] 

PN 

wx 

VjmB’tx] 

WX 

Hl^N 

WO 

xwx 

TToWx 

JWX 

DK’N 

nse’x 

-ivx 

amvx 

new 

nx 


nx 


n.  pr.  (openers  ?)  Sin.  124. 

n.  pr.  (arsau,  v.  l¥“l)  P  139  (cf.  Sach.  14)  fcO'jn  'K  but 
Mordt.  rds.  '¥“IK  ‘‘be  gracious,”  v.  s.  KED. 

Nerab  l12  (w.  NT),  w.  suff.  'n¥"IK  ib.  28,  n— ,  ib.  I4. 
“Grave”?  cf.  Ass.  irzitu  “underworld”;  Cl. -Gan.  cfs. 
XDD“iy  “bier.” 

“  earth,  land,”  Zp5>  u,  h5,  b4  ;  NplX  't  pUD  “  Minas  of  the 

land,”  la,  2,.  3,  4;  cstr.  plK  Zh5,  p5;  28;  w.  suff. 

1p"IK  Zh13;  pi.  N'pl[N]  344,  cf.  KplN  Jer.  x.  11,  and  v. 

No.  Mand.  73,  ZMG  xlvi.  103,  Kau.  §  7,  v.  s.  p. 

n.  pr.  (Pers.  ...data?)  1004. 
n.  pr.  109,  Gr.  apTL/xas,  v.  '2PN. 
v.  s.  CPK. 

n.  pr.  (jwt  “lion”),  267,  300,  315,  cf.  ao-a8ov,  Miller 
121,  WRS  Kin.  192. 

n.  pr.  23,  Ass.  eq.  Istar-dur-qali  (“Istar  collect  the 
state  ”  ?). 
n.  pr.  Sin.  652. 

n.  pr.  “black”)  Sin.  106,  446,  511  (and  501  for 

n^us). 

n.  pr.  loc.  “Assyria,”  Zp7,  b!i. 

n.  pr.  113a>  16  (perh.  ib.  3),  Hal.  cfs.  Kl'DN  2"). 

n.  pr.  Oil.4,  > 'm2  i.e.  (cf.  “  queen  ”), 

the  'm2  ”  (an  ethnic). 

n.  pr.  “maimed”)  285. 

?  w.  ^2  1505,  perh.  ib.  7. 

“name,”  Zh10’21,  Yin  DE^K  12T'  “make  mention  of  Hadad’s 

O 

name”;  Ar.  Sam.  ;  and  cf.  prosth.  K  in  D3N. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  505. 

“a  place,”  Zp18,  h27,  w.  suff.  nX’K  h32,  Nerab  l8’  10.  v. 

ann« . 

n.  pr.  36.  Assur-tab  “  (one  to  whom)  Assur  turns,” 
cf.  Hb.  2'EP^N,  Sab.  ^2in ;  v.  s.  W. 

“woman,”  15,  cf.  Ass.  assatu. 

(1)  “a  place”  (=  Ass.  idi),  NTI'2  JIN  652,  Ass.  eq.  idi-biti 
“place  of  abode.” 

(2)  “thou,”  w.  p  “whoever  thou  (art)”  Nerab  l5,  28. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


27 


xnx* 

v'oS'nx 

lam 

npynx 

’33ns 

nnx 

sms 

poDinx 

iBHjnnx 

nnx 


3 

3 


1K2 

trxn 

"1X3* 

3’X3* 


v.  “to  come,”  pi.  Perf.  tnN  149  bc8!,  Impf.  NriN'  N  201 2. 
Aph.  (pronounced  T>^)  P  154 *,  v.  ZMG  xxii.  457 
anm.  2,  Duval,  Syr.  Gram.  82,  n.  1. 

P  154,  not  Itlip.  of  ,  but  TIN  (HD)  “as  he  brought 
hither  ”  (cf.  Levy,  ZMG  xxiii.  284). 

n.  pr.  (“snowy”  ?)  311  A1. 

n.  pr.  (^j|  “perfect”)  Sin.  50,  440,  489,  prob.  in  85 
(>  1 »'«),  385  (>  IDVnx),  and  387  (>  1^D2N). 
n.  pr.  Pvoj.  B3,  cf.  formation  of  \3SnN,  ^nVN. 
n.  pr.  P  91,  421,  v.  supr.,  andcf.  ZMG  xviii.  93,  xxiii.  288. 
n.  pr.  69  ? 

“a  place,”  235  a2,  Oil.6;  N  'Dl  N  207  “double  of 
the  usual  value,”  cstr.  nnx  145  c4;  DD1  '"I  “inND  Pf332  ; 
pfiwsno  h  m[N]n  ib.  33,  pi.  anna  N  Pet.3, 
n.  pr.  ethnic,  P  87® 3>  ^2  (alt.  pDptnx). 

n.  pr.  (“  holy  footstep  ”  ?  <  TN  =  *tny)  312  (=  N  48). 

v.  «nri3N. 


(1)  stands  for  a  in  and  DOJ.  As  a  sign  denoting 
“double”  ..At 2  15  pD,  “15  double  Minas  of...”  1®,  cf. 
2®,  3®,  4®.  In  384  an  abbreviation  (?). 

(2)  prep.  (1)  of  time,  frequently  in  TlJBa,  TTO  “in  the 
year,  month,”  etc.,  N'DIp  N'ODD  “in  former  times,”  Pf4. 
'SNSP  1 2  “on  the  1st  day  of...,”  146  a  21,  (2)  2  essentiae, 
"11160  N  1 93,  (3)  2  pretii,  b\>V2  Dia  Dpt  Zp6,  cf.  fp22 
“  (a  pledge)  for  silver,”  43  a3,  (4)  TO  “  by  means  of,” 
3233 ;  v.  s.  tibb),  *pn. 

n.  pr.  317,  cf.  Pers.  n.  du^j  (cf.  Wr.  Josh.  Styl. 

§  59  ?). 

“evil,”  1412,  cf.  Syr.  .  »  Targ.  D”60,  B.  Ar. 

NJISp'ND,  and  v.  Schwally  s.  -  » 

Nab.  Pet.  N')D  miNZl  “wells  of  water.” 

v.  caus.  “to  make  evil”;  Impf.  pi.  15^60  IT  Nerab  29. 

For  n  cf.  D13. 


28 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


jcqjo 

s|t3:o 

“03 

nja 

nua 


n*?na 

xm 

13m 

njtd 

^a 

tCDia 

*?ia— 


xSia 

paaVia 

xrtaa 

NJ^ia 


n.  pr.  P  1035  mng.  dub.,  v.  ZMG  xxviii.  512. 
n.  pr.  31  (“gate  of  cup-bearers,”  or  “markets”?). 


n.  pr.  125  (cf.  Ar. 
Aboth  v.  23). 
n.  pr.  146  b  42. 
n.  pr.  138  b3. 

?  153  a2. 


s  0  s 

La»j  “corpulent 


and  33J3  Mish. 


n.  pr.  (Pers.  -  /?ayopa£os)  P  Sach.  4. 

n.  pr.  f.  161,  21 ;  1ST  81,  cf.  /3aypaTo$  W  2562h>  \  and  Ar. 

*03  *  op  < 

pr.  n.  CJ.S+-)  al.  or  a/?yapos.  alt.  IVRQ  cf.  Ar. 

* 

0  ✓  J 


v.  bn. 

n.  pr.  60,  alt.  fcOlD. 

n.  pr.  P  73,  cf.  22123.  >  12322  [Vog.]  (y.  Baeth.  Beit.  89, 
n.  10).  [For  12  cf.  Ph.  12  in  cpd.  pr.  ns.  and  v.  Bloch  s.  t?.] 

n.  pr.  Praa  iii.  29,  n.  4. 

.  0*3 

n.  pr.  fam.  Pm  is1,  cf.  pr.-Ar.  n?12,  and  Ar.  Ibn 

Dor.  278,  280. 

n.  pr.  P  89  h 

P  33b>  3,  end  of  pr.  n.  peril,  i?1212t  or  bl2JlD  [qq.  v.]. 
The  Palmyrene  deity  “  Bol  ”  is  of  uncertain  origin  and 
identification  (Hal.  J.  As.  1889,  vol.  xiii.  p.  503,  ident. 

w.  Hadad).  Derived  from  (1)  ^>yi2  —  b])2  (cf.  Baeth. 

Beit.  88),  (2)  another  form  of  b'3,  Hoff.  Ausz.  p.  21, 
n.  159,  cf.  and  for  imDTl 

[q.  v.],  or  (3)  the  month  ^12  (cf.  1  Kings  vi.  38),  v.  DHM 
SB  Vienna,  bd.  108,  974  ff.,  cf.  Sar[i/3]coA.os,  CIG  4665, 
l?1212T,  'm',  Tift,  '213,  'bty,  and  cpds.  infra. 

(=  ftovXy)  “senate,”  P  l1,  21,  f\ 

n.  pr.  (“B.  hath  blessed”)  P  353,  Gr.  eq.  /?coX/?apa^o?, 
cf.  Hb.  ^512. 

n.  pr.  (Nrttl2  “B.  washes  away  [sins]”)  P  Eut.  41, 
Cl.-Gan.  p.  126,  no.  8,  ZA4,  cf.  Wr.  Mart. 

p. 

n.  pr.  (“  B.  is  for  us,”  or  “B.  hath  answered”  K3JD2?) 
P  952,  Gr.  eq.  j3(o\avo<s. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


29 


xyV’O 


ssm 

*Q 


mm 


•vm 

^CDi* 

jm* 

kts 

NtDiS'n 


SkI’3 

xm'3 

xrm 


n.  pr.  fail).  P  134,  so  rd.  for  xy[D“)]n  [Vog.]. 

n.  pr.  (=  xpl  '2  “  B.  purifies”  ?)  P  671,  Sach.  2  (^/xpi  not 
in  Syr.,  but  in  B.  Ar.  and  Palest.-Syr.). 

n.  pr.  P  32,  158b,  M34,  Wr.  p.  3,  1.  2,  ZA4,  f2,  Gr.  eq.  /3o)v- 
veovs  (mng.  dub.  XX3  '2  “  B.  is  dear,”  v.  ZMG  xxxv.  735, 
or  =  X31TD  “thumb,”  Hal.  Mel .  d'epig.  104,  or  peril,  con¬ 
traction  of  x&Q,  v.  ZMG  xxxviii.  586). 

n.  pr.  (XBT^12  “  B.  heals,”  cf.  XET O?)  P  109,  M71  [73], 
Cl. -Gan.  124,  no.  5,  v.  XSTD,  ^N31. 

n.  pr.  P  Schr.-S.  6,  cf.  perh.  /L££os  W  2670  ff.,  and  /3i£o<?, 
a  Seleucian  bishop  (Photius,  cod.  52). 

n.  pr.  Sin.  367  [377],  415,  473,  496  [503  for  nttA  ?], 
618,  674. 

v.  tti. 

Pass.  ptcp.  (Aphel)  ^L32D  Pf10  “be  made  a  care  to...,” 

cf.  Syr.  OlX 

n.  pr.  Sin.  437,  v.  1GJ>B2. 

“stomach,”  w.  sufF.  3  m.  pi.  D!l3t32  145  a1. 

*»  «*  j 

n.  pr.  (^UaJ  “courageous,”  cf.  in  Q),  Sin.  7,  66, 

✓  / 

262b,  288,  379,  430,  565. 

n.  pr.  P  43  (Gr.  eq.  fSacSa ),  702  w.  >32  ;  perh.  rd.  XT2T. 

“  senator  ”  (=  /3ovXevT7]<s),  P  202  ('>2  but  cf.  X^12  and 
Talm.  01312^12  al.;  v.  Dal.  148). 

prep,  “between,”  1414,  w.  sufF.  pn'3'2  P  Eut.  413;  cpd. 
prep.  JOD2D  >3>2^>  X23n  '3>2  Pf7,  cf.  No.  §  251,  Dal.  182, 
and  for  constr.  cf.  Luke  x.  30  A  An 
(Schwally  s.  v.). 

n.  pr.  (“fount  of  God”)  761  (alt.  ^XT2  “ in  the  hand...,” 
Cl. -Gan.). 

“fortress,  castle,”  1643  (cf.  Hb.  iTl'S,  B.  Ar.  Nfi“y2  Ezr. 

vi.  2,  Ass.  blrtu). 

“house,”  652,  1821,  235  a2,  Zb20;  cstr.  IV2  [202],  54,  1965, 
Zp2;  w.  sufF.  1  S.  MV2  139  b1,  Zp5,  3  m.  S.  nn>2  Zp19, 
pi.  XTI2,  cstr.  TD  Nab.  Pet.  =  temple,  '2  113a>  12, 
Xt^p  '2  N  129.  In  cpd.  expressions,  cf.  XJVDpD  112 
“  place  of  sepulchre,”  P  641 ;  XD?y  112  “  everlasting 
home”  (so  in  Syr.,  cf.  TV  2  Eccles.  xii.  5,  and  D^y  112 


30 


NTl'3-- 

n33* 

PD3 

K'33 

1133 

^3 

«» 

5^3 


}rW?3 

"innSi 

rorta 

•trfa 

<•» 

ita 

nbz 

njta 

apj^a 

1^3 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 

in  Ph.  CIS  i.  124),  P  321,  342,  36bl,  M37;  nx  n'2  “a 
father’s  house,”  w.  suff.  1  S.  '2  Zb 7 ;  3  m.  S.  rQK  '2 
Zp7  ;  3  m.  pi.  pUK  '2  P  123a  (Ox.  I)7;  r\2  (=  T)'2  cf. 
MI23)  apparently  “family”  n^n  M  P  674. 

(fragment  of  gentilic  1)  3133  KMVO...  I TO?  Sin.  182. 

v.  “to  bewail,”  Zp17  iY02,  nJYOl,  3  S.  (m.  and  f.)  w.  suff. 
of  3  m.  S. 

Nerab  25  “in  reality  ”  ?  (cf.  Hal.), 
n.  pr.  dub.  Sin.  150,  alt.  &ODL 

n.  pr.  (JS  “first-born”)  257  ;  Sin.  197  [226],  379,  451 
(cf.  Hb.  !n?2  (?)  and  in  Syr.  v.  J.  As.  1891,  t.  xviii. 

p.  126). 

(1)  n.  dei  “Bel”  (Babylonian  deity)  P  132,  133,  134, 
cf.  M49;  w.  suff  1  pi.  f?2  m 69,  v.  Baeth.  Beit.  86  ff. 

(2)  abbrev.  of  (v.  infr.)  in  P  68,  69  (so  Eut.  for 
[Yog.]). 

interj.  “oh  !  vae  !  ”  235,  246,  266,  285,  294,  307;  also  ^3 
241,  243,  272,  293,  303,  347  ;  and  vh  235  a1,  235  b,  275, 
298,  cf.  also  ?2  above.  Cf.  “truly,”  and  see  J.  As. 
1890,  t.  xv.  480  f . ;  Dal.  192,  n.  2,  and  342,  who  cfs. 

✓  DV 

n.  pr.  92  (—  Bel-iddina,  “B.  gives  a  son,”  cf.  Hb.  pN^2 
or  with  omission  of  divine  name,  ...-abal-iddina, 
“...  gives  a  son  ”). 
n.  pr.  (“  B.  blesses”)  P  1173. 

n.  pr.  127  (“B.  give!”). 

prep,  “except,  alone,”  N  127,  Tirfcl  ib.  176. 

v.  ith2. 

n.  pr.  dub.  Pvoj.  A24  (alt.  “I—). 

“bath-man,”  Pm  is7?,  cf.  /3a\ avevs  MH  j!??,  |iXn. 
prep,  “without,”  N39;  }n  ny^n  “  except  when...”  ib.  126, 

I'7'  0  .  t\ 

j 

n.  pr.  (“B.  has  recompensed,”  or  “granted  posterity,” 
cf.  npyny)  P  203,  36a>  3,  Cr.  /l^Aa/ca/lo?,  cf.  aqballaha, 
Hoff.  Ausz.  48,  n.  418. 
n.  pr.  Pmi.32. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


31 


dW*?3 

phi 

'nSn 

jrrrta 

n3a 


S3H33 

K'133 

'33 

n'33 

Tjm 

ru3 


n33 

-no3 

KpSD3 

XDD3 


n.  pr.  PWr.  p.  3,  1.  3. 

n.  pr.  (“  B.  is  my  wall,”  cf.  Hb.  TiG^x)  P  Eut.  5,  cf. 
Mi3  (y.  ZMG  xxxviii.  587),  cf.  /3rj\o-ovpov  W  2612. 

n.  pr.  (“  B.  recompenses  ”),  on  a  seal  of  the  6th  cent,  b.c., 
v.  Rev.  Sem.  July  1893,  no.  5. 

n.  pr.  59,  Ass.  eq.  bel-su-nu,  cf.  Hb. 

n.  pr.  f.  “Beltis”  P  155,  cf.  Syr.  •  Cur.  Spic.  90,  etc. 

n.  pr.  f.  (“  B.  is  gracious  ”)  P  521,  cf;  jrVn^lD  and  on 
form  v.  Gray  HPN  217. 

v.  “to  build,”  1643,  1821  ah,  and  1ST  l2  (?) ;  KJ3  N  302, 
P  165,  21,  36b> ',  37,  PSach.  8;  3  f.  S.  m3  1693,  239  ; 
1  S.  )Y03  Zb20,  P  711  (so  rd.  for  n3}[l]) ;  pi.  3  m.  133 
P  30®> 3,  w.  suff.  ni33  P  672.  Impf.  pi.  J133'  145  a3. 
In  N*n»“inD  03N  pr  “ins  1585,  =  or  peril, 

internal  passive. 

n.  pr.  1585  “son  of  Hobal”  ( v .  ib^n),  or  “Bel  hath 
built,”  cf.  Syr.  Ass.  BO  ii.  222. 

“  builder,”  288. 
n.  pr.  285,  P  34. 

n.  pr.  dim.  N  132,  alt.  nN'tJ  (q.  v.). 
n.  pr.  272  dub.,  Ass.  eq.  bin  na’id. 

(1)  n.  pr.  1231  [1483]  (mng.  dub.  nrp  “  son  of  Neit,”  or 
pa-neit,  “one  belonging  to  N.  [the  goddess]”),  cf.  peril. 
/3ava0os  J.  As.  1881,  t.  19,  p.  487  ? 

(2)  in  Zp14,  NplJD  D33,  i.q.  Ass.  binutu  “produce,” 
or  pi.  cstr.  of  m3  “daughters,”  i.e.  “tribes  of  the  East.” 

frag.  19®. 

P  ll3  “basilica,  colonnade”  (so  read  for  N‘E>t?D3,  v.  ND*?D). 

N  41  “  basis  ”  (=  /3acn<;  w.  Aram,  ending  n),  probably 
some  technical  and  architectural  term. 

(1)  v.  “to  seek,”  KXDJV  Pf220,  v.  nW3n. 

(2)  v.  “to  buy,”  Pmi32  =  Ar.  (cf.  ib.  "QtP  also  Ar.). 
n.  pr.  P  921  (for  yb])2  “  Baal  will  smite  ” '?). 

(1)  n.  pr.  “  Baal,”  314  d1  (?),  for  cpds.  of  '3  v.  infr. 

(2)  “lord,  husband,”  w.  suff.  ^y3  P  621,  3  f .  S.  nSjD  162, 
P  844,  985. 


32 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


rbyz* 

nxSjn 


junSjn 

inbjn 

jivnSjn 

UJD 

pe'jn 

MTin 

Xp3* 

rp^ 

“Q 


(3)  “possessor,”  w.  fVQ  Zp22,  “the  patron  of  the  royal 
family,”  or  perhaps  “of  the  sanctuary”  (WRS  Sem.  95, 
n.  6),  w.  P]DD  ib.  Pn,  w.  ib.  P10,  cstr.  pi.  ^yn 

an?  'll  t\02  Zb10>u,  v.  'thy n. 

“lordship  ”  (?)  w.  suff.  in  qnSyn  P  156,  cf.  PM52  bn 

ND'n  \n  ? 

n.  pr.  (“Baal  is  lord”)  1922,  cf.  Ph.  ^yuiN. 

Zn1  “lord,  possessor  of  water,”  or  =  '2  “lord  of 

heaven”  (Hal.),  v.  also  D by. 

n.  pr.  (“B.  helps”)  46. 

n.  pr.  (“Lord  of  the  heavens”)  P  16°,  731  ( v .  ZMG  xv. 
616,  called  Nft^y  N‘1D),  P  Eut.  1;  |Wyn  163°;  jblby^ 
1763.  Cf.  ^ceAo-a/x^r  in  Philo  of  By  bios, 

(e.g.  Hoff.  Jul  249,  8),  and  Ass.  BO  ii.  399, 

v.  Baeth.  Beit.  23  ff. 

n.  pr.  PWr.  p.  3  (a  cpd.  of  ?). 
n.  pr.  Praa  ii.  95,  no.  5. 
n.  pr.  Pvoj.  a  6a  (cf.  ?). 

n.  pr.  N  231,  cf.  Hb.  NJJ?3,  np  (?). 
v.  pDt^yn. 

n.  pr.  loc.  “  Bosra,”  N  213,  P  225,  and  “from  B.” 

Sin.  319  (instead  of  xp¥"Q). 

v.  “  to  examine,”  Impf.  P  58. 

n.  pr.  71,  acc.  to  the  Ass.,  an  “ar-ma-ai,”  i.e.  “Aramaean.” 

(1)  “son.”  Very  frequently  in  cstr.  sing.,  e.g.  N  11}  2, 
21,  etc.,  but  often  omitted  in  Palm,  (and  in  Sin.  cf.  no.  7) 
inscr.  through  Gr.  influence.  Sing.  w.  suff.  1  S.  *03 
Zh15;  3  S.  mn  Cil.2,  3233,  Sin.  144,  P  23,  194;  rm 
Pm4c,  m  P  892;  3  pi.  D.T13  1914  (cf.  Dal.  162).  PI. 
absol.  (Zp5  ?),  cstr.  vq  Zh’°,  1573,  161,  23,  N  252,  P  43, 
Sin.  161,  175;  IT02  P  922,  *02  (cf.  in  Pal. -Syr.)  v.  infr., 
suff.  1  S.  ')2  145  b1;  1  pi.  pn  P711;  3  m.  S.  Mm 
145  c3,  Sin.  160,  251*,  N  63,  P  65,  14,  30*>  3> 4,  M164; 
nui  P  804,  P  Sach.  1  ;  ,T02  3  m.  S.,  Sin.  383,  485 
(hardly  0^5,  perh.  fern,  for  masc.);  THl  P  30b> 3’ 4  (cf. 
ZMG  xxiv.  98) ;  3  f.  S.  nm  (i.e.  PPJJS)  N  143,  181;  3  pi. 
Dnm  1882,  235  a1,  N  122 ;  finm  P  341,  906,  123-  (Ox.  I)3; 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


33 


|n\n  P  672,  756;  finiJ2  (fem.)  Pmi77.  In  cpd.  expressions 
(a)  'niJ2KJ2  “his  sons’  sons,”  P  21  [632],  641,  Sach.  1; 
'nian'Ji  P  312,  36a> 4 ;  suff.  l  pi.  p2D2  P  71  h  (b)  nrvan^n 
“his  household,”  P  922-3  ;  '2  *02  P  865  ;  '2  602  P  1003. 
(c)  45  r\M  22,  “45  years  old,”  in  Pzmg  xii.  214.  (d)  for 
cpds.  of  *02  denoting  Pal.  families  v.  Eut.  in  SB  of 
Berlin,  1887,  p.  411;  and  for  other  cpds.  v.  '“in,  60^0. 
For  cpd.  pr.  ns.  cf.  Gray  HPN  67  f. 

*0  (2)  prep.  22  ID  “apart  from  ”  N  225  (usually  2'J1  q.  v.)  ; 

Pf312’  20  w.  KDinn  (v.  Dal.  184). 

X’O  adv.  348  “  outside  ”  ? 
i*ro  n.  pr.  Sin.  84  (for  16022 ?). 

0*0*0  n.  pr.  (=  (3dp/3apos )  Pf322. 
on*o  n.  pr.  N  42,  cf.  and  v.  A^OJ  iv.  338  (rd.  perh. 

'2266  ?). 

oro  n.  pr.  (“  Barzeki,”  or  “son  of  Zeki  ”)  Pm38. 
nn*o  *  290  pr.  n.,  or  rd.  nn  22  (v.  nn). 

n.  pr.  (“son  of  grace”)  Pmio2;  v.  s.  K2J. 

wo  n.  pr.  Sin.  21,  41,  84,  108  +  25  t.,  Gr.  eq.  /?opaios.  Acc. 

to  Tuch  dim.  of  t j.j  =  child  born  on  the  1st  clay  of  the 
month,  cf.  Ph.  BHn"|2,  and  Gr.  (3ap-cral3/3a<;  (v.  ']22K>), 

NoVjUiyvtos. 

VIH  n.  Pr*  Sin.  123,  394  (=  16022  ?). 

'0'*O  n.  pr.  P  22;  Gr.  eq.  ydapeiyeir. 

T»*  (1)  v.  “to  bless,”  Impt.  “(22  Pmso;  Impf.  “|22'  P  132, 

1131(3')  145  d7;  ptcp.  Peil  “p22  346,  etc.,  very  freq.  also 
in  formula  ')  "p  -oS  P  74 1  al.  Written  defectively 

“|22  126,  127,  128,  136,  P  116.  In  1221  s.  where  pi.  is 
expected  ;  'b  “p22  followed  by  name  of  a  deity  “  blessed 
of  _  be  — ,”  128,  135,  136,  N222  131  ;  fem.  n2'22  1411, 
Sin.  394,  N2'22  135,  emph.  xn2'22  P  951.  Reflex,  ptcp. 
“P22HD  Sin.  498. 

(2)  n.  pr.  344  (=N  37);  Eut.  rds.  “pS. 
fr$0*O  (1)  n.  pr.  331,  N  331  (but  CIS  1222). 

.*0*0  (2)  in  66222  *?2  N  52  “every  blessing,”  a  benediction 

(CIS  however  6622'1?2  q.  v.). 

*|0*O  n.  pr.  345. 

*0*0  n.  pr.  79? 


c. 


3 


34 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


f&tl* 

tawo 

aycrn 

Knjra 

inpn 

X*TQ 

Kpni 

nra 


mtis 

D&sns 

ewci 

mn 


N'mn 

k&*bo 

ro 

ja-nn 

*smra 

^ira 

NTmra 

TQ 

tt^ara 

ura 


in  P  Eut.  414  nSl  11V  111  pniDll  Dilll  “a  close  connec- 

/  0 

tion,  union,”  cf.  Ar.  jtjj  iv.  andvol^jl  “alliance.” 
n.  pr.  (“  son  of  Nebo  ”)  P  732. 
n.  pr.  ('j  a  divine  name  T)  1853. 

v.  KJ&11. 

n.  pr.  PS.-Sh.  “  Barates,”  v.  'ny. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  65. 

n.  pr.  P  756;  =  ND111  (q.  v.)  or  “son  of  Fa  (Pa).” 

v.  kivi. 

n.  pr.  (“son  of  a  [the]  rock”)  Zp1  al. 

n.  pr.  P  762,  cf.  Sab.  Dpll,  and  in  Syr.  Cur.  ASD, 

p.  1.  4,  cf.  fiopaKos  Miller  117,  and  v.  Grun.  29. 

n.  pr.  Zp1  al.  ;  imi  ib.  19.  For  a  possible  connection 

w.  Stflll  cf.  WRS  Sem.  45. 

n.  pr.  Pm 60  written  p^,  v.  Mord.  Beit.  p.  57,  and  cf. 
ZMG  xxvi.  502. 

n.  pr.  fam.  (“son  of  Shemesh  ”)  P  Eut.  26. 

“daughter.”  S.  cstr.  113,  115,  1221,  1411,  155b7,  2111, 
N  31,  P  33a>  3;  also  ni  (v.  ZMG  xxiv.  101)  P  291, 
Sach.  4,  S.  Sh.,  Cl.-Gan.  132,  no.  14;  w.  suff.  3  S. 
nmn  2262,  Sin.  393,  600,  Pm e,  5,  is4;  N  32,  142  ;  PI. 
cstr.  nil  Zp14  (but  v.  s.  nil),  N  83,  104  ;  w.  suff.  3  S. 
nnai  2112,  N  63,  82,  142;  3  pi.  Dnnil  N  102;  V.  also  s. 
'in,  Dil^,  jyitP,  and  for  cpd.  pr.  ns.  v.  infr. 
i.  q.  firjpvTios,  “of  Beyrut.”  P  Cl.-Gan.  303,  v.  jl^ip. 
n.  pr.  (?)  P  Sach.  6. 
adj.  “sweet,”  Pfi12>  16>46. 

v.  n'i,  nn. 

n.  pr.  299  (=  N  61)  ? 

n.  pr.  f.  P  Eut.  22,  cf.  xilYl. 

n.  pr.  f.  P  291,  the  Semitic  name  of  Septimia  Zenobia. 
n.  pr.  f.  P  842. 

n.  pr.  f.  (“  my  daughter  ”)  P  Eut.  44,  Cl.-Gan.  122,  no.  4, 
v.  YOJ  vi.  308. 

n.  pr.  f.  v.  Rev.  Sem.  July  1893,  Palm,  inscr.  no.  i. 
n.  pr.  306  b3,  cf.  Ar.  . 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


35 


-lura 

ns>« 

nra 


j 


Nnir^ 

nru 

nnj 


mru* 

i: 


*n:i 

Wn 


n.  pr.  P  Eut.  25. 
n.  pr.  P  Eut.  22. 

“afterwards,”  Pf245  m2  fcOpBID^  ND2E>,  Gr.  eq.  e£ay[ov- 
tco]i/  7rpd(T(reiv  varr^epov]. 


y 

for  p  in  atn  and  in  the  pr.  ns.  *?2“lKaaO,  |fc&in23,  “iD^Drtan, 

cf.  Wr.  SG  50,  63. 

perh.  a  divine  name,  v.  s.  tO^N. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  315,  351. 

v.  “to  tax,  excise.”  Impf.  *03'  Pfi37;  ptcp.  act.  N2J 
(N23)  Pf6>  n,  F38;  ptcp.  Peil  '2a  Pf  title;  pi.  pa  (]3)) 
Pf37’  24.  Ethp.  ptcp.  pi.  fem.  piano  (IJ5IJ1P)  “  charged  ” 
Pf5. 

n.  pr.  P  62,  cf.  ya/3/?as  W  2591. 

n.  pr.  P  824,  perh.  ethnic.  M.  rds.  DDIY1  2"). 

n.  pr.  Sin.  301,  cf.  Ar.  ^a^.;  alt.  l^Ha,  iS'ta. 

“border,  territory,”  Zp15  ;  w.  suff.  n*?2a  ih. 

(1)  “man,  every  one,”  1 1 3a» 12  (cf.  p2a  MI16). 

(2)  n.  pr.  P  812.  M.  rds.  2323. 

n.  pr.  752.  Acc.  to  Sach.  (ZA  vi.  432)  gabbarud  =  Ass. 
garparuda  or  galparuda;  or  Yp"“i3  “sojourner  of  B.”  (a 
divine  name),  v.  J.  As.  1892,  t.  xix.  p.  565. 

“  might,”  w.  suff.  3  S.  nm23  Zh32,  cf.  B.  Ar.  Nfi“Vl2$ 
Dan.  ii.  20. 

n.  pr.  dei,  Pmss,  “Gad,”  the  god  of  luck,  =rvxq  (fem.), 
freq.  found  in  Gr.  inscr.  of  Hauran,  v.  YOJ  vi.  310; 
ZMG  xlii.  474  ;  Baeth.  Beit.  60,  77  ff. ;  Jahrb.  f.  Deut. 
Theol.  1875,  356  ff.  For  pr.  ns.  compounded  with  Gad 
v.  infr .,  and  cf.  Syr.  pr.-Ar.  13^K1,  yaSSos 

W  2267.  ^ 

and  ma  Pmio2-4;  nm  N'rri  nvn  by  warro  ana  my... 
T>2  H  mai,  acc.  to  M.  =  a  cutting  off,  deprecation, 
n.  pr.  76,  cf.  perh.  Num.  xiii.  10,  and  in  Safa 

inscr.  J.  As.  1881,  t.  xix.  p.  46.  Cl. -Gan.  rds.  cf. 

Hb.  tame. 


3—2 


36 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


113 

xm 

XTH 

ru 


DH3 

iSu 

i^n 

xnjH3 

urm 

13 


xni3 

K£13 

JS13 

*013 

n*W3 

iSjnn 

13 

S3S3 

i&nSj 

K^3 

'thi 

*|S3* 

D3 


n.  pr.  N  25' ;  cf.  «._*r_^l  Macc.  ii.  2. 

n.  pr.  (“  Gad  is  good,”  or  =  aya Or)  Tv\rj)  2361. 

n.  pr.  (“kid”)  P  326,  Gr.  equiv.  yaSias,  Praa  i.  164,  n.  1. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  524a,  cf.  Ar.  juju*.  Ibn  Dor.  294,  8. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  93,  95,  96,  98,  102  +  13  t. ;  cf.  Ar. 

n.  pr.  P  1112,  acc.  to  Baeth.  Beit.  90  “luck  of  al-Lat,” 
cf.  Gadlat  in  Isaac  of  Antioch,  i.  214  (not  from  ^13,  cf. 
We.  Held.2  32,  n.  1). 

n.  pr.  1922. 

n.  pr.  f.  161,  l2,  cf.  ZMG  xxxviii.  538,  and  Gr.  ^.cyedis 

W  2386;  alt.  1^13. 

n.  pr.  (“luck  of  Nebo”)  139  b2. 

n.  pr.  (“luck  of  Athe  ”)  P  143,  cf.  Gadates,  yaSaras, 
and  perh.  Ph.  nyi; I?  v.  ZMG  xl.  157,  xlii.  478. 

n.  pr.  (“luck  of  im”)  P  843. 

“middle,”  132  “in  the  midst  of,”  1586,  2112,  cf.  B.  Ar. 
K132  Dn.  iii.  25,  etc.,  with  (cf.  Dal.  180)  in  in  \D  13 
Pf37  “  within  (Gr.  eq.  erros)  a  denar  ” ;  cf.  p  1^  ib.  47  ; 
603  with  JE>  N  Pet. 

“ditch,”  211,  l4;  2155,  2261,  pi.  pni3  N  Pet.,  jom3  N  155; 
v.  KI1D3. 

“body”?  147  d  Nam;  cf.  perh.  KQ3,  v.  infr. 

“our  body,”  149  b-c9;  or  perh.  n.  pr.  (?). 

n.  pr.  P  Miill.  2,  P  Schr.-S.  9 ;  cf.  yovpas  W  2645,  2673. 

n.  pr.  f.  N  151,  and  in  CIS  2102  for  n'33,  cf.  perh. 

s*i  * 

n.  pr.  m.  Ibn  Dor.  15214. 

%  Sin.  444. 

“sojourner,”  Pvoj.  b  1. 

“wheel  (of  a  chariot),”  or  “camp”  (Wi.),  Zp13,  b8.  Acc. 
to  Hal.  IH  44  verb,  v.  also  Hoff,  ad  loc. 

j  *  j  0  j 

n.  pr.  N  73,  cf.  Ar.  a  fem.  family  name. 

“  a  stele,”  Pf9  ;  cf.  ^>3  pN  Ezr.  v.  8,  vi.  4. 
n.  pr.  N  572  (=  the  vocative  of  yeAao-ios  ?). 

v.  “to  sculpture”  (?),  Impf.  138  b9. 
part,  “also,”  Zp16,  h8;  cf.  D3N*. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


37 


b'M 

Dy»j 

NbDJ 

xbtii 

bbi 

“IDJ* 

“IDJ 


XMl 

m[i] 

dm 

'nyj 

nny:i 

NSJ 

Sku 

dju 

KD'U 

ianj 

DU* 

KDU 


in  pi.  priDJ  “  graves,”  Pza7,  i.q.  Ass. .  kimahhu  (with 

interchange  of  0  and  i)  =  xma,  cf.  and  }ia")N‘,  and 

v.  Barth,  Hebr.  July  1897,  273  f. 

* 

n.  pr.  dub.  Sin.  4;  cf.  Ar.  J^a.. 

✓ 

n.  pr.  (—  Lat.  Geminus),  298. 

(1)  “camel,”  Pfi6  (tfbd  jiyts),  F2U;  bfta  Pfi29,  F321 ; 
pi.  pb»a  Pf,  emph.  K'btta  1571,  Pf319. 

(2)  n.  pr.  Sin.  343;  P  1245  (so  rd.  for  bum'),  cf. 

ya /jlyjXov  W  2169. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  13,  274;  cf.  Ar.  J^a.. 

(1)  v.  “to  complete,  achieve,”  Impf.  "id'  Zh28,  ptcp. 
N  48  "1DJD  'db  (“l^apj  or  "I pap)  “for  a  set  price.” 

(2)  “idb  “wholly,”  Pm 90,  v.  X1D. 

(1)  v.  “to  protect,”  w.  by.  Aph.  perf.  pN  P  143; 
Impt.  pK  P  132,  133,  134;  Pm49. 

(2)  in  Kd,  N3DD  Td  N  Pet.2  “gardens”  ? 

n.  pr.  P  137 ;  cf.  perh.  nia|  1  K.  xi.  20,  and  see  Grun. 
13,  n.  1. 


dub.  “treasure,”  149  a3. 

“a  kind”  (=  yeVos)  Pf,  pi.  K'Daa  Pf218  (?) ;  cf.  Syr. 
]m  i  ^  Pal. -Syr.  also  Schwally,  104. 

n.  pr.  ?  Sin.  579. 

n.  pr.  322 ;  cf.  Ar.  Sjuta.  Ibn  Dor.  181,  279,  and  v. 
YOJ  vi.  310,  n.  3. 

in  £02  146  A25,  frODa  NDa2  147  ai1  “singly,  individually” 
(dub.),  pi.  fcOBa  Pf218,  “per  piece”  ?  (alt.  N'Daa  from  Daa). 
n.  pr.  76b  ?  v.  bfcna. 

n.  pr.  Zp15,  the  name  of  a  district  N.  E.  of  Antioch  ; 
later  |LD0..^5q..^. 

n.  pr.  P  141,  cf.  Hb.  Sab.  D2ia  (n.  pr.  loc.). 
n.  pr.  (dim.  of  Ida),  Sin.  49  (perh.  rd.  1N'“12). 

“bone,”  pi.  w.  suff.  “pda  145b6. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  417.  D“ia  meaning  “bone,”  or  “member,” 
forms  part  of  several  cpd.  proper  names,  cf.  also  Gerevnel , 
Mommsen,  Inscr.  Regn.  Neap.  no.  2475.  [May  not  D“ia 
be  connected  with  Eth.  geram  “  fear,”  cf.  modern 
Abyssin.  names  compounded  with  germa  (y.  Hal.  Mel. 
Epig.  141  f. ).] 


38 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


n.  Pr-  Sin.  42,  47,  97,  132  +  22  t.,  cf.  yapnaXpaXos 
Leps.  134. 

'nStf/SDl  n-  Pr-  Sin.  79,  88,  200,  450,  515,  524a,  'rbim  ib.  9b  (?), 
559. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  62. 

“secretary”  (=  ypayp.arev<i)  P  162,  F2. 

“  secretaryship,”  Pf2. 

t6&ti  ®.  '+kd-u. 

DlpIDTI  n,  pr.  (=  Germanicus)  Pf34. 

i&nj  n.  pr.  Sin.  216,  cf.  Ar.  Hb.  D65H3,  v.  IsytfbK. 

wibu  n.  pr.  2196;  peril,  from  “to  be  thick”  ? 

n.  pr.  (“man  of  Geshur”  ?)  138a3. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  58,  167,  345;  cf.  Neh.  vi.  6  -1^5  for  which 

read  cf.  Ar. 

Dl  “body”  (Ar.  £L),  N  36. 


*n 


rb'rn 

J»*T 

-m 

■an 

fix'll 

Nan 

•  •TT 
NTT 


*T 

an  abbrev.  for  ptn  Pfi2,  v.  "in. 

203  1 

dem.  pron.  f.  “this,”  N  l1;  1581,  21 1 7,  323;  Sin.  463  ; 

m,  P  311,  64,  Pm  is2,  Pza3,  v.  nn. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  9a,  50,  91  +13  t.,  i.  q.  Ar.  “wolf,”  cf. 
Hb.  and  v.  WRS  Kin.  197  f.,  cf.  Aovtos  Eut.  Sin. 
615,  12K"DK,  and  v.  below. 

n.  pr.  (“little  wolf”)  Sin.  272,  cf.  Ar.  ^jy*- 
n.  pr.  Sin.  529. 

n.  pr.  Pm67;  cf.  gj*  “tanner”? 

(1)  v.  m»y  m  P  156;  v.  s. 

(2)  n.  pr.  Pm  64,  alt.  "ipT. 
n.  pr.  Praa  ii.  144. 

“  decree  ”  (—  Soyy a)  Pf1. 
fragment  of  a  n.  pr.  P  167. 

n.  pr.  P  932,  cf.  Land,  Anec.  Syr.  384,  and  v.  YOJ  vi. 
312,  Gray,  HPN  60  f.,  cf.  also  Palm.  iOH  RAA  ii.  94, 

•X  o 

no.  3.  *n  freq.  found  in  Sem.  names,  cf.  Syr.  V2>Q..*__»)5 , 

x 

0>>  Hoff.  Ausz.  33  n.  269,  v.  also  Tan,  and  cf.  infr. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


39 


rbjni  n.  pr.  (“Yl  is  high”)  107. 

HI  v.  s.  &n. 

“gold,”  P  63,  234,  v.  2HT. 

fcOTH  “fat,”  or  “unguent,”  Pfi28,  Syr.  jjCTlOj. 

KH  ?  in  W'V  H  xnb  P  951,  cf.  “demon,”  or  Ar.  33 

“possessor,”  v.  ZMG  xxviii.  510,  Hal.  Mel.  Epig.  100. 
n.  pr.  f.  (—  Domnina)  P  83  a2  (Vog.  rds.  Npon). 
ufsjm  n.  pr.  P  8 1 3,  a  comp,  of  11  (3^),  cf.  Nlt^ll.  M.  rds.  l0E>n. 
SovKrjvdpios,  ducenarius,  P  242,  252;  fcOJpl  ib.  262,  272. 
n.  pr.  dei,  Dusara,  190,  320  f,  N  25  +  13  t. ;  N“l£H 
Sin.  437,  cf.  'Tiny,  '1DT1  :  '1,  Ar.  (be.  “he,  or 

owner  of  "W  ”),  worshipped  by  Yemenite  tribe  Daus 
(cf.  ZMG  vii.  477,  Krehl,  Rel.  d.  Ar.  49  f.),  probably  a 
sun-god.  In  Gr.  inscr.  Sovo-ap^?,  and  in  W  2312  w. 
epithet  avi/ayro?,  wh.  in  W  2392  is  applied  to  17X10?. 
(Found  in  Lat.,  v.  ZMG  xxix.  105.)  Sowapios  W  1916 
=  “a  follower  of  '1.”  Jens.  (Cos.  455)  cfs.  Sum.  corn- 
goddess  Dusara.  See  further  ZMG  xiv.  465  and  xli. 
711 ;  Baeth.  Beit.  92  ff.,  We.  Held.  45  f.,  WRS  Kin. 
292  ff.,  Kerber  28. 

pan  dub.  P  155,  rd.  peril,  p^TT  and  cf.  Tit?  M.  rds.  n  “evil.” 

7  m*  v.  “  to  fear,”  ptcp.  pi.  ^ni  P  l3,  24,  al.,  cf.  B.  Ar. 

nn\s  Dlp-jB  pSrn  Dn.  vi.  27. 

Dm  96,  a  biling.  in  Aram,  and  Himy.  The  latter  is  read  nm 
(“noble  man”?),  v.  Rev.  Arch.  n.  ser.  t.  xvii.  443, 
ZMG  xiv.  290,  Levy,  Siegel ,  19. 

'*7  freq.,  simplest  form  of  the  relative,  or  as  a  sign  of  the 
genitive;  replaced  in  older  Aram,  inscr.  by  q  (cf.  Wr.  SG 

116,  Dr.  Introd.  Old  Test.  6th  ed.  504).  In  the  sense  of 

“because”  cf.  P  93,  “namely  that”PF5.  xiDy  H  Pf243, 
“as  regards  the  wool.”  n  becomes  *1  in  rOJl  for  rein 
“which  I  built,”  P  71,  nJBH  P  185,  P  225,  min 

P  83®’ 3,  1053 ;  and  n3D  bvbl  P  Eut.  3,  v.  bn. 
arm  n.  pr.  Praa  ii.  143,  cf.  'KTH  n.  pr.  f.  ib.  iii.  50 ; 

v.  s.  NT1. 

Sn  (l)  158s,  tbn  p  “at  his  own  expense”  (Ik  tcov  tSiW). 
7H  (2)  nbm  “  because,  whereas,”  PI4,  44,  63,  f4,  F240, 

F325,  al. 


40 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


JH* 

D’2'1 

pi32'i 

pbDpn 

X31 

131* 


131 

1131 

1131 


X23T 


12221 

D1221 

'£3X31 

'221 


'nmai 

D221 

D5D221 

DK'DI 

*7X21 

1321 


v.  “to  judge,”  Impf.  w.  suff.  3  m.  S.  rVOTI  138  a3. 

n.  pr.  Praa  ii.  24,  no.  2,  v.  ib.  25  and  cf.  Gr.  Seins, 
SecvLos  etc. 

n.  pr.  16,  i.  q.  Ass.  dayan-kurban. 

“tribunal”  (=  SiKacrrypiov),  PF219,  alt.  ptDDp  H. 
n.  pr.  (“  pure  ”  ?)  P  904. 

(1)  v.  “to  remember,”  only  in  Peil  ptcp.  “VO"!,  freq.  (esp. 

in  Sin.);  e.g.  dS^I  2D2  “vm  316;  Sin.  320,  383,  pi. 
P"lHH  235  a1  ;  w.  ^2  243,  372;  in  P  681  for  T>m  (“  in 
memory...”)  rd.  “VOl  *?2.  "TO!  stands  exceptionally  at 
the  end  in  Sin.  604®  *rm  ID'n _ 

(2)  “a  male,”  pi.  pim  N  122,  prn  P  711,  v.  "DT. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  671,  672. 

“memorial,”  2361;  P71,  741,  811,  1041,  1163;  {nm 
N  381,  163  a,  1691,  *mm  P  36b> !,  cf.  B.  Ar.  rtt'ro'n, 

Nm?*5},  Pal. -Syr.  DDH,  Syr.  v.  “DT. 

v.  “to  resemble,”  ptcp.  in  'b  am  HD  “and  whatever 
resembles”  etc.,  Pf210,  F315;  ptcp.  pi.  f.  Sin.  457 
IHDp  nrbn  by  pm  hkd  jw. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  114,  203,  603,  606. 
v.  s.  om. 

n.  pr.  (=  Domitus),  287  ;  cf.  Syr.  and  v.  Wr. 

Cat.  Syr.  MSS,  index,  p.  1269. 

“price,”  N  48  "IDJD  “to  a  complete  price”  (y.  "IDJD), 
N  20',  v.  JODI  N1?  Pf241  “without  price”  (?).  In 

Syr.  only  in  pi.,  v.  No.  §  72. 

n.  pr.  (“worthy  of  my  greatness”?)  P  Eut.  33,  cf. 
W  2258. 

“people”  (=%tos),  PI1,  21,  73,  Pf2,  fs32;  Dim  P  158, 
171,  183,  254. 

n.  pr.  (=:  ^.apdcn-mros)  N  554. 

Damascus,  Zp18,  cf.  Heb.  p'^m ,  Syr.  .  onmVnb 

n.  pr.  P  93  (alt.  bfcOH),  cf.  8ai/i/3wAos  (“  El  is  wise,  or  a 
judge”);  258. 

P  71,  for  r021  v.  s.  m2;  or  for  niHJ  “she  vowed  ”  (Hal. 
Mel.  Epig.  106). 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


41 


nr? 


nn 

Spn* 

T* 

Dim 

xm 


pron.  dem.  m.  “this,”  1703,  1821,  al.,  N  21,  al.,  P  31, 
94,  al.,  Sin.  410.  nil  TD  3233;  w.  Nnobv  P  131  ;  w. 
pi.  nil  N'n(by)  ?  P  935  ;  V.  xnby.  Once  Nil  P  Eut.  23. 
In  the  older  Aram,  inscr.  replaced  by  jt,  Hit  q.  v. 

v.  s.  ban. 

“a  dinar,”  SrjvapLos  (Syr.  ]jJ__i}),  liH  Pfi47,  lil  Pf37>  21, 

x 

Nlil  Pfi47.  PI.  piil  P  63,  abbrev.  to  1,  Pfi2.  Acc.  to 
Schr.  liH  denotes  the  weight,  Nlil  the  coin  (v.  SB, 
Berlin,  1884,  p.  427  f.). 

“a  selling”  (or  cf.  Ass.  dannitu  “tablet,  record”),  17 
(18,  19),  22,  23,  24,  27. 

“a  palm,”  pi.  }bpl  113®’ 18>1£>. 
v.  Nlipll. 

n.  pr.  110  (rd.  perh.  Tail,  and  cf.  nbjni,  NYD  ?). 

“way,”  Pm45  “pi  |0  pTl  bll'D...  is  brought  from  the 
way  ”  ? 

dub.  147  A,  23  “a  drachma,”  cf.  MH  |irp_,  Hb.  |i03TI. 
CIS  ...DHJ1 

“  law,”  N  310  (=  Pers.  data). 


n 

p  instead  of  X.  (a)  in  the  Apli.  conj.,  v.  s.  Dip,  Dip  and 
cf.  Dal.  201  ;  ( b )  in  masc.  emph.  nil,  nbpn,  ;  ( c )  in 
fem.  ronn,  m,  nnnbo,  nnba;  (d)  in  “pn,  hdm,  ibn,  j n, 
run,  run,  mpno,  niN,  no,  nao,  mn,  and  non.  =  Gr. 

spiritus  asper ,  cf.  Dli'im,  NilDiM,  etc.  (but  v.  NDlDl). 
For  final  n  in  pr.  ns.  (,1DN,  nin,  a£.)  cf.  Eut.  Nab.  p.  74. 
n  ‘ graphisch'  in  Zp4  no  HIV  “rest  of  land,”  p17  nn'N 
ID^O  “princes  (?)  of  the  kingdom,”  h20  “| bo  by 

“upon  the  seat  of  the  king.”  (So  Hommel  MYG  1897, 


heft  3,  p.  21.) 

an 

(1)  “  he,”  Zpn>  22  \  cf. 

MI6. 

an 

(2)  demonstr.  “this,” 

n'l  an  Zb17,  nt  an 

0 

|3OT. 

xn 

(3)  interj.  “  behold  !” 

PF36. 

42 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


n.  pr.  N  38,  v.  Kin.  297,  We.  Heid.  70  f.,  171 ;  but 

against  connection  w.  Ar.  ^A  and  v.  No.  in 

ZMG  xli.  715. 

run  n.  Pr*  (from  J  “  to  meditate,”  or  cf.  MH  run  “a  brier,” 
Low.  104),  135. 

QJH  ii.  pr.  loc.  113  a10’12;  cf.  Yak.  ii.  886  ult.  in 

Yemen,  and  v.  YOJ  v.  8. 
n.  pr.  m.  2031,  N  191,  f.  2261 ;  cf.^.&dA  and  Hb. 

*7*711  n-  pr-  Hadad,  75,  Zp22,  and  often  in  Zh,  cf.  Hal.  IH 
89  f.,  Baeth.  Beit.  67  f.,  120. 

n*onmn  n.  pr.  72,  Ass.  eq.'  adad-nadin-ali  “  H.  gives  a  brother,” 
cf.  aSa8va8Lvaxys,  and  in  Ass.  nabu-nadin-ali,  sin-ahe-irib. 

17y*7nn  n-  Pr-  1204,  cf.  Hb.  IJiniD.. 

V1H  n.  pr.  1485,  cf.  nin. 

..pl'nil  n-  pr.  frag.  P  1174,  alt.  mnn. 
mnn  n-  pr.  b  (“adorned”)  P  551. 

v.  infr. 

(Dismn  n.  pr.  Hadrian,  P  163  (Gr.  eq.  aSptavov),  and  v.s.  DU'"l"!N. 

After  him  Palmyra  was  called  N3'"i"in  (Pf  title),  cf. 
ZMG  xlii.  402. 

n.  pr.  “  Hadad  is  a  friend,”  74;  v.  ZA  xi.  228,  and  cf.  "in. 
n.  pr.  (?)  74,  v.  supra. 

(1)  pron.  “  he,”  145  b2,  N  192,  P  83,  al.,  in  H  163,  1643? 
P  36b> l. 

(2)  demonstr.  137  a3,  146  b6,  2114;  N  310,  142,  273; 
Pf327,  fern.  'n  161.  33. 

in  Nin  H  P  152> 3,  162  hardly  a  pron.,  v.  s.  nin. 
n.  pr.  84,  cf.  Hb.  HHin  (?). 

v.  “to  be,”  N  274  ;  Nin  in  P152’3,  162  (unless  Nin  is  a 
verbal  adjective,  cf.  infr .),  Pf5  ;  3  f.  S.  nin  (cf.  n'n  in 
SI)  Zp2,  Pf3,  pi.  un  Pf5’  7,  f246,  fs14.  Impf.  N1,m,  N  144’5, 
193,  226,  27°,  Pf6’10’  n,  f222’47,  f330  ;  Nm  Pfs8,  Pvoj.  b  1 ; 
Nn>  1442  (?);  mnn  Pfs28;  Ninn  PF244,  322  ;  'inn  1414  (?); 
pi.  pin'  145  d3,  pm  P712,  F324,  jm  Pf27,  F319.  Impt.  'in 
1413’4.  Verbal  adj.  Nin  peril,  in  P  152>3,  162,  f.  N'in 
Pf335  (nunnn  N'in  n  Nn^o  n  nddd),  pi.  m.  pn  (i.e.  pn) 
P510.  In  Zp5  '"IN'  p“lNn  nin  n'in  DJN1,  n'in  is  peril.  Pa. 
“  I  caused  to  happen.” 


'pm 

jppm 

in 

in 

Nin 

nin 

nin 


y&nn 

'n 

Tn 


t6:s\n 

nrn 


on 

l&n 


P 

wri 

nnjtMn 

won 

Np'tosn 

1&n* 

pnDfin 

xpsn 

Dipsn 

xnsn 

ansn 

xansn 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY.  43 

n.  pr.  17.  Ass.  eq.  usi,  cf.  Hb. 

v.  s.  m  (2). 

“Hegemon”  (=y]yepuov),  P  154,  F215> 24 ;  MH 

pojin.  v 

part,  “according  to,  as,”  Pf24  xnny  T*n,  ib.  14,  F31' ; 

w.  prep.  3  Pf6  XD10.13  “pn ;  cf.  Dal.  178.  With  H  P  712, 
Pf34>  14 ;  cf.  B.  Ar.  HD  xn  Dn.  ii.  43. 

“temple,”  Pf10,  x^3H  P  165. 

n.  pr.  N  261,  271 ;  cf.  Ar.  A^Jb. 

* 

interj.  “behold!”  137  a1,  b4;  cf.  B.  Ar.  -1^. 

v.  “to  go,”  Impf.  qnn  145  b4,  c6 ;  cf.  Ez.  v.  5,  al.  and  see 
Dal.  263. 

dub.  20  33  “  they  ”  (cf.  MI18). 

pron.  “them,”  145b4,  149a1  (in  B.  Ar.  only  in  Ez.). 
ion  03tn  137  b2,  v.8.  pt. 

conj.  “if,”  N145;  137b1,  138b2,  Pfi5;  also  Nerab  l11. 
jn  IX  “or  if,”  2248  (Eut.  rds.  Unix).  |H— jn  Pf319 
“whether — or”  (cf.  Dal.  192,  n.  1). 

n.  pr.  Sin.  100,  107,  162*  +  5  t.,  N  233,  248;  157,  161.  I2; 
3  . 

cf.  Ar.  «iu  and  Gr.  areos,  aratos  ;  v.,  1X0  n. 
n.  pr.  dub.  P  672,  tribal  name  (1). 
n.  pr.  dim.  of  1X3H  (^i&)  Sin.  105,  154,  164,  260  +  7  t. 
“a  consular”  (=  V7ra tiko's),  P  232. 

v.  pi.  ptcp.  m.  pDSH  Pf27  “walking  about”  (used  in 
reference  to  dealers  in  old  clothes,  Gr.  eq.  /xera^oAot). 

n.  pr.  N  52,  surname  of  OOn ;  cf.  ^aiaros,  Miller  123, 
and  Herodot.  ii.  141  (?). 

=  i7r7rtKo's  “a  knight,”  P  201,  274;  DlpDn  ib.  263. 

v.  supr. 

n.  pr.  130.  Perh.  =  X"l£n,  i.e.  Eg.  hopri-i  “one  devoted 
to  the  sun.” 

?  Sin.  61. 

1735 ;  N  102,  162  ;  =  €7r ap^os  or  v-rrap-^os-  Aram,  con¬ 
fused  both,  cf.  Tal.  D13“)DX,  Syr.  =  €7rapyos ;  and 

Syr.  ].D^OCn  for  tVapyos,  v.  infr. 


44 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


rwisn 

in* 

-jjnin 


TDin 

-njnn 

'prin 

bnmn 

pnn 


Sin.  463  “  eparchy,”  e7rapy€ta,  hence  CIS  derives  ND“iQn 
from  eVapx0?-  Syr.  |_i.D^200n  liowever  reps,  virapxia. 
in  cpds.  infr.  “the  god  Horus”;  acc.  to  HofF.  ZA  xi. 
228  rd.  nn  =  Hadad. 

n.  pr.  74;  iy2,  cf.  Ass.  Ja’ubi’di,  Ilubi’di,  v.  s.  “in  and 
cf.  HofF.  ad  loc. 

v.  “  to  destroy.”  Only  in  Z  (not  found  in  Syr.),  3  m.  S. 
nn  Zp3,  Impf.  nrv,  ib.  H26;  nnnn  (“thou  shalt  kill 
him  ”)  H33,  unnn  P5. 
n.  pr.  P  Schr.  1 2. 

n.  pr.  (“ Horus  helped,”  v.  “in)  77.  Notice  the  n  instead 
of  t  (the  inscription  is  on  a  cylinder  from  Assyria 
belonging  to  the  8th — 7th  cent.). 

v.  >p-nn. 

n.  pr.  (UH.  is  confidence,”  v.  nn)  89. 
n.  pr.  146  b3. 


1 

as  initial  consonant  v.  I1?!,  P|P1  and  m .  1  has  possibly 

arisen  from  ■>  in  It  is  written  plene  in 

fcOIDH,  al.,  cf.  Syr.  with  |jl_»_.CQJ  and  v.  No. 

§44,  Eut.  Nab.  p.  77.  Long  6  and  u  are  nevertheless 
sometimes  defective,  v.  s.  WVlJK,  |£fiy,  fcOJ^p 

and  xman.  It  corresponds  to  Or.  ev  in  NDDIN,  KLDI^'2, 
D1t0?0"0,  DIpl^D .  1  is  used  as  the  affix  of  the  3rd  pi.  perf. 
(for  fern.  cf.  N  31,  81  and  in  B.  Aram.  Dn.  v.  5,  al. 
[Ktib],  and  v.  Kau.  46).  This  pi.  ending  is  often  not 

expressed  in  Pal.,  cf.  P  Eut.  42  :  D'pN  H  _  nn 

...  noy  p*?D  h  am'S?  rb;  and  v.  s.  nm,  Dip;  but 
P  37  ('jyioi  bnnbx  fcOD)  shows  that  sing,  could  be  used  w. 
pi.  subj.  Proper  names  (esp.  Nab.)  in  1  rep.  Ar.  1 ;  for 
fern,  names  cf.  inn,  1D1”),  Wp  and  cf.  No.  ap.  Eut. 

Nab.  p.  73.  1  interchanges  w.  £  in  m3  =  P1E0,  and  perh. 

in 

part,  “and,”  N  22,  etc.  etc. 

n.  pr.  245,  Sin.  5,  7,  13+90  t.  (N  162  fern.,  but  v.  rtao), 
0  * 

i.  q.  Ar.  (“one  who  takes  refuge”);  cf.  pr.-Ar. 

✓ 

and  a  king  of  Edessa ;  in  Hauran  ov aeAos. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


45 


jbtfi 

nbsi 

mil 

im 

vm 

ijm 

m 

am 


xani 

baam 

’nbxani 


1am 

bam 

nbam 

ptai 

ib’ai 

nbi* 


Doubtful  whether  to  be  connected  w.  Ph.  Hb. 

^Xl'  and  ^X'lnft;  v.  Dr.  St.  Bib.  i.  5  n ;  WRS  Kin. 
301  ;  KAT  25,  Nest.  Eigen.  86,  Lag.  Or.  ii.  35,  Uebers. 
96,  Gray  HPN  153  f. 

n.  pr.  1ST  91,  cf. 

n.  pr.  f.  N  31,  142,  162  (>  tf>xi) ;  Sin.  364“,  504,  629,  cf. 

and  ovaeXaOe  (f.)  W  2055  (also  m.  in  Sin.). 

n.  pr.  f.  1832,  cf.  Ar.  j.^.3  (v.  Wiistenfeld  457). 

n.  pr.  Sin.  15,  106,  204  +  5  t.,  Ar.  35 ;  cf.  ovaSSov 
W  1969,  ora.SS77A.os  ib.  2372,  and  v.  We.  Heicl.  11  for  a 
possible  connection  w.  Ar.  god  wadd. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  579,  592. 


*  *  * 

n.  pr.  Sin.  66  (cf.  Ar.  or  ^bj). 
interj.,  after  Praa  ii.  143. 


n.  pr.  Sin.  364,  for  wh.  one  expects  iani.  3H1  («^XTL_», 
meaning  “  gift,”  or  “  give,”  freq.  in  pr.  names ; 
cf.  ^<TL_»;.So  “Mar  (or  the  Lord)  gives,”  Cur.  ASD  143, 
and  v.  infr. 
n.  pr.  P  Eut.  20. 

n.  pr.  (“El  gives”)  1732,  1861,  so  in  Sab.,  where  also 

am’px,  and  nnyani. 

n.  pr.  (“gift  of  God”)  N  3U  [22s],  247 ;  Sin.  622,  'ii^ani 

Sin.  356,  aJUI  ^3  cf.  Wr.  Syr.  Mart.  p.  «._» , 

1.  5  fr.  bottom. 

n.  pr.  (“gift  of  Allat”)  171  \  more  commonly  n’pani  as 
in  P  21,  38,  974,  126,  M73,  38,  cf.  Gr.  ovafiaWa Bov,  and 
ova(3a\a6os  (W  2086),  Lat.  vabalathus.  The  son  of 
Odhainat  and  Zenobia  who  bore  this  name  was  called 
in  Gr.  aOrjvoSaipos,  v.  Vog.  Syr.  31  ff. 

n.  pr.  (“gift”)  N  1 08,  192,  261 ;  cf.  w-Aj,  and  v.  aiY). 

n.  pr.  Praa  i.  74,  no.  2  (“  Bel  gives  ”  f). 

v.  ntaam. 

Pf233>  3,;  (alt.  "iftS),  Sach.  10,  =  veteranus  if). 


n.  pr.  Sin.  301,  315. 

“offspring,”  w.  suff.  3 f .  S.  rnSl  N  282,  3  pi.  2032. 


46 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


n.  pr.  Sin.  255,  cf. 
j'1^  n.  pr.  1763. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  200  ? 
vSp*l  n-  Pr-  1 921. 

v.  “  consecrate,”  1852;  cf.  Ar. 

Tni  n.  pr.  P  201,  241 ;  Gr.  eq.  ouwpwS^g  (v.  ZMG  xxxv.  738); 
cf.  perh.  /3opSog  J.  As.  1881,  t.  xix.  16 ;  v.  infr. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  369,  cf.  ITYi^N  and  above.  (Ar.  ^  “tawny” 

0  *  0*  j 

is  applied  to  horses,  lions,  etc.;  hence  jjjil,  as 

pr.  ns.  prob.  refer  to  colour  of  man’s  hair ;  see  Ibn  Dor. 
1705f.) 

n.  pr.  325,  =  (1). 

n.  pr.  2111’7;  cf.  Ibn  Dor.  300.  3. 

n.  pr.  Cil1,  alt.  BW2I  w.  wh.  Hal.  cfs.  crvyyevrj<;. 

71^*)  n*  pr.  f.  N  81  ?  v.  infr. 

n-  Pr-  2051’4’6;  hardly  to  be  compared  w.  O.T.  . 
j"Yl*  part,  to  express  the  objective  case,  w.  suff.  nni  Zh28, 
but  v.  s.  Dip. 

T 

1  in  Aram,  inscr.  of  the  1st  and  2nd  class  (Ass.  Bab. 
Zenj.  and  Eg.)  often  occurs  where  the  later  Aramaic  has 
“J,  cf.  jt ,  PUT,  n,  mi,  nnt,  *131,  tnx,  m  and  in  pr.  ns. 
“ITJJDK,  "Itybyn,  Him  PI  (cf.  however  Yljnn  [dub.],  and 
TU^DS^),  v.  Wr.  SG  56,  No.  Mand.  43. 

1  as  a  demonstrative  (abbreviated)  in  TDD  Zh3,  TD1  ib. 22. 

KJ  dem.  f.  “this,”  113a’13>15;  1291,  145  b5;  Zh18,  Nerab  l12; 
cf.  |T . 

KST  n.  pr.  PM51. 

n.  pi*.  (“  [be]  hath  endowed,  or  gift”),  P  1123,  Eut.  16; 
cf.  Hb.  *12T,  *1-131 ,  etc.  (Freq.  in  cpd.  names,  cf.  Gray 
HPN  222  ff.) 

n.  Pr*  N  201 ;  P  283,  292,  1123  ;  cf.  N“DT  Mish.  Shebi  38c; 
£a/3Sas  Wetz.  203. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


47 


Sim? 

inn? 

HST 

xS-n? 

ism? 

Knjm? 

ms? 

P» 


*01S? 

ns? 

ns?* 

nns? 

*s? 


kts? 


its? 

hts? 

js?* 


n.  pr.  P  102,  123,  671,  87  a3,  108,  123“  (Ox.  2)3,  sach.s, 
Mi22,  69.  Also  a  family  name,  cf.  W  2595  ol  ey(=  e/<)y€vovs 
£a/3Si/3aAeia>i/. 

n.  pr.  3001,  Sin.  63  (for  n't);  cf.  Ar.  juj,  t,a/38o<; 
W  2131,  2404. 

n.  pr.  N  701 ;  307,  P  Eut.  1 ;  cf.  ,  £e/3eS ato?  and  v. 
Dr.  i.  5. 

n.  pr.  P  56,  151,  631,  Pm2.  Praa  iii.  29,  n.  4  (.nSllT). 
For  r6fcnit  “  gift  of  God.” 
n.  pr.  P  Eut.  1. 

n.  pr.  P  56,  193  ;  inP  631,  1072,  Eut.  16  final  consonant  is 
H .  Gr.  eq.  £a/3Sea#?79,  £a/3$a.a6r)<;. 
n.  pr.  1582. 

followed  by  J&03D  P  155.  pat  3  m.  S.  perf. ;  cf.  "1101,  21“in ; 

“he  bought  many  things.”  Alt.  put  pi.  of  lAjLDl;  cf. 
Levy  in  ZMG  xxiii.  285,  and  v.  NJ2T. 

“buyer,”  Pfi5. 

(1)  v.  “to  kill,  sacrifice,”  Zh15;  cf.  B..  Ar.  |“Q1  Ezr.  vi.  3. 

(2)  “a  sacrifice,”  w.  suff.  3  m.  S.  nniT  Zh22. 
n.  pr.  269,  cf.  Hb.  rot  ? 

n.  pr.  (cf.  perh.  Syr.  “a  coat  of  mail,”  the  Hb. 

n.  pr.  e.g.  Ezr.  x.  28  is  prob.  of  different  origin) 

P  283,  292,  1122,  =  ®bj,  £a/3/3cuo?.  'ntra  the  Pal.  name 
of  Zenobia,  cf.  Vog.  Syr.  p.  153. 

n.  pr.  (ptcp.  form,  cf.  TUT  1  K.  iv.  5  “bestowed”  [by 
God] ;  cf.  Sab.  TIT)  P  42,  311,  864,  123“  (Ox.  I)3,  Pf3, 
Psach.  i,  Schr.  6;  Gr.  eq.  £e/6e i8as. 
n.  pr.  N  291,  cf.  £o£<u8os,  £o(3eL$os  W  2127,  2150,  2520, 

OO/J 

and 

/O  / J 

n.  pr.  Sin.  364b  Sjujj. 

(1)  v.  Peal  “to  buy,”  Impf.  pp  N  26> b,  Pf334. 

Pael  “to  sell”  pt  dub.  in  3234;  Impf.  pP  N  26>  “ ;  cf. 
145®> 4,  pi.  junp  N  143.  iDn'jnrn  2  s.  f.  w.  suff.  137  b2. 
pP^H  Pfi4,  h  belongs  to  H,  or,  as  in  Ar.,  is  prefix  to 
Impf.  Ptcp.  pID  Pfi45.  pp  pass.  (=  |3T?)  Pf26. 

Ithp.  Impf.  ptn'  N  ll4,  ptcp.  wntnD  PF333  (for  pTP  etc.). 

(2)  n.  pr.  30,  Ass.  eq.  zabinu. 


48 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


KMT 


KMT* 

KMT 

MT 

npiT 

nnT 

6k)1T 

TIT 

TIT* 

..HT 

n 


ban 

viSktt 

m 


7 

ninMT 

MT* 

MT* 


(1)  “time,”  or  “a  time,”  pT  pTl  “at  any  time,”  Pf10  ; 
pi.  par  (f.)  Pf6;  pnt  pmn  1863;  N'ETIp  «'33t3  (m.) 
Pf4.  As  generally  in  Syr.  'T  in  the  sense  of  times  (Fr. 
fois)  is  fem.,  v.  pT. 

(2)  pnt  P  15,  pi.  of  Nri32T  “purchases,”  or  “times”  (?), 
v.  s.  pnr. 

(3)  n.  pr.  55,  cf.  Hb.  and  perh.  Syr.  *C0QJLOl,  Wr. 
Syr.  Mart.  p.  ]. 

n.  pr.  67,  Ass.  eq.  zabisi  or  zabili,  alt.  sy^T. 

in  N]"dSd  nplt  P  291-2  “the  just,  the  queen,”  rd.  Nnpni, 
i.e.  Nfip'R  (I  pron.  short  in  closed  syllable,  but  v.  s.  •>), 
cf.  pn^. 

“gold,”  Zp11,  b11  ;  cf.  «nm. 
n.  pr.  1602,  Gr.  [£]a>i\ov. 

“  expenses  for  a  journey,”  P  63 ;  cf.  |>Ob 

“coin,  denarius,  money”;  w.  suff.  ntlt  Nab.  Sach. ;  pi. 
pm  P  175.  On  etym.  v.  ZA  vi.  60. 
n.  pr.  frag.  304. 

occurs  frequently  for  H  in  the  older  Aram,  inscr.  and 
also  on  coins,  e.g.  "pni  &OPI3  “Qy  '1  HTD  “  Mazdai  who 
is  over  the  other  side  of  the  River  and  Cilicia  ”  (a  coin 
of  latter  half  of  4th  cent,  b.c.);  cf.  Hal.  Mel.  Epig.  64  f.; 
Levy,  Jild.  Milnz.  149  ff. 

As  a  genit.  1- — 4,  70,  71,  141,  142,  145  b1,  Oil2.  As  a 
relat.  5,  6,  42,  66,  69—71,  109,  113,  114,  138  a2,  145  b3; 
Zh1,  p2,  Nerab  l14;  v.  H. 

n.  pr.  Pm692  ;  cf.  perh.  1  Macc.  xi.  17. 

n.  pr.  (=  aJUI  “gift  of  God”)  1872,  3021,  N  65,  Sin. 
325“;  v.  infr. 

n.  pr.  (“gift”),  cf.  We.  Heid.  3,  n.  4;  1572,  2362,  244, 

268;  Sin.  7,  11,  22,  63  +  33  t. ;  cf.  juj,  Sab.  -pT  ( v . 
DHM  Ep.  Denk.  44),  and  'pNT’T  (ib.  41). 

possibly  pron.  demon,  in  . .  DT  NI"I¥  151 5  2> 3 ;  cf.  ’RI. 

« 

Yog.  P  156,  rd.  mn^,  q.  v. 

(1)  v.  “  to  remember,”  Impf.  ")DT>  Zh16’  17. 

(2)  “memorial,”  w.  suff.  nst  Zh28,  l"OT  h31.  Zp22  dub. 
v.  “im. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


49 


nSi 

pat 

Pt 

1» 

ppr 

NIST 

pi* 

“IT 

jnr 


“cheapness,”  Zp1" ;  cf.  Targ.  k'DI  blT  and  nVt  Ps.  xii.  9. 
(Acc.  to  Hal.  =  Hb.  T^-lt  “  without.”) 
n.  pr.  280. 

“a  time”  (w.  £>  as  in  B.  Aram.,  Targ.,  and  Ar.,  see  also 
Mat),  1585,  N73;  pi.  pact  1966. 

dein.  pr.  “this,”  113“’ 4  (w.  ND'P ;  one  expects  Hit); 
Zp1’  20 ,  H1’14,  b20.  mt  113a>22,  119,  145  c2,  Zp22,  b20; 
Cil6,  and  in  Nerab  inscr.  (I3’7,  22).  v.  ri3*l. 
v.  “to  cry  out,”  145  c1. 

adj.  “little,”  P  Eut.  414,  tnyn  Nan  rfa  nv  NTyr 
Nab.  Pet.1  “iyf  146  A25  dub. 
n.  pr.  P  814  (so  M.) ;  v.  NHSTI. 

“bottle,”  pi.  ppt  Pfi17>  25’28,  F249. 

adj.  “strange,  foreign,”  Zh30’34. 

“seed,  posterity,”  1113,  Zh20  ;  w.  suff.  “]JTIT  Nerab  lu, 
ny*lT  113a’12. 


n 


Smxn 

xnn 

inn 

Sinn 

xSnn 

*nnn 

nnn 

*nn 


n 


in  Gr.  transliterations  represented  by  y  in  'Tin,  1DT1, 
r6n,  fcyftbn,  rncn,  where  the  (presumed)  analogous  Ar. 


forms  have  Of  the  cases  where  the  Gr.  translite¬ 
rations  ignore  the  n,  some  e.g.  mn,  p'il,  *QOn,  rpftn, 
UOn,  iKnn  have  in  the  (presumed)  analogous  Ar. 

others,  e.g.  tfbn,  1£^n,  have  ^ ;  cf.  Wr.  SG,  p.  43. 


n.  pr.  (“Bel  lives,”  cf.  Nr6l2),  Praa  i.  74.  Acc.  to 
Ledr.  (Diet,  ad  loc.)  =  “he  whom  B.  favours.” 

n.  pr.  P  Eut.  29,  cf.  RAA  ii.  24,  n.  2  and  Cl. -Gan.  Rev. 
Arch.  July — Aug.  1886,  17,  32  (alt.  fcO¥). 
n.  pr.  m.  273,  f.  N  42. 


n.  pr.  P  Schr.  42,  alt. 


n.  pr.  Pvoj.  B4. 
n.  pr.  259  in  'n  ? 

n.  pr.  P  Sach.  3,  cf.  Ar.  jLa.;  v.  Wr.  PSBA  Nov.  1883, 

p.  28. 


n.  pr.  loc.  140,  Gr.  yc/x/xis  ;  v.  "in. 


c. 


4 


50 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


Snn 


pn 

Dsn* 

n^n* 


|D**ran 

pnnn 

(Win 

vm 

n^n 

'in 

arai 

nn 

. .  mn 
mn* 
pnn 

nnn 

nnn 

mn* 

«mn 

xmn 


.'in 

pm 

mn* 


n.  pr.  N  243,  (Sin.  23) ;  cf.  Ar.  w***».,  Syr.  i 

* 

and  Gr.  a /3<zl/3o<;,  a fiifios  W  2099,  2103  f.,  al. 

n.  pr.  P¥r.  p.  4,  voj.  a 2,  Eut.  37.  Lat.  eq.  habibi, 

Syr.  .  »  o  »  «^>  Wr.  /Syr.  Mart.  p.  1. 

(1)  v.  “to  destroy,”  113a>  13. 

(2)  frequent  in  funereal  inscriptions,  P  61b>  3,  158a>b 
M 12,  Sach.  18,  Wr.  S.-Sh.  “alas”;  cf.  i?3D,  ^>'30;  v.  Dal. 
192,  PSBA  viii.  29. 

n.  pr.  3241. 

Eg.  liabis  “light,  or  star”  in  Dinmy,  D3nn  (qq.  v.). 
v.  “to  participate,  share,”  Aph.  "onx  Pza2  ;  ib.  6 
nmnriK  perf.  1  S.  w.  sufF.,  or  adv.  infin. ;  cf.  fcOttriK, 
P712  (v.  No.  ZA  ix.  329). 
n.  pr.  (Pers.  ?)  138  b1[3]. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  202,  459  (cf.  “clumsy”1?  No.), 

n.  pr.  19.  Ass.  eq.  hambusu. 

n.  pr.  P  92,  61a>  2,  903,  Mi32;  raa  ii.  94  (n.  3),  143; 
cf.  ■on. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  164  ? 

n.  pr.  P  Schr.-S.  2,  cf.  I3in,  and  Hb.  'jn  (?)• 
n.  pr.  loc.  Hegra,  N  146,  v.  No.  ad  loc. 

“one,”  Zp5,  b13;  1522,  2096,  N  2712  (w.  t^N);  Pfi41"47, 
F223.  mn  N  2 14,  24s  ('m  IK'S));  mn  Pf2!". 
n.  pr.  Sin.  126  ? 

v.  “to  rejoice”?  ptcp.  1442;  cf.  Syr. 

n.  pr.  (“points”?)  P  964;  cf.  aSSovSa rys  in  Gr.  eq.  to 
P  Sach.  6;  v.  pnn. 

(1)  n.  pr.  loc.  383.  Ass.  eq.  handuate. 

(2)  n.  pr.  ?  N  204. 

v.  “to  renew,”  pi.  perf.  imn  235a2,  (158,  1).  rnn  perf. 
S.  dub.  in  P  Wr.  PSBA  Nov.  1885. 

(1)  n.  pr.  Pm  44. 

(2)  adj.  “new,”  Pf8;  Kmn  “in  the  new 

document  of  contract.” 

frag.  149  b-c3,  for  Tin  “look!”  or  lin  (i.e.  V)D)  “show!” 
n.  pr.  Sin.  520. 

y.  “to  show,”  149  b-c1  (?),  v.  .in. 


iirin 

nin 

min 


mn 

pin 

mm 

UBon 

min 

Dnm 

•xin 

Sssm 

jm 

nm* 


nn 

inn 

inn 

t|in 

ism 

man 

ntDn 


nx'ton 

Dton* 

nton 

nan 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY.  51 

n.  pr.  Sin.  181. 
n.  pr.  (Hor)  1221. 

n.  pr.  N  108,  145 ;  1912;  Sin.  16,  134,  163.  Ar.  j^L, 
cf.  ovpos  W  2270,  etc.,  and  in  O.T.  nm  Nu.  xxxi.  8, 
Ex.  xvii.  10. 

n.  pr.  (“belonging  to  Horus ”  ?)  125,  in  130  '“in. 

n.  pr.  P911,  cf.  Ph.  pimny,  and  <5o_k»,  avapav,  1  Macc. 

ii.  5  (?). 

Zp9,  DHM  rds.  nni£^  q.  v. 

n.  pr.  N  41,  cf.  WW3.&.  Ibn  Dor.  307 18. 

Co  ✓  j 

n.  pr.  N  248,  cf.  Ar.  or  Oja.,  and  perh.  freq. 

Gr.  a v0os. 

v.  onn. 

n.  pr.  (for  ^ssm  ?)  Pm 35,  on  a  seal, 
n.  pr.  Sin.  73. 

v.  “to  strengthen”  (=  pm),  P  137,  141. 

v.  “to  see,”  pf.  1  S.  n'tn  137  a2,  Ethp.  'tnn(K)  137  a5, 
'mnx  “it  seemed  good,”  Pf7,  f315>  24,  32  ;  cf.  ntrj  Dn.  iii. 
19  “fitting,  proper,”  Targ.  'tn,  'Dn  and  late  Heb.  'ISO. 
nmo  Nerab  25  “what  am  I  seeing?”  Hal. 

=  irn  “a  vision”  ?  137  a5;  cf.  Hi  TO  Dn.  iv.  8. 
n.  pr.  19b,  Ass.  hazi. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  565,  alt.  13'm. 
n.  pr.  243. 
n.  pr.  276. 

n.  pr.  N  102,  cf.  dlklA.,  wAJaa.. 

* 

“wheat,”  Zp6>  9;  pi.  'Dn  Zh6.  Emph.  pi.  SSDn  (=  NBn)  in 

Tl  '“I  soiytD  Pf29;  cf.  Dal.  Ill,  n.  1,  and  Syr.  14L, 
pi. 

\L 

“fine,  penalty,”  N  2711 ;  cf.  and  v.  Dip  the  more 

usual  word;  cf.  nKDIl  Ez.  vi.  17  (Qri). 

v.  “to  tame,  subdue,”  Zh27  ;  nm2  IDtm  “in  the 

place  where  they  tame  wild  beasts.” 

“  sceptre,  sovereignty,”  Zh3>  25. 

n.  pr.  fam.  P  3 1 2,  v.  Blau,  ZMG  xxv.  544  ;  cf.  “inn  Neub. 

4—2 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


Geogr.  Talm.  392,  Cur.  Spic.  14,  a  common 

Syr.  n.  pr.  loc.  (y.  Hoff.  Ausz.  184,  1440). 

X'H*  (1)  v.  “to  live,”  Aph.  in  n^y  mx  '*1  1>X31  1834  “  Rabel 
who  saves  his  people,”  XTI  verb.  adj.  “living,”  1442. 

N'Pi  (a)  pi.  “life,”  pn  163  d  (dub.  perh.  ptcp.),  pn  Nerab  l10; 
cstr.  m  P734  (cf.  Vog.  Syr.  153)  744,  756,  123“  (Ox.  I)8; 
1 1 44  (nBWM  mS  “for  his  own  life”),  1583,  Tl  P  1036, 
XT!  (cstr.,  cf.  X3D  from  *□),  P  843,  853,  945,  125®  (Ox.  2)3, 
M25,  i76;  w.  suff.  3  S.  mvn  P  865  ;  TilT  N  24,  P  32® 
(TIITQ  “as  long  as  he  lives”)  [744],  123®  (Ox.  2)3,  M36  ; 
niTI  P  853,  944,  mio3,  n'Tl  Mi35;  3  f.  S.  nm  P  Eut.  3. 
PI.  suff.  prim  P  123®  (Ox.  I)8,  jnm  P  756,  pirn  P734 
(cf.  Vog.  Syr.  153),  934. 

Sx'Jl  n.  pr.  (“El  lives”)  Sin.  370,  cf.  Hb.  and  Sab. 

nnyTn.  (The  inscr.  contains  two  other  names  with 
Hb.  analogies  P21X,  TQ65L) 

ytl  “subject  to,”  Pf227,  F314;  pi.  m.  pnTI  Pf39,  f.  pTlPF4 

•s  o  o  ? 

(like  construed  w.  direct  object). 

s  0 

pn  n.  pr.  2953,  cf.  Ar.  alt.  ijdti. 

n-  pr.  Sin.  559,  cf.  ^UUsui.. 

“strength,”  w.  suff.  q^TI  145b4. 

“army,”  x*?TI  2 “I  P  283  “a  general.” 

IJb'ri  n.  pr.  N  383,  I52  (CIS  rd.  iD'n),  573  (CIS  rd.  pTl) ;  cf. 

Cj  * 

yaia/xo?,  yee/xos  W  2037,  2183,  and  Ar. 

p)"|  n.  pr.  N  51,  cf.  ^L».,  and  Ass.  hajani,  ZA  1891,  436 
(cf.  also  J.  As.  1895,  t.  v.  p.  171). 

0  x* 

-m  (i)  in  Tra  Sin.  341  (—  Ar.  j.+6+j),  for  the  usual  DDD 
“good  luck.” 

•  •TH  (2)n.  pr.  frag.  PM203. 

N“I'H  (1)  n.  pr.  P  243. 

Xl'n  (2)  adj.  “noble,”  P  882,  92s,  934;  M92,  14s,  cf.  Hal.  Mel. 

Epig.  106,  and  v.  x*Vfi. 

)yri  n-  Pr*  Sin.  492. 

JTn  n-  Pr-  PI2)  31,  1 1 1,  854,  Wr.  p.  3,  Schr.  7,  M45;  Gr. 
eq.  cupavov.  For  Ar.  usage  cf.  ZMG  xxviii.  75. 

rvn  n.  pr.  (3162)  Sin.  152®,  474  ;  cf.  2uo~  “serpent.” 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


53 


rmr*  “wisdom,”  w.  suff  rin^on  Zp11. 

n.  pr.  122  b,  =  Eg.  hakonu(-i)  “  he  who  invokes,  adores  ” 
(Maspero). 

ron  n.  pr.  Sin.  148,  alt.  nsri. 

xSn  n.  pr.  P  132,  Eut.  42,  Sach.  18,  =  JU.  “mother’s 
brother,”  cf.  oAa  W  2589,  nbn  infra ;  v.  ZMG  xl.  172. 

nraSn  n.  pr.  loc.  Zh3,  Pr°b  the  name  for  Gerjin.  Acc.  to 
Hommel,  MVG  1897,  iii.  21,  Aleppo. 

niSn  n.  pr.  P  743  (M.  rds.  p^n),  cf.  Hb.  n^n.  After  Ar. 

SjJ  u.  one  expects  n"6n. 

nS(n)  n.  pr.  1584,  Huldu,  the  wife  of  Aretas  IV.;  cf.  xa^V 


rbn 

isp>n 

’S'Sn 

iv’Sn 

np'Sn* 

D^n 

mbn 

5|Sn 

tjbn 

spi 

xsSn 

’nSxsSn 


W  1967. 

n.  pr.  fam.  P  672  (in  1.  4  n^n  H2  =  'n  n'D),  cf.  xbn  and  v. 
ZMG  xxv.  550. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  535,  cf. 

n.  pr.  P  91,  Schr.-S.  8;  Levy,  ZMG  xviii.  99. 
n.  pr.  dimin.,  Sin.  12,  17,  142;  cf.  lY^n. 

in  (Din)  N  29,  43  “like,  as,”  i.q.  Ar.  AiAi.,  cf. 

J.  As.  1889,  xiv.  106  f. 

137  a  1,  idSpi  “the  first  sleep”  (=  to  -n-pioTov  Zvvttvlov)'! 
n.  pr.  1942,  cf.  W  2330. 

(1)  v.  in  "i*?  145  b5  “it  is  changed  for  thee.” 

(2)  in  niD  N  146  “a  change  leading  to  death.” 

(3)  prep,  “for,”  153  b  (?). 
n.  pr.  Praa  i.  73,  no.  1. 

n.  pr.  (“a  substitute  of  [or  from]  God”)  N  910,  cf. 


lxSn 

nxSrt 


(Gr.  dvrcyovos). 

$  *  * 

n.  pr.  N121;  Ar.  ;  cf.  aAt^aios  1  Macc.  ii.  5, 

Kidd.  58b  and  v.  Rev.  d’Assyr.  1885,  p.  73. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  17,  v.  lY^n. 

n.  pr.  N  70;  Sin.  10,  28,  69  +  27  t.  For  nvWrn  (?)  v. 
ZMG  xiv.  402  f.,  also  Tuch,  ZMG  iii.  193  ff.  (who 
erroneously  cfs.  Elusa),  Baeth.  Beit.  106  f.  and  We. 
Held.  42  ff.  ;  Heid.2  48,  n.  1. 


54 


pSn* 

vpSn 

Non 

nj-nan 

nSrtDn 

Dtsort 

vrtin 

pan 

■Son 

ij^an 

nVon 

can* 

toan 

yan 

nan 

nan 

nnan 
e>a  n 

a»an 

In 

■on 

ton* 
Stun 
"tin. . 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 

“a  part,”  w.  suff.  np^n  N  155,  194  ;  cf.  B.  Ar. 

Dn.  iv.  12. 

n.  pr.  256. 

“wrath,”  Zh33;  cf.  Dn.  iii.  13. 

?  1023. 

n.  pr.  149  d3,  G2. 

n.  pr.  383,  Ass.  eq.  hamatutu. 

n.  pr.  N  131,  cf.  ju^a-.  Alt.  ITftfl  (cf.  mjDPl). 

n.  pr.  N  253,  for  Sab.  cf.  DHM,  Oest.  Monatsschr.  f.  d. 

Orient.  1879,  p.  279. 

n.  pr.  241,  cf.  Ar.  or  rd.  n*?on  q.  v. 

0  *  0  s 

n.  pr.  N  910,  derived  peril,  fr.  Ar. 

n.  pr.  m.  N  72,  f.  N  103;  cf.  Ar.  (m.),  or  aH^a. 

✓ 

(f.),  a/«Aa0os  W  2393,  2416. 

v.  “to  burn,”  ptcp.  Don  137  A4. 

“sun-image,  sun-pillar,”  P  123®  (Ox.  I)2. 

n.  pr.  loc.  28,  Ass.  eq.  hame,  a  Mesopotamian  city. 

(1)  “wine”  (1;^Q  -K»  ,  j-***),  Nion  P  146,  F29.  Cstr.  in 
pi¥0  ion  “  Egyptian  wine,”  146  A  22. 

(2)  “ass”  ("|^Q-kj,  Pfi9’32;  ion  pyo  (Gr.  eq. 

yo/xoq  ovikos)  “an  ass-load,”  Pfi20’  27. 

0  *  J  * 

n.  pr.  162,  Gr.  eq.  ^afipar^ ;  cf.  Ar.  (v.  s. 

* 

n'on). 

(1)  “five,”  1833 ;  in  2009,  N  128  w.  nXD ;  in  N  99  w. 
pnPn.  ws^on  2C,  PEut.  l ;  n^on  (w.  isyy)  lc. 

(2)  jyon  “a  fifth,”  12a’b;  cf.  Hb.  Syr.  . 

w.  N'o  1502  “a  propitiation  with  water.” 
n.  pr.  frag.  138  A6. 

v.  “to  have  mercy,”  nwn  Zp12  (xjn  =  pn)  ?  ib.  19  Hal. 
rds,  nwn  “  I  implored  ”  1 

n.  pr.  1 9 13,  Nab.  Sach. ;  and  P  93  for  Cf.  perh. 

avr^Aos  Wetz.  Haur.  Inscr.  183,  but  v.  ZMG  xv.  440. 

n.  pr.  frag.  f.  149  e2. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


55 


run 

run* 

nun 

«ni:n 

•fawn 

jStwn 

«'jn 

irjn 


pn* 

djh 

’sun 

xron 

rt'Dn 

*VDn 

“[DPI 


nanDn 

pasn 

’an 


ia'sn 

■nan 

nxn* 

popn 

xSpn 


(1)  n.  pr.  N  203  (cf.  in  MH,  nan  Ber.  4b). 

(2)  in  [nnjan 't  'nan  139  a2  “  my  kindness,  which  I  have 
shown  her”  (pn  pf.  1  S.  w.  suff.). 

n.  pr.  P  Schr.-S.  5,  alt.  'Tian. 

“a  shop,”  Pf25,  cf.  Fran.  172,  Lag.  Mittheil.  ii.  363  f. 

n.  pr.  m.  Sin.  51,  65,  116,  +  17  t.  (f.  in  Sin.  219);  cf. 

*  0  * 

Ar.  coloquinth,”  v.  infr. 

n.  pr.  (derived  from  the  above)  N  52. 
n.  pr.  v.  N'jn  “O ;  cf.  perh.  Onias,  1  Macc.  xii.  7, 

and  n'an  'an  Chwol.  6. 

n.  pr.  N  52,  Sin.  (47a,  87b),  173,  576,  664;  cf.  JilL, 
ov aivos,  ovei/05,  W  2084  al.  and  Syr.  Cur.  ASD 

1.  6  from  end  ;  1 1  »  '  »- »  Wr.  SD,  p.  «—». 

v.  “  to  be  gracious,”  v.  s.  nan  2. 

n.  pr.  1486,  i.q.  Eg.  honsu. 
n.  pr.  fam.  P  1332. 

n.  pr.  f.  P  Cl. -Gan.  124  no.  5,  cf.  perh.  nan. 

adj.  plu.  (i.  e.  n^DQ)  “  pious,”  1414,  cf.  Syr.  (Ledr. 

cfs.  Eg.  hosiou,  “favoured  of  Osiris”), 
adj.  “  less  ”  Pf328. 

v.  “to  spare,  diminish,”  3  m.  S.  P  155.  panon  P63 

-n  7 

“because  he  remitted  them.”  (Like  ^ >  it  takes  two 
accusatives.  Note  addition  of  suffix  to  verb,  cf.  ZMG 
xxii.  506.) 

n.  pr.  1221,  mng.  dub.  “perfectus  et  divino  favore  ad- 
jutus  ”  (Edd.). 
n.  pr.  297  (v.  T^Pn). 

n.  pr.  the  god  Apis  (cf.  Jer.  xlvi.  15,  LXX.),  1232. 
'an  '"1D1N  1231-2  Osiris- Apis  (i.e.  Serapis),  v.  'an  and 
cf.  'annay. 
n.  pr.  147,  B  l16. 
n.  pr.  31. 

pi.  pvn  385,  395,  “harvest-men”^),  Ass.  eq.  esidani. 

uJ  ^  J  0  *  Q* 

n.  pr.  N  59,  cf.  Ar.  “short”  and  n.  pr.  ^jUsduaJI 

Yakut  i.  364.  4.  CIS  297  rds.  ptaan. 

“field,”  24,  27,  113a,1K;  n*?pn  531,  pi.  cstr.  'Hp]n  31. 


56 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


ppn  v.“  to  write.”  Impf.  2  m.  S.  pnn,  Zh34. 

nn  n.  pr.  140,  nn  "in,  Eg.  hor  en  Heb,  “the  Horus  of 
Heb,”  v.  >nn,  iin. 

Kin*  (1)  “wrath,”  Zh23>27,  mn  Zh2H,  cf.  Syr.  verb 

tfiri  (2)  n.  pr.  f.  dub.  P  Eut.  19. 

(1)  v*  “1°  desolate,”  ptcp.  pass.  n2in  (i.e.  n'l^in)  jyyp 
“desolated  cities,”  Zp4.  Aph.  pi.  pf.  i2inN,  Sin.  4633. 

^-in  (2)  “sword,”  Zp5,  h<9)»25.  On  Zp5  v.  Wi.  AF  i.  106,  who 
prefers  to  render  “dryness,”  assuming  a  play  upon  the 
double  meaning  of  ^m. 

nn  in  Jim  Din  Nab.  Pet.3  “forbidden”?  cf.  Barth  ad  loc. 
p.  276. 

tain  n*  pr.  Sin.  78,  525,  527 ;  cf.  Ar.  Hb.  “a 

grasshopper.” 

n-  pr.  (frag-)  2174,  Eut.  (N  20)  rds.  lin. 
ann  n.  pr.  147,  col.  2,  B10;  peril.  Eg.  hrudi,  hruti,  “young.” 

•  •  Win  n-  pr-  Sin.  129,  130  (ib.  166,  for  lYlin),  cf.  u&jj-t*-. 
pnn  n.  pr.  PM33,  alt.  pnn  q.  v. 
nn  (1)  w.  12  “a  freedman,”  161‘»2,  (269),  Sin.  537,  Pf212, 
and  in  P  753  for  'IV  12,  v.  ZMG  xxxv.  738;  w.  n2  (for 
ni2)  P  S.-Sh.,  Sach.  4. 

nn  (2)  n.  pr.  v.  nin. 

n.  pr.  M.  on  P  755,  alt.  ah®  'in. 

apparently  a  divine  name,  Nab.  Pet.3.  Acc.  to  Wi.  AF, 
2nd  ser.  (1898),  p.  62,  an  adj.  =  “protected,”  “holy.” 

I^nn  n.  pr.  Sin.  2,  76,  105,  +  43  t.  (In  Sin.  348  written 
IS^'inj.)  Cf,  Ibn  Dor.  157. 

mnn  n.  pr.  Sin.  158  (perh.  rd.  IJl'in?). 

Din*  (i)  v.  “  to  devote,  ban”  ;  part.  pass.  QUID  N  93. 

Din  (2)  “  a  devoted  object,  a  ban,”  N  28,  43-4,  93.  NDin 
N  4'  (fr^y  H  ND1I12  “in  the  interdict  mentioned  above”) 
92;  w.  suff.  DnDin  N  126  (CIS  rds.  DUD  in),  pi.  [|D]in 
P34  (Gr.  eq.  dva^pra),  ...Din  P  352,  f'Din  N.  Pet.4;  cf. 

KnoinD. 

IDin  n.  pr.  N  31,  309,  Sin.  329,  cf.  and  in  Sab.  v.  Hal. 
41 P,  5041’3. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


57 


NBnn 

■Bnn 

tomn 

*mn 

nmn 

p^n 

iwn 


wn 

Dnn 

jnn 

'snn 


•  •  • 

xmto 

onnto 

rnto 


n.  pr.  P  203  (cf.  “deaf,”  or  “magician,” 

>  “sculptor”).  Gr.  eq.  apaa. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  9C,  14,  60,  214b,  +  6  t.  (cf.  ib.  486,  where  Gr. 

0 

ICO<!3,  epcrov  points  to  a  n.  pr. 
n.  pr.  138  b3. 

adj.  fr.  nmn  (infra),  21 15,  X  39,  w.  py^D  (in  Ar.  ^jjl»-). 
n.  pr.  Aretas,  1583-4  ;  N  l4,  cf.  aperas,  2  Cor.  xi.  32 
(more  properly  apeOas,  but  perh.  based  upon  connection 

W.  dptTrj). 

v.  “to  reckon,”  Ethpa.  Inf.  1265TirtD^  Pf34. 

“  reckoning,”  Pf237,  F316 ;  w.  suff.  HJ265T6  ib.  F334. 
n.  pr.  277. 

n.  pr.  Xerxes,  1223.  The  form  follows  the  O.  Pers. 
hsiyars  more  closely  than  the  Aram,  form  ESmi&JTlK  (cf. 
Meyer,  Entst.  Jud.  15  n.  2). 

n.  pr.  X  131,  cf.  Ar. 

n.  pr.  Pm 57,  Eut.  41,  ao-acror,  cf.  RAA  iii.  115  f. 

“a  seal,”  [661],  1001,  10P,  105;  Dmn  1511. 

“son-in-law,”  X  127. 

n.  pr.  1231  (perh.  =  “  oblation  ”). 


b 

“good,”  163  a,  Xerab  23;  2D  '21  “it  was  good  to  me,” 
Zb1u  ;  2 ID  2'DO  P  68,  69,  v.  s.  2'DD  ;  20  p2")  “manifold 
good  things,”  PM271.  Emph.  K2D  P  742,  pi.  NUD  P  (35),  86. 

2D2  occurs  frequently  (e.  g.  243,  X  561,  Sin.  6)  as  a 
valedictory  address,  “  good  luck,”  and  is  once  replaced 

by  the  Ar.  equiv.  Tn2,  v.  Til.  'JV2  J12D  HD  b 2 b  Zb15 
“all  the  good  things  (pi.  f.  cstr.)  of  my  house”;  cf. 
jntpn  ftp  Ez.  vi.  9,  where  'n  is  pi.  f.  absol. 
n.  pr.  1843  in  N2D- • -“12. 

“butcher,”  P  110“,  v.  Mordt.  Beit.  p.  33.  Cf.  Wr.  Apoc. 
Acts,  240  b. 

n.  pr.  Tiberius,  Levy  in  ZMG  xviii.  p.  101,  no.  17. 
Tebeth  (J"DP),  the  tenth  month,  Dec.- Jan.,  X  32,  149, 
158 ;  P  (66),  123a  (Ox.  3)5,  Pmg5,  Eut.  36. 


58 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


*pn& 

xniD 

Smcsto 

nS'D 

nb'D 

N,l?£3 

SSd* 
■  ■00 
nsats 

NDJtD 

N'yto 

xyo* 

kjijjb 

«22J?t3* 

novo 

|J?D* 

vies 


S' 

HX’ 


n.  pr.  loc.  340  in  'D  |»  rtjrfca  DVK  1 KWV  n:S. 

n.  pr.  167  (for  yiD  cf.  “obedient”?), 
pi.  “rocks,”  N  Pet.2 
=  Tetricolus  ?  Pm  26. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  603,  606,  v.  infr. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  114,  203,  cf.  r6'LD  and  Ar.  Allj-b. 

“a  youth,”  P381;  pi.  1112. 

“  shade,  shadow,”  w.  sufF.  “]S^D  145  b6. 
n.  pr.  frag.  Pm2. 

in  nnym  Samt  ixed1?  Pm47.  Acc.  to  M.  for  hidd 

“burial”? 

n.  pr.  N  45. 

(1)  v.  “to  err,”  PF31,  Gr.  eq.  [a/xapj-ny/xa. 

(2)  “error,”  pi.  jiyD  Pf249,  i.e.  \)VQ,  <CLL^,  but  v.  J.  As. 
1883,  t.  ii.  539. 

“a  load,”  Pfi15;  xaiyD5?  “per  load,”  Pf310;  pyD  Pfi6,  F331, 
v.  also  Dip,  taa,  IDfl. 

(1)  n.  pi.  XDCyD  “victuals,”  Pf310. 

(2)  in  XDyD  by  p  “by  the  law  of  adoption,”  161,  22,  cf. 

“  to  engraft,”  and  v.  Cl. -Gan.  Rec.  56  ff. 
v.  “  to  load,”  ptcp.  pass.  pi.  ppyta  Pf319. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  594,  alt.  P2D,  1'ID. 

for  1  in  xiD'D ;  '  final  in  pr.  names  sign  of  gen.,  cf. 

'npxnm  etc.  v.  Eut.  Nab.  p.  75  ;  '  final  in  Palm,  names 
(chiefly  family  names)  'laix,  'Ban.  nvn,  HDy,  cf.  Kerber, 
p.  11;  '  sufF.  of  3  m.  S.  falls  away  in  rVDX,  ninx.  man, 

HVn,  mi';  '  plene  in  ^iP'X,  defectiva  in  m>  X^D.1,  nnift 
(“his  city”)  DD,  xnpIT,  and  Aph.  of  Dip;  '  reps.  Gr. 

t  in  Xp'DDH,  DIp'BH,  Xp'L^pD  and  stands  for  P  in  D'^IIX, 
D'llB.  D'^P.  D'pia  (?),  D'llSp.  For  pi.  in  '  (Zenj.)  v.s.  a. 
interj.  Pm 57  (dub.)  cf.  RAA  i.  1 15  f. 
n.  pr.  loc.  Zp2,  h1*  l%  Ya’udi,  the  land  N.  of  the  Orontes, 
v.  Wi.  AF  16  IF. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


59 


NpW* 

Wins* 

Si' 
•  •  •  • 
my 

my 

my 

t 


nt 


m* 

H' 

bzyn' 


KHT 

HT 


“infant,”  pi.  emph.  N'p3&0  137  b3. 
n.  pr.  (“  El  tests  ”)  47. 

“dried  stuff,”  Pf317. 

(1)  v.  “to  bring,”  Zp<;>14.  In  Pm 45  "|Y1  |D  p'n  ^12'n 
“H.  is  led  away  (cf.  Syr.  >Z~|)  from  the  way”(?), 
but  see  ^12'n.  Perh.  pass.  ptcp.  in  ^'2'  Pfi6. 

(2)  “a  stream,”  so  Hal.  in  Zp21,  v.  |jok  (2). 

n.  pr.  N124. 

(1)  “dry  land,”  P  794. 

(2)  n.  pr.  P  108. 

“hand,”  T2  “by  means  of,”  1491’2,  3233,  P  69  (perh.  ib. 
n.  pr.);  "inyrv  1'S,  147c;  w.  suff.  H'  Zh2>12;  n*!'  Zh25, 
N  22  [Pmi86];  pi.  suff.  ni~P  (for  n'T?)  P  954. 

(1)  n.  pr.  P[13'],  263  ;  Gr.  eq.  10.8*75,  cf.  Dal.  1 43 1 1  and 

v.  'T. 

(2)  verb,  v.  K110,  Kin. 

n.  pr.  P56,  64,  631,  984,  Mi73;  Gr.  eq.  laSSaios,  cf.  perh. 
y  Ez.  x.  43  (Qri). 

n.  pr.  P  Eut.  26,  Vog.  J.  As.  I2,  22;  name  of  a  family, 
Pm 51 ;  cf.  v\r  >  Xn.ri  Hoff.  Ausz.  21,  n.  159,  and  Hb. 

^Ny'T.  y'T  perh.  in  sense  of  K-*.-*  “noble,”  or  |AJri 
“  friend.” 
v.  s.  NTH3. 

v.  “to  give,”  138  b6,  N72;  P  163;  3  f .  S.  n2H'  149B-C11; 
1  S.  TQn[']  149  g3;  pi.  UH'  1586.  Impf.  arp  N  46  (cf. 
Dal.  253).  Ptcp.  in'  Pf334,  pi.  pan'  F  325.  Ptcp.  pass. 
2'(T  147  bi8,  2'n(')  146  A24,  a['n']  147  A14,  and  once  m. 
for  f.  N129  (n'rp  nn  rinD^n). 

n.  pr.  dub.  1543. 
n.  pr.  (“given”)  P  903. 

n.  pr.  P  158®  (for  K^nirv1?),  but  cf.  Ph.  Synnn'. 

in  Nerab  2y;  the  line  runs,  ftfe  'ey  ID'^1  1DH  HND  ini' 
“  to-day  (in  D1')  they  are  a  hundred  ;  and  they  have  not 
placed  (iety  fc^>)  with  me  vessels...”  (so  Hal.)? 

n.  pr.  Julia,  P  67’,  cf.  in/r. 


60 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


n-  Pr-  J uliu.s,  IovXlos,  P  41,  71,  151 ;  Sacli.  1.  DI^P 
P  Cl. -Gan.  Bee.  303 ;  abbrev.  b)'  P  123“  (Ox.  3)2. 

XftV  “day,”  113a>4,  very  freq.  in  cstr.  st.,  e.g.  2119,  P  931, 
987  al.,  before  a  verb  NDDD  by'  DPI  43a>5  and  “mb  DP 
146  B46.  PL  |OP  145  a4,  cstr.  'O'  235  a  1  (but  see  btf) 
Zp10.  w.  suff.  1  S.  'OP  Nerab  23,  [Zp9’18],  'O'  Zh9,1°. 
n.  pi.  “the  Greeks,”  PJ.As.Yog.  24. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  404. 

n.  Pr-  P  993  (so  M,  Yog.  rds.  ^N'fiD)  “El  lives,”  cf.  Ph. 
j^Nirp  and  Jewish  'H'S'Il  Hal.  Mel.  Ejrig.  230. 

VJT  n-  Pr-  Sin-  585. 

«mn'  n.  pr.  P132. 

v.  only  in  Hi.  w.  jo  “to  make  better  than,”  3  m.  S.  w. 
suff.  m'B'H  Zp9,  1  S.  w.  suff.  nniO'n  ib.  B12. 

72D'  v.  “to  be  able,”  N  232  ('tJH  more  usual  in  Nab.). 

£^0'  n.  Pr-  106  (cf.  Hb.  pr.  ns.  rP^D1;  and  Sab.  ?). 

*"[^P  (1)  n.  coll,  “children,”  N102,  cstr.  ib.  20:!  w.  suff.  n—  N22, 
DPI-  ib.  43,  142. 

(2)  v.  “to  bear.”  On  a  seal  N'lS’Q  ^n[n]xS  PM3i,  “uxori 
in  partu  ”  (?).  Hithp.  Impf.  “6'JV  N  122. 

D'  “sea,”  145c4  D'  “inN3  “in  the  place  of  the  sea”;  NO' 
P  794. 

XDY . .  n.  pr.  frag.  Pm24. 

1ft'  n.  pr.  259,  298  (=  N  60);  cf.  Ar.  ^ j . 

“  right  side,”  "p'O'  jo  “  on  thy  right  side,”  Pza7  ; 
NPO'  n[j]*lO  “south-east,”  N  156. 

xStt'  n.  pr.  (“  [He]  is  full  ”?)  P  853,  v.  vbv,  and  cf.  Hb.  *'?>?'. 

n.  pr.  P  36“2’M,  125  ;  cf.  Ar.  Or.  eq.  ta/rAt^os,  and 

✓ 

cf.  l/jlclXkovc.  al.  1  Macc.  xi.  39.  v.  Grun.  30. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  104,  and  perh.  ib.  91  for  lSfOD . 

in  Pf2',  acc.  to  Schr.  —  t/xana  or  qxaTio7ra>Aai  “  tailors.” 
But  n  —  t  is  unusual. 

py  v.  s.  NpJN'. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  144,  282,  287,  294  +14  t.,  cf.  and  Hb. 

by'  nby'_. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


61 


nay' 

apy* 

njr 


injr 

NV' 

Np'* 


Ip'* 

mp' 

• .  y 
m’ 
tan* 

bism' 

xSiani' 

'in' 

nrrr 

'3'-)' 

‘ny'T 

Wsi’ 

m' 

33*'* 


n.  pr.  1953,  (31 63  ?),  cf.  Ar.  and-r.  J.  As.  1891,  t.  xvii. 
540,  where  Cl.-Gan.  cfs.  viol  Ia/q8pi,  1  Macc.  ix.  32  ff. 
n.  pr.  Jacob;  P  652,  823.  On  the  occurrence  of  this 
name  in  a  Palmyrene  inscription  (together  with 
and  'iS)  cf.  Derenb.  Geogr.  Talm.  i.  22,  224  and  v. 

P  Schr.  5,  13,  Wr.  no.  4,  voj.  A  4;  perh.  a  synonym 
of  *?2n  [can  one  cf.  w>l£  “  to  help  ” ;  Impf.  used  pre- 
catively  “may  he  help”?]. 

J  * 

P  voj.  B6,  cf.  Ar.  ( v .  Baeth.  Beit.  158),  perh.  con¬ 

nected  w.  ny. 

v.  “  to  go  out,”  P  95  (?),  cf.  infra. 

Hi.  Impf.  Kpp  Zp22;  v.  KplD. 

(1)  “honour,”  cstr.  P  64,  36b’ \  631 ;  w.  suff.  n—  P  35, 
vnp^  Sach.  1  (for  suff.  cf.  \mi  P  30)  ;  |in—  PI5,  313. 

(2)  v.  ££  to  honour,”  Inf.  w.  suff.  Pm3g. 

n.  pr.  (£‘a  toad  ”)  Pza5. 

n.  pr.  fragm.  P  7  82. 

n.  pr.  v.  Wr.  PSBA  Nov.  1885. 

“a  month,”  [Pf25],  freq.  in  cstr.  st.  esp.  w.  3  1223,  146a1, 
2034 ;  N  l3  etc.  ITU  N  107,  158  error  for  riT3. 
n.  pr.  P156,  1245  ;  voj. a3;  the  name  of  a  lunar  deity, 
in  P  1245  borne  by  a  man,  Gr.  eq.  iapL/3o)\ov ;  v.  Yog. 
ad  loc.  and  cf.  Baeth.  Beit.  87. 

n.  pr.  P  23,  732,  1245  (see  PWr.  p.  1,  M124,  is3; 

xSinT  RAA  ii.  23,  no.  1. 

n.  pr.  (££ belonging  to  the  moon”)  P  162,  3 1 ',  691 ;  M36, 
Schr.  52,  raa  ii.  68,  Gr.  eq.  tapaioq. 
n.  pr.  dub.  v.  Wr.  PSBA  Nov.  1885. 
n.  pr.  70,  Ass.  eq.  iribai. 

n.  pr.  (££  Bel  causes  to  thrive,”  cf.  Bev.  Dan.  214),  P  167, 
83a>3,  123a  (Ox.  I)4,  Schr.  4,  9.  Gr.  eq.  iapei/?>yXo5. 
n.  pr.  (££E1  liberates,  or  frees”)  77,  cf.  Hb. 

“heir,”  N93. 

v.  “to  sit,”  only  in  Zenj.  rOfcJ”  1  S.  perf.  h8;  Impf.  3£T 
h15’20’25;  ptep.  pass.  rafcT  HTp  (i.e.  BIB*  “inhabited 
cities”)  P4.  Hi.  3m.  S.  w.  suff.  "Olfcjqn  B5,  P19;  1  S. 
roCPin  h19.  In  Aram,  regularly  3D',  see  N21YIO. 


62 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


JV  accusative  particle,  P  154,  w.  sufF.  nrp  N  35,  14°,  2710 ; 
21 13. 

rrun*  n-  Pr-  (^"U  cf.  Gen.  xxx.  11?)  Sin.  388,  394®. 
a«v  n.  pr.  PSchr.  23,  preceded  by  PIX,  whence  Simonsen  (C  16) 
rds.  Yirmx. 

adv.  “abundantly,”  “|H2n?D  *V1V1  Sin.  498  ;  “  more,”  Pfi47, 
F328  (w.  XDJ)  “to  demand  an  extra  charge.”  Y>]V  DJHD  X*? 
“nothing  more,”  Pf11. 

•  • 

xkrv  n.  pr.  Pvoj.  As. 

in'*  (1)  “  rest,  remainder,”  w.  sufF.  n—  Zp4  (but  v.  s.  n). 

“7FP*  (2)  'b  DIVD  Zh13-13,  “made  rich  for  me”  (No.). 

3 

3  for  p  in  p“D>  X¥H,  ^tDD  (perhaps  the  D  is  original  and 
has  been  hardened  to  p  on  account  of  the  presence 
of  the  V,  v.  DHM  Sendschirli  Inschr.  40  f.),  and  ID'S 
Caesar  (?).  The  same  phenomenon  exists  in  Mand.  cf. 
Wr.  SG  50. 

JO  v.  joS- 

J03  “pain,”  Pm 9i  (v.  s.  id),  i.q.  Syr.  v.  DH. 

n-  pr*  145  dg? 

(1)  n.  pr.  loc.  Zp12;  cf.  Hommel,  MYG  1897,  Heft  iii. 
22,  n.  2. 

(2)  v.  “be  plentiful,  numerous,”  pf.  3  f.  S.  mDD  Zp9. 
Hi.  "QDn  Zp4. 

*7^3*  (6)  HDD  Zh11,  “his  great  ones”  ( v .  Hal.  IH  93). 

*7^  adv.  “when,”  Pf3. 

7*7^  n.  pr.  1644. 

*>*"13  “as,”  N  37,  DHID  X^y  HD,  ib.  96  HD  HD  ;  Pf211>18,  “while,” 

P  153  (cf.  ZMG  xxiii.  284);  cf.  HD\H  and  RD- 
'ro  “thus,”  1233,  cf.  Talm.  'XHD  (acc.  to  others  “a  piece  of 
bread,”  cf.  Edd.). 

‘/p'plD  n-  Pr*  N  21,  P  30a,b,35  It  A  A  iii.  28,  no.  2  ;  cf.  Ar. 

Ibn  Dor.  111. 

jS'HD  n.  Pr-  N  91,  cf.  Ar. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


63 


jrO  “priest,”  Sin.  550;  &OH3  ib.  249,  v.  NrcnD. 
tfPD  n.  pr.  (“priest”)  Sin.  348. 

NfOrD  “priestess,”  Sin.  223®,  v.  5s*n. 

n.  pr.  N51,  cf.  Kv.  and  Syr.  OJCLD  HofF.  Jul.  24712. 
n.  pr.  138  A  8,  cf.  Eg.  kaumenu. 

N3Q  N  41,  with  NDDD  and  &OB3,  “  fundament”  (T). 

lS&P'D  n.  pr.  Sin.  362,  cf.  Ar.  or 

ma  (i)“  according,  as,”  }1DD  Pin  JY1D  Pf246. 

T\)l  (2)  “likewise,”  N  48,  810;  cf.  ZMG  xxii.  485,  Schwally 
44  f.  and  v.  btDft. 
nn  i.  q.  HD  145  c3,  Oil4. 

St53*  v.  “to  kill.”  Impf.  pi.  w.  suff.  ■p^lDD'1  Nerabl11;  v.  s. 
D  and  cf.  blDp,  n^flp. 

O  n.  pr.  P  J.As.Vog.  I2,  22.  Gr.  eq.  rov  Xcuov. 

I'l*  “pain,”  pi.  cstr.  DiVn^H  '3'D  145  a2,  i.q.  XDD. 

T’3  146  b  46,  the  month  Koihak,  Eg.  kahika ;  cf. 

“the  fourth  of  the  civil  year”  (found  in  Min.  cf.  J. As. 
1893,  t.  xxii.  p.  524).  Acc.  to  this  inscr.  the  24th  was 

nA  dp. 

70*  v-  “to  measure,”  Impf.  w.  suff.  n^'D'  Pf223,  Vog.  rds. 
ri^D  “  a  measure.” 

^O  n.  pr.  (“deceitful”),  P  823,  cf.  perh.  ^aiAo?  J.  As.  1881, 
t.  xix.  p.  487 ;  alt.  \PD  (Mord.). 

W'D  w.  2,  “  according  to  nature,  naturally,”  Pmio1'. 

XD'3*  “  purse,”  non  \D,  £$  iStW  “at  his  own  expense,”  P  74, 

jinDH  P85,  (65),  and  IIND'D  (No.  rds.  [n]fDN  D'D)  P  14. 
n.  pr.  Caesar,  P  1183,  dub. ;  v.  “iV'p. 
ns'3  n.  pr.  Sin.  669,  cf.  dim.  <<oat<jbos,  J.  As.  1881,  t.  xix.  p.  151 
sm  w.  nn,  “summer-house,”  Zb19,  i.  q.  B.  Aram.  tPp,  Syr. 

;  v.s.  3. 

fc^O  (?)in  *pD  ^>D  153  a6. 

n.  pr.  652,  Ass.  eq.  ki-samas. 

nwi  n-  pr-  P33b>i,  mm4. 

^O  (1)  “all,”  342,  147a  l6,  137  b1"2,  P  914.  In  salutations 

DtD  *?DD  'B  tibw  Sin.  498.  DP  ^D  P  931,  KDDI  ^D  N  52  v. 
K3"D  ;  H  *?D  p  “  of  every  kind  of  that  which,”  N  9b. 


64 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


S3 

S3--- 

X3S3 

1*3 

EWi'iSs 

'S3 

i3'S3 

ni'Sa 

K3“I'Sd 

n^Sd 

"taSs 

idSs 

nSiM 

'03 

□303 

So3 

lS03 

N303 

N303 


rta  P  ll4,  rta  nv  Pi4,  rta  nrra  Zp19,  P82, 

933,  F218,  jn^O  P  936,  voj.bI.  dh^D  2116,  Nab.  Pet.3; 
v.  io^D. 

(2)  “a  vase”  (=  y?)  1221  or  perh.  “number,”  so  in 
113a>19 (?)  S|D3  bl  153A56and^n  |^X  149c  12. 

n.  pr.  £.  frag.  257. 

n.  pr.  (“dog,”  x  Aram,  termination  or  perh.  abbrevia¬ 
tion)  N  152.  In  Aram.  cf.  Cur.  ASD  156, 

v.  infr. 

n.  pr.  268,  (272),  291 ;  Sin.  23,  28,  42  +  38  t. ;  Ar. 
cf.  n^OX,  nSronx,  13^3  etc.  and  WRS  Kin.  200  f. 

n.  pr.  97  (“every  one  of  the  seed  of”  or  “all  splen¬ 
dour  is  Samas”).  Acc.  to  Levy  nSs  =  TO  “herald  of  S.” 
n.  pr.  P  150. 

n.  pr.  (dim.)  313,  Sin.  273.  Ar.  wJLLib,  cf.  yaX/?a<>, 

yoXa i/3oq  (Kerber  36). 

n.  pr.  f.  N  32> l0,  fem.  of  above. 

“chiliarch”  (=  yiXiapyo?)  2012,  (Eut.  N  52  rds.  XD^Il^D), 
cf.  Syr.  form 

x  i 

“everything,”  Pf.  In  Zb15 
“  whatsoever,”  Pf210  and  freq.  ib. 

in  '3  JYQ  Zb17,  Hal.  cfs.  Ass.  kalamu  “totality”;  perh. 
=  DH^O  (Sach.)  or  i^D  “kingdom”  (Hoff.). 

n.  pr.  (cf.  i?EO  ?)  N  281. 
in  135a4,  UK  *»:>(?). 

*  O  * 

n.  pr.  f.  N  31,  cf.  Ar.  a  kind  of  gum  ( KayKapov ). 

Cf.  in  Sab.  DHM,  Ep.  Denk.  83  f. 

n.  pr.  Pmi33  from  “be  perfect,”  cf.  nSlEO? 

Os  J 

n.  pr.  Sin.  91,  383,  cf.  Ar.  alt.  13DL 

(1)  n.  pr.  fam.  P  Eut.  41,  Praa  iii.  28,  no.  3,  <f)v\r}<; 
yo/xap^j/oor,  cf.  yo/xpou  W  2389. 

(2)  “priest,”  113b>2,  130,  1704  (w.  r6x),-  Nerab  l1 

(w.  -inp),  pi.  xnEO  1 13a>23. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


65 


‘wiM 

P 

P» 


i!W3 

vjn» 

N"U3 

ms* 

xroj* 

DJroa 

bbos 

DD3* 

DD2 

XSDD 

NSD3 


nojD 

)isys 

IP 

V23 

n'23 

Ssd* 

bss 

JOS3 


n.  pr.  (“priests  of  Bel”?)  PSach.  9,  Eut.  51,  cf.  “i)D3. 
“thus,”  1223  ("idk  p),  149  a1,  b  2,  3.  n3  p  145  c3. 

Canun ,  the  8th  month,  November  (otherwise  known 
as  WVforp),  P  30a> b,  313,  63,  64,  PWr.  p.  3,  Pza1,  Eut. 
415.  In  P  30*  written  erroneously  pn.  For  deriv.  cf. 
Journal  of  Sac.  Lit.  4th  ser.  vii.  424. 

“a  coal-pan,”  P  ll4;  cf.  Hoff.  Ausz.  37  n.  3 1 2 f . (  >=Kavdv). 

n.  pr.  Sin.  376  (?). 

“wing,  side,”  in  ppM  tl"IN  Zpu  “to  cling  to  a  certain 

party  or  side”;  cf.  rpM  p'tnn  Zech.  viii.  23. 

n.  pr.  Pzmg  xviii.  105  (=  “zither,”  or  cf.  ZMG  ad  loc.). 

v.  “to  collect,”  ptcp.  Pf3.  Ethpe.  jiBMiv  145  a8, 

ptcp.  pi.  ptWDXllD  Pf333. 

pi.  w.  suff.  rUTOn  “his  acquaintances,”  151“ ;  cf.  B.  Aram. 
nniJ?  Ezr.  v.  6  and  v.  No.  GGA  1884,  1017. 
n.  pr.  99. 

Cislul  ( Caslul ),  the  ninth  month,  December  (otherwise 
called  1^??),  P  245,  757. 

(1)  “  tribute,”  pi.  cstr.  'DDD  P  1242;  v.  ND3D- 

(2)  v.  “to  rebuke,”  Impf.  D3n  149,  13(?). 

(1)  n.  pr.  f.  Praa  ii.  27,  no.  7. 

(2)  “silver,”  301,  43  a6,  70,  71,  108;  P  234.  64, 

153  a3,  Nerab  27,  N  97 ;  and  w.  ^yn  Zb10,  pn.  P|DD2  “for 
silver,”  43  a3. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  89,  175,  256,  290*,  507,  613 ;  cf.  in  Q 
n.  pr.  Sin.  666. 

“  now,”  137  a1,  b1. 

n.  pr.  1992,  cf.  Ar.  and  v.  PDi. 

?  in  vYQD  '^yn  Zp10  “villages.”  It  stands  in  conjunction 

w.  nrn  ^yn. 

(1)  v.  Aph.  “to  double,”  N  38,  a  mistake  for 

t^QDN1?  (i.  e. 

(2)  in  >121  “double  price,”  N  207. 

“sepulchre,”  2031,  N  26,  281 ;  and  so  rd.  for  21 12. 
A  Lihyan  word  for  “Op  ;  cf.  Ep.  Denk.  9,  25,  27,  and 
v.  ZA  1894,  331. 


c. 


5 


66 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


XHM  “arch,”  P701,  ZMG  xv.  616,  where  cf.  Levy. 

n.  pr.  288,  cf.  Sab.  and  v.  Kerber,  69  n.  8. 

86  “a  herald”  (hence  the  root  in  Aram.  [cf.  e.g.  Kt’n3 
Dn.  iii.  4]  is  not  necessarily  derived  from  Krjpvao-av). 

XDDD  “fortress,  citadel,”  P  63,  Nab.  Pet.2;  cstr.  “|“D  P  54,  [102]. 
(1)  “  vineyard,”  Zh7. 

DID  (  2)  w.  suffix  in  2\22  nE>“0  13'pJ  22  “  his 

honour,  or  his  vine-dresser,”  Sin.  99. 

^*PD  n-  pr.  348. 

XDDD  “  throne,”  cstr.  st.  Zb7.  With  “1  as  in  Aram,  against 
Ass.  and  Hb.  cf.  Lindberg,  Gram.  d.  Sem.  Sprach.  i.  87. 

in  65”  X  '¥“13  14 12  prob.  =  pp  (e.g.  Dn.  iii.  8,  vi.  25) 
“  calumnies  against  a  man.”  In  Mand.  also  ra¬ 
ms  v.  w.  px  “to  make  a  covenant,”  Zh11  ;  cf.  Hb.  rVH2  n“D. 
ND'D'D  adj.  “mighty,”  Pf322. 

v-  “1°  6e  fit,”  Pf3°  (or  perh.  adj.  “fit”). 

DHD  v-  “to  write,”  Pf35’22,  1  S.  perf.  rDHD  P712.  Impf.  3nD' 
N  126,  pnrD'  N  144;  pass.  Pf8  (2£P)  for  3PlpVl);  ptcp. 
pass.  3TD  N  28;  Pf4,  F218.  Inf.  3n3E>  2104  (cf.  Inf. 
*i3pD  ib.5) ;  reflex,  ptcp.  ZiniDno  146,  1‘;  Pf5.  w.  2  “to 
write... over,”  N  94,  144. 
fr^HD  (1)  “scribe,”  Sin.  354. 

XDHD*  (2)  “writing,”  in  cstr.  2TO  N  23,  127  ("Qpft^  2713),  w. 
suff.  mro  ib.  28,  v.  ppn. 

V'fiD  n.  pr.  Sin.  395,  cf.  vrD^X. 

jvr\D  n>  pr-  311  b1. 

wr\i*  v.  “  to  smite,  beat,”  '2  rwrD^B.-.'jnfcO  7165713^2  Zh31 
“  and  if  he  dashes  it  in  pieces  with  stones.” 

S 

b  coalesces  in  b  prefixed  to  pr.  names  in  Wt2&b, 

'Wtowb  and  'nywmvb  (?),  cf.  We.  Held.2  7,  and  REJ  x.  1  f. 
b  prefixed  to  verbs  (in  the  Impf.)  nnrp1?  ( s .  pm),  ymb 
(s.  ym)  and  ]2vb  H  Pfi4.  b  for  3  v.  NJYlYin^D.  b  of 
Ar.  art.  Ji  is  not  assimilated  before  the  “sun”  conso¬ 
nants,  cf.  and  in  Gr.  inscr.  aXaopeos  (cf.  Eut.  Sin. 

328,  cr opco?  W  2512  =  ^n  Dor.  56).  b  abbrev. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


67 


<7 


xb 

xb 

oxb 

'iO1? 

rua1?* 

D321? 

vzb* 

XJV1^ 

pb 

b 

b 

nbiV* 

>b 

xbb 

D'plS 


of  x1?  (acc.  to  Hal.)  in  ntnxS  Nerab  24,  ib.  26  (“they 
did  not  place”)  mnx1?  ib.  28  “[that]  I  might  not  be 
angry.”  DJi"ir6  28  (“thou  shalt  not  remove”;  v.  s.  D13). 

prep,  “to,”  w.  suff.  ^  Zh4’11;  Pf322.  “]S  Nerab  l14,  145b5, 

1^  Zp11  (v.  b),  rb  Zp18,  h23;  138  b5,  145  d1,  311  a2;  N  l3; 
P32;  nb  fern.  162,  2112,  ]b  348,  138  b6,  Dn1?  Zb19,  N  82, 
fern.  1ST  157,  pn^  P  l4,  45.  Used  in  a  distributive  sense 

v.  and  to  express  acc.  P  132  X*?n  '32^>  “p2*  ^2. 

(1)  interj.,  v.s.  X^>2. 

(2)  neg.  “not,”  2262,  N  93,  Zh13.  pDp  nx&y  X^  137  b4, 
EJ^X- ••  X^  “no  one,”  P  712  (abbrev.  to  *?,  v.  supra). 

“  year,”  “  archonship  ”  (=  Ass.  limmu),  386,  cb  396. 
“heart,”  w.  suff.  H2^  145a6. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  421  (?),  cf.  Ph.  X2^  and  A.e/?/?<uos  (=  '3^)  in 
Mk.  iii.  18,  (v.  Hal.  142,  n.  1). 

'TS 

“  brick,”  pi.  p2*?  69 ;  cf.  Syr.  "|AJL£2^,  pi.  }l  12^. 

“  \L 

w.  m2,  45.  “  Daughter  of  Libnam  (?),  or  a  vessel  for 

holding  frankincense”;  cf.  Syr.  l£m. 

“  garment,”  w.  suff.  •>—  Nerab  27. 

“a  legion”  (=  legio),  P  225,  XJI'jfal  “belonging  to  the 
legion”  <  b  m  “  chief  of  the  legion”;  w.  omission  of  1  in 
X'J'A  “legions,”  P  154. 

“but,  except,”  N2‘,  11s,  144;  210s;  cf.  Dn.  ii.  11 
etc.  and  Dal.  184,  n.  3  ;  “because,”  113a’8’10;  cf.  Dn.  ii. 
6,  9  etc. 

(1)  “not,”  =xb,  perh.  in  Zp11. 

(2)  “if,”  so  DHM  in  Zp11,  h31  (?). 

“  curse,”  pi.  jttlb  (i.e.  P)1?)  P  952  and  (acc.  to  Vog.)  P  166, 
but  see  pn^pDX. 

n.  pr.  Levi,  P  652,  Gr.  eq.  \tjovl. 
part,  “unless,”  145c4. 
n.  pr.  Lucius,  2931. 

n.  pr.  f.  Lycilla,  P  Cl. -Gan.  303,  Gr.  eq.  XovKvWr 79. 

5—2 


68 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


mb 

•nn1?* 

wnS 

an1? 

'an1? 

nn1? 

mb 

xb'b 

rwh 

N31? 

nb 

na1? 

'na1? 

NiaS 

Vtth 

'yb* 

& 

roy1?* 

nis1? 

np1? 

mp1? 

m&b 


'm&b 


“  when  ”  (?),  Pmi87. 

“alone,”  w.  suff.  TITin^  N146. 

1964,  Luhith,  cf.  Is.  xv.  5,  Jer.  xlviii.  5,  nr.  Medeba 
(whence  came  this  inscription).  Others  rd.  inTQ.  The 
line  runs  in'rfel  H  xn'TD  in 
“bread,”  145 A*1)’8;  [tto]rb  P147. 

n.  pr.  h  “Q  on  a  seal,  Pm 75. 

v.  5.  nift. 

v.  “to  whisper,”  145  c  7  (?). 

“night,”  Zh24.  In  146  A28  dub.  In  MI  nW?. 

Zb16,  h  +  tjb  w.  suff.  ?  v.  Sach.,  Wi.,  ad  loc. 

“hither,”  v.  s.  fcoWlK. 
v.  nvb- 

n.  pr.  305  dub. 
n.  pr.  2942  dub. 

title  to  Pf,  =  Gr.  Xi/xrjv  “harbour.”  Perh.  connected  w. 
IP  “  a  vessel.” 

“  in  order  that,”  Nerab  2 7  ? 

v.  “  to  cover  ”  (?)  Zh32  "p'y  .  But  Hal.  cfs.  ]})h  in 
Job  vi.  3. 

v.  “to  curse,”  Perf.  (in  prec.  sense)  21 16,  N44;  w.  suff. 
ib.  25.  Impf.  N  33,  98. 

“  a  curse,”  cstr.  n»$>  N  20“ ;  21 18. 

“according  to,”  Nab.  Sach.  ;  cf.  7n  \ 

v.  “to  take,”  Zpi7.  Impf.  np'  Zh10,  inp'  ib.  12.  Impt. 
fern.  sing.  Tip  1413.  Not  found  elsewhere  in  Aram. 

n.  pr.  19,  Ass.  eq.  luqu. 

n.  pr.  (“belonging  or  consecrated  to  the  sun,”  v.  s.  ^) 
P 83,  193,  33®’ 4,  754,  1165,  123®  (Ox.  I)3;  M125,  174,  Pza2; 
cf.  Xnra/xcros  W  2458.  Acc.  to  Hal.  (IH  92)  is 

from  {5^DB56n.  Gr.  eq.  frequently  yXioSupos. 

n.  pr.  PYog.  Syr.  p.  64,  n.  2  ;  cf.  YOJ  vi  315, 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


69 


i  vh 


Zhs 


n.  pr.  Pzmg  xvi.  p.  99  f.  (?). 

“  tongue,”  “  mauvaise  langue 


(dub.). 


ft 

ft  interchanges  w.  3  (q.  v.). 

0  (i)  an  abbrev.  in  n^pn  •  -  *D  53  ? 

ft  (2)  an  abbrev.  for  HD  ( v .  ND)  in  TDD  Zh3  =  PIT  HD  ,  cf. 

Ar.  bU-i-i  ;  TD  Zh4>22  =  PIT— HD  (or  'T—'D) ;  and  n&^D  Zh29 

=  '^-np. 

X^T-ft  n.  pr.  P68. 

\ft  in  *^D  '-D,  2C  for  "j^D  DD  “minas  of  the  king,”  or  “|^D  'T  D 
(D  abbrev.  for  pD);  v.  H3D. 

*]  np-fi  236M 

Kft  “which,”  HKD  “  that  which,”  Pfi14  ;  cf.  H  HD  Dn.  ii.  28 
and  v.  HD.  HD  in  Zh12,  HD  “that  which  I  ask.” 

Abbrev,  to  D  (q.  v.). 

HXft  “a  hundred,”  2009,  N  89,  128,  Sin.  457.  Dual  pnXD 
N  307. 

V.  s.  'DDD. 

“vessel,”  pi.  pKD  146  A24,  |nd  in  119  dub.,  v.  |D  (1). 
[xn’]nN[a]  “the  coming,  voyage,”  P  163;  cf.  lLZfco  Matt. 

x  ^ 

xxiv.  37.  In  P  152  NJYTJVD  cf.  Pal.-Syr.  "(AjOAjAd 
ib.  v.  Schwally  8. 

“weeping,”  Zp18,  man  HDD  rb  Dpm,  alt.  (n)H^D  (Hal, 
comparing  Lev.  xxvi.  1). 

n.  pr.  Sin.  83,  183,  300  (for  TKO"id),  312,  470;  cf.  Ar. 

t  and  fern.  “piebald,”  v.  T&nn&6K. 

in  P  J.  As.Vog.  25,  some  such  meaning  as  “repairing” 
needed  by  context, 
n.  pr.  Pm 92. 

in  P  33  (Gr.  eq.  arayyeiAa/xeror),  174  (^iXoTei/xr/Ta/xci/or) 

“honoured”;  cf.  Ar.  and  Hb.  130. 

'  ♦  «  • 


oift 

rcnna 


70 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


matt 

rrna 

U23 

pa 

roja 

ma 

Ha 

xna 

xro'na 

nana 

«mna 

ajna 


na 

K*iia 


ma 

nama 


n.  pr.  Sin.  24,  33  (for  VIPID  ?),  104,  112,  193,  208  al.\ 

O  -•  0  X  J  0  J 

cf.  Ar.  or  perh.  from  e.g. 

“  liberal.” 

n.  pr.  fam.  P  123®  (Ox.  I)6,  cf.  Edomite  Sab. 

^tud.  Ait.  mao. 

147  a i2,  acc.  to  CIS  130)0  “scilicet,”  Ledr.  rds.  NriDUO 
“  conclusio  ”  ? 

“total,”  in  “lEOD  'D"6  1998,  but  see  "IDJ. 

“  free,”  P  74 ;  cf.  Syr. 

n.  pr.  1751,  cf.  Ph.  po. 
v.  s.  anno. 

(1)  “that  which,”  Pf4,  F210,  F315,  v.  ND;  (2)  “whenever,” 
Pf312;  cf.  )  ;  (3)  in  Pf9  “when,”  or  perh.  “after,” 

t>  0  J 

—  5  . 

“a  measure,”  /xoSios,  Pf219  (alt.  N'lDN  v.  "IDN),  F334,  NHD 
F221’  46. 

“city”  (in  B.  Ar.  =  “province”),  147,  214;  P  1241 ;  sriHO 
P282,  F27’ 8 ;  w.  suff.  nmo  P  157,  pnriHO  PI3;  pi. 
emph.  xnano  Pf317. 

id 

“a  registrar”  (cf.  j.£sj*c)  or  “reciter,  story-teller”  (cf. 
VOJ  v.  4),  Sin.  99,  522. 

“East,”  N  155,  ib.  6  fcO'D'  niD  (for  rmo)  “South-east.” 

“anything,”  Pf240  ;  NOyiD  [Djy'IO*?  F8’ 9  “for  each 
article.”  DJHJO  1412,  Nab.  Pet.5  is  an  older  form; 
cf.  Mand.  DfcOa'O,  v.  ZMG  xxxiv.  568,  766,  Wr.  SG 
126,  No.  Mand.  §  150. 

V.  NO. 

ptcp.  from  PIT  “  to  return  thanks,”  commonly  occurring 
in  Pal.  votive  inscriptions  P  792,  802,  823,  Mi43.  The 
fuller  form  is  NYlDI  “Dy  rendered  in  a  bil.  by  cv^aptcrcos 
a vcOrjKev  (P  101,  cf.  W  2575)  “to  gratefully  offer” 
(consacre  avec  reconnaissance,  Vog.),  fern.  fcOTID  P  83®> 2, 
982  ;  pi.  m.  plD  931. 

ptcp.  “knowing,”  Sin.  537. 

“giving,  gift,”  N  126,  225;  emph.  NrOfllO  N  74. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


71 


KPI1D 

10122 

K*l£t2lD 

Npl22 

X“ll25 

nia* 

niD* 


ronia 


T22 

•73T23 

2CDTD 


nsonta 

NJVJT22 


vino 

■vn& 

n'ono 

nono* 

onno 

xnonno 

vtoo 


in  npPB  'ID  Pf326  “I  clearly  (=  lit.  “declaring”) 

explained  ”  ? 

in  SDDD  'D  PF27,  Gr.  eq.  to  lkolvov  reXos,  mng.  dub. 
“  obliged  to  pay  tribute  ”  1 
n.  pr.  346. 

“rising  (of  the  sun),”  Zpl3>  14,  from  tfp'  =  Hb.  «¥•>, 
v.  s.  p. 

“myrrh,”  147  a14,  v. 

(1)  v.  “to  die,”  Perf.  DD  Zp16,  Nerab  l2. 

(2)  “death,”  N  146  nils  q^n,  lit.  “a  change  leading  to 
death,”  i.e.  a  casualty.  ?  irh  HID  Nerab  l10  “a  ...  death,” 

v.  ro3. 

N  34  'D)  “  Dusara  and  his  throne,”  cf.  KHim  Pos¬ 

sibly  a  proper  name,  cf.  Barth,  Hebraica,  July  ’97,  p.  276. 
According  to  Wi.  AF  2nd  ser.  p.  62  (’98)  =  “  wife.” 
Alt.  nnmft,  which  DHM  ( Oest .  Monat.  d.  Orient.  1884, 

•  j  Jut  t  ^ 

p.  279)  explains  as  “his  superiors,  or  his 

priests”  (?),  cf.  also  Hal.  REJ  xvii.  14. 
v.  s.  jd. 

n.  pr.  Pm  36. 

n.  pr.  m.  P  1051  [PSach.  1],  fem.  in  P  Schr.  [1],  14  and 
in  Pvoj.  A32,  where  it  is  written  fcOfTD;  cf.  /xe£a/3/?aras 
W  2584,  and  v.  ZMG  xxxv.  732. 
n.  pr.  2381,  cf.  perh.  infra. 

n.  pr.  N  1 8 ‘,  one  of  the  Mazin  or  Muzaineh ;  cf.  the 

^  Cj  UJ  *  J 

tribal  name  and  4*jj»oJt. 

Sin.  33,  perh.  for  VliEi. 

1223,  the  month  known  in  Coptic  as  Me9c.jp,  Jan.  26 — 
Feb.  25,  Ar.  I. 

n.  pr.  2262,  cf.  a.^a^.0  Ibn  Dor.  245,  15. 

* 

“camp,”  cstr.  nantD  Zp16’  17 .  niVJniD  acc.  to  Hal.,  ib. 

p13 

n.  pr.  loc.  113a>  ls,  D"iniD  'T  D^,  cf.  perh.  near 

Taima  (Yakut,  iv.  425). 

“a  sacred  place,”  1581’6,  pi.  ib.  1.  5. 
n.  pr.  N  161  (perh.  from  “  to  draw  near”), 
“because  of,”  w.  n*D  P  156,  f6  “because  of  this,”  v.  ]YD. 
v.  b'ten. 


72 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


[Xm]DD 

X'D 


xn'D 

xn'tt 

XSJV(&) 

xn’wa 

mb 

b'bpb]* 

XDDb 


XD3b 

DIDDDb 

1*Db 

area 

^roa 

xba 

xba 

nba 

i&nba 

xnba 

niba 

xnba 


“guard,  garrison,”  in  ...DD1  XI  XTO'H  163b  1 
pi.  “water,”  1502,  Pfi  title,  F213;  fD  1413,  cstr.  'D  1  292. 
'JD^yi  Zh1,  perh.  “lord  of  water,”  but  v.  D^>y. 
n.  pr.  P  36a>  3,  cf.  Hb.  Kjn?, 

n.  pr.  112  (from  ])%'  “to  shine”?),  cf.  Hb.  Sab. 
'pxys1’  and  Moabite  n.  pr.  loc.  nya'ID  Jer.  xlviii.  21 
(alt.  ya>&). 

n.  pr.  f.  P  33a> 3,  v.  ZMG  xxv.  534,  n.  8,  YOJ  iv.  333. 
n.  pr.  frag.  Sin.  643. 

(1)  “dead,”  P  150,  and  X3'D3  IT’D  “a  natural  death,” 
Mi66  (both  dub.). 

(2)  n.  pr.  fam.  P  30a> 5,  324,  raa  iii.  28,  no.  2  (v.  ZMG 
xxv.  550,  n.  4). 

“seat,”  1141,  cstr.  nri'D  117;  cf.  Pal.-Syr.  ]A-»..CioA-»Ao 
and  v.  mmD. 
v.s.  xnTlXD. 

n.  pr.  P  Eut.  3,  42.  v.  I'DD. 
n.  pr.  31 61. 

“decoration,”  P  935  dub.,  v.  Won. 
only  in  Pf.  (1)  “tribute”  (i.e.  NppD),  reXos  Pf6,  w. 
suff.  HD3D  F9,  pi.  X'DDD  F36;  pa'n  X5?  DDD  “not  subject 
to  tribute,”  Pf39)  16. 

(2)  “tax-collector”  (i.e.  Np51?),  Sr)fxo(TL(jjvr]<s,  /JucrOaiTys, 
Pf6,  F29’30 ;  pi.  X'DDD  f7. 

n.  pr.  Maximus,  P  Cl.-Gan.  300 ;  D1DD3XD  Pf226. 

Zp10,  abs.  of  xnn^D  “price,”  or  =  “his  sellers”  (l^ft). 
n.  pr.  (“writer”  ?)  2174. 
n.  pr.  P  973. 

(1)  v.  “to  fill,  be  full,”  Zp4  ;  Impf.  xi?D,»  145  a1. 

(2)  n.  pr.  2154,  P  72,  61b>2,  755  (v.  H¥),  1142,  PSach.  1 ; 

cf.  Wr.  Syr.  Mart.  p.  ]_*,  Dal.  144,  n.  1,  and 

v.  xta'. 

n.  pr.  PM4b. 

x  J 

n.  pr.  Sin.  453,  cf.  Ar.  ^y^Lo. 

* 

n.  pr.  PSchr.  12. 
n.  pr.  1871,  2361. 

“salt,”  Pf331>35.  rte  Pf222. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


73 


nrte 


in'Sa 

N'n'So 

ro’Sft 

i* 


*pZ* 

.  ± 
btebis 


kd'dSo 

’aSa 

poba 


P  133,  acc.  to  Derenb.  {Notes  Epigraph.  1874,  p.  99  f.)  = 

0  *  J  * 

Ay.  wsaJU  “be  pleasant”  (3  f.  S.  pf.),  prob.  n.  pr., 
cf.  fragm.  nn[i>ft]  P  50 ;  cf.  Ar.  n.  pr.  and  v. 

ZMG  xxiv.  106,  n.  2;  Hal.  Mel.  Epig.  104  f. 

“sheep-skin,  cloth,”  in  Nttta  &n[Q"i&]  Pfi10  “wool  dyed 
w.  purple,”  Gr.  eq.  7rop<f)vpa<s  prjXojTrjs. 
n.  pr.  PCI. -Gan.  125,  no.  7. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  446. 

pi.  Pfi33,  “salted  provisions.” 

n.  pr.  m.  163  A1,  1642,  f.  N  276  ;  Gr.  paX(e)LXa6o<s. 

(1)  “l^ing.”  Freq.  in  constr.  st.  N  l4  al.  Emph.  “|^72  in 

qfe  PIJD  lc,  v.  HJ72;  but  gen.  fcofe  N  810  al.  K2^72  “12  382, 
391-2  “prince  of  the  royal  seed,”  cf.  Hb.  ^72n"J2  and 
Ass.  abil  sarri.  PI.  pte  Zb9,  cstr.  *2^12  Zp12,  emph. 
K'2^12  Zb14,  n'2^?D  138  b7,  a  shorter  form  in  N2^72  “|!?72 
P  281  “  king  of  kings,”  a  common  title  upon  coins  of  the 
kings  of  the  Persians,  etc.;  cf.  Dn.  ii.  37, 

and  [KobjD  'T  fcote  1223;  v.  Kn2^72. 

(2)  v.  “to  reign,”  'qbo'*  Zh25.  Caus.  “(he)  made 

him  king,”  Zp7. 

(3)  n.  pr.  1923. 

n.  pr.  P  Sach.  7. 

n.  pr.  P  Eut.  27,  acc.  to  Ledr.  Diet,  a  bad  reading  for 
below : — 

n.  pr.  P  (34),  93ti,  140,  153;  M241,  87,  88  ;  raa  ii.  95,  no.  7. 
Gr.  eq.  p.aXaX/3rjXos,  cf.  Lat.  malagbelus,  CIL  8.  2497. 
Lat.  eq.  ( v .  ZMG  xviii.  101)  sol  sanctissimus,  cf.  Yog. 
Syr.  62  f. 

n.  pr.  1 7 03,  1743,  1823,  231,  235  a2,  345;  N  214,  233,  246, 

255,  265;  P  92,  61“,  864  (cf.  Yog.  Syr.  154),  123“  (Ox.  I)4; 

*  * 

Pm«3.  Gr.  eq.  yaXXo<5,  /xaXi^os;  cf.  Ar.  ^U-o,  ^JU,  and 

in  Syr.  n  (e.g.  Journ.  Sacr.  Lit.  4th  ser.  vol.  7, 

p.  429,  p.  of  Syr.  text). 

n.  pr.  P  Eut.  45.  From  Lat.  Malchus  (=  12^72)  w. 
addition  of  emph.  K. 

n.  pr.  P  Wr.  p.  4,  cf.  «.  -i.r:.\V7  Wr.  Syr.  Mart.  p. 
n.  pr.  N  51,  [22]1 ;  cf.  /*aXx«ov  W  1910,  2557“. 


74 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


fba 

ripN&So 

nrb&* 


P 

P 


Saiseoa 


Djnaa 

ruD 

rua* 


n.  pr.  94,  cf.  D3^D  in  Heb.  and  Sab.  (ib.  also  DD'^D). 
“queen,”  156a,  ib.  b  nn ota.  Cstr.  n 3^73,  v.  r6'pGP. 
v.  “to  speak”  (cf.  B.  Ar.  ^PO),  149  b-c2  ;  v.  Krte. 

vo  y 

n.  pr.  (dub.)  Ill1,  cf.  “a  speaker.”  Alt.  3^10. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  612. 

“a  word,”  pi.  K'ta  (K*^P,  Dn.  vii.  11)  145  b3,  |^D  Nerab 
24  (v.  nnD) ;  w.  suff.  1  S.  149  i2,  3  S.  'Hite  137  a6, 

cf.  lA^LO. 

VI. 

(1)  “  a  vessel,”  Pfi47  33'3  fc6pP  '3  p  p  (dub.),  v.  N3B7, 

(2)  pron.  usually  w.  >1  “he  who,”  2113,  N  22,  fi45,  F230, 
F313.  Alone  w.  verb  33V  p  N  4y,  27 10,  p?'  p  N  34 
(omission  of  H  perh.  due  to  Ar.  influence),  j w.  verb 
N  202,  253.  DK  p  “whoever  thou  (art),”  Nerab  l5,  28. 

(3)  prep.  w.  suff.  nJD  Zh24,  1962,  N36;  D33D  209°, 
pn:D  Pfi34.  =  “from  (of  a  place),”  238,  320  b1,  Pf4. 
“on  (of  position)”  "p'D'  p,  “j^DD  p  “on  thy  right  side,” 
etc.,  Pza7.  “of,  because  of,”  P  184.  “  belonging  to,” 
...'3310  '3...  “N.  of  the  sons  of...,”  P  J.As.Vog.  I3. 
“of  (part  of),”  Pza2-3  NrnyD  p  .  ..33I1X.  To  express  the 
comparative  . ..p  3333  “he  made  more  numerous  than,” 
Zp4;  p  with  3  (of  time  “after  that”),  P  Eut.  412; 
p  with  3  “because  of,”  Pmi34.  For  the  idiomatic  use  of 
p  in  the  Nab.  inscr.  e.g.  p33  p  333  )zbnh  3^'ri'  '3  HD 
N  122  (cf.  N  96,  125,  al.) ;  v.  No.  in  Eut.  Nab.  p.  78  f. ; 
ilD'D  p  “at  his  own  expense,”  P  74  =  3^'3  p  1583; 
NDIDJ  p  “according  to  the  law,”  Pf3  ( v .  K3'JJ) ;  "03  p 
“  less  than  a  dinar,”  Pf37  ;  D3p  p  320  f,  N  382  (v.  Dip) ; 
and  33  p  (usually  3'y)  2195. 

n.  pr.  (mannukl-arbailu  =  “  who  is  like  Arbel  ”)  20,  cf. 
in  Ass.  mannu-ki-ilu-rabu,  mannuki-ramman  (v.  ZMG 
xxvi.  147),  in  Heb.  ^$3p,  -inpp,  N3p  (?)  and  v. 
Dal.  143. 

see  DJHD. 

(1)  n.  pr.  254  1 

(2)  “a  portion,”  v.  rDD. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


75 


njroo 

inu& 


nroo 

P» 

*P» 

po 

VjND 

nyjD 

..•V3& 
•  • 

*U» 

ra& 

kudo 


mjDO 

3’D& 


Xty'D(O) 


(3)  “a  mina,”  6b,  193  a4;  cstr.  H3D  perh.  in  139  a4  and 
PUD  6®,  8 ;  pi.  1®,  2a,  3a,  |DD  lc,  4“ ;  pi.  cstr.  v. 
'•  D.  For  'D  (Hb.  |3K  2  Sam.  xiv.  26)  cf.  Ass. 
mana  sa  sarra. 

n.  pr.  f.  N  124,  cf.  2lsu.^o. 

* 

n.  pr.  f.  N  25,  34,  98,  208,  2712,  IPOD  320  f.  Manawat 

(Olj^o)  the  Ar.  goddess,  cf.  ZMG  xli.  709,  No,  Gesch. 
Qor.  256,  We.  Heid.  22  ff.,  Baeth.  Beit.  115.  For  the 
name,  which  means  “  fate,”  cf.  Gad  ( tv^ /)>  and  Ar.  sa‘d, 
‘Audh. 

“perfect”  (=  Eg.  monh,  “perfect,  pious”),  '“ID1S  'T  'D 
142;  fern.  Kmon  (KCW*)  1411. 

n.  pr.  “comforter,”  33  [145c5];  cf.  ib.  in  Hb.  and  Ph. 
“number,  numbering,”  161,  33. 

103  ? 
n.  pr.  95. 
n.  pr.  43  a1. 

v.  “  to  withhold,”  Zh24  (i.e.  yjD'^  Imperf.  w.  S)  yjftS 

roo. 

161,  22,  ».  KDyto. 

n.  pr.  N  62,  191;  cf.  aili,  aili,  /*om<9os  W  2429,  Safa 
y^D  J.  As.  1881,  481,  and  perh.  Heb.  yjB',  y:Dn. 
n.  pr.  loc.  1  145  b7. 

“candle-stick”  1  1831  p¥p  “OB. 

P  672,  iriJDJn  JUB  |D  n^n  D3,  “from  the  portion  of 
Hantighar  ”  ? 

“place  of  worship,”  161,  l1;  1761  (w.  n't)  ;  188,  218 

(w.  n:i),  1851-2,  190;  once  KWB  Nab.  Sach. ;  cf. 
0  , 

,  “mosque”  and  v.  ZMG  xxxviii.  535. 

pi.  “castles,”  Zp4>8;  cf.  Hb.  JYT|pB. 

in  3D  'B  P  68,  69  “aged  one”  (?),  Mordt.  cfs.  www 
“return”;  acc.  to  Hal.  Mel.  Ejrig.  105  “good  luck” 

(3'DB  =  w'S-a*  =  mod.  Heb.  [21D]  ;  alt.  (3D3)  '3D 

* 

n.  pr.  (Eut.). 

n.  pr.  P  122,  =  An  “  helper”  (ZMG  xxiv.  105). 


76 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


nyn 

piya 

wya 

xj^ya 

wya 

’nSwya 

uya 


nwa 

aya 

'nSjya 

pya 

aiya 

ipnya 

xmya 

wpsa 

^sa 

pa 

axa 

xaxa 

uva 

nyxa 


n.  pr.  292,  cf.  ^>*<0  or  ^iuo. 

✓  x 

✓  0  *  *  b  + 

n.  pr.  fam.  P  Eut.  1,  cf.  or 

/  / 

n,  pr.  (163  a1),  1642,  Sin.  134  ;  cf.  j*si*o,  /xoaupos  W  1980, 

✓ 

/xoeapov  W  2052. 

“import,”  Pfi7,  F2u,  ah;  \bvo  F216,  v.  F242  ?  and  cf.  SOpDD. 

n.  pr.  N  562,  cf.  |j_Lk3  Ass.  BO  i.  226  f.,  and  Wr.  Cat. 
Syr.  MSS.  1,  185b,  and  perh.  KJD  Talm.  Shek.  50d. 

n.  pr.  (“the  'D  who  is  called  Allah,”  We.  Held .2  5),  118, 
N  562  (=  294,  where  edd.  rd.  '“idS  fcoyo),  cf.  'pfeyD. 

n.  pr.  249,  252,  317;  Sin.  16,  100,  200  +  6  t.  Ar. 
and  Q.J.^Lo  Hoff.  Jul.  12416,  al.  (a  name  borne  also  by 

O  s  J 

several  kings  of  Edessa) ;  cf.  perh.  Ar.  and 

Hoff.  Ausz.  p.  28,  n.  221,  and  u'yiD  (ZMG  iii.  438, 
xiv.  437).  *Gr.  ya vo<s,  /xocro?,  v.  J.  As.  1881,  t.  xix.  7  f. 

n.  pr.  2246  (alt.  N  276  jyDB>). 

n.  pr.  (=  'lyp  “answering”?)  P  274,  371  (M6s).  Gr.  eq. 
yaw cuos,  yevauos ;  cf.  yaeva  Schr.  SB,  Berlin.  1884, 
p.  438. 

n.  pr.  (with  elision  of  K)  Sin.  642,  v.  \“6&oyD. 

n.  pr.  114,  cf.  toy£,  'jyiD  above;  Sab.  DjyD,  and  Gr. 
yonyos  ( v .  Baeth.  Beit.  76). 

“  the  west,”  Zp13>  14. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  390,  cf.  Ar.  sj I . 

“  cave,”  P  351,  Pza3. 

“export,”  Pfi9’19,  f217’45;  f^yDi  |pD£>  F216,  abs.  cf. 

K^y». 

174  a  24.  Ledr.  combines  with  &oio  in  parallel  col.  = 
“myrrh  of  Memphis,”  for  which  rather  qb,  Pp. 

v.  “to  drink,”  J'O'JD  yD  H  “  which.  ..drank  from  the 

well,”  Mordt.  on  P99;  cf.  ^D,  JLc,  v.  infra. 

P  994,  fcO'y  2^12  H  “  set  up  near  the  well  ”  ( v .  2W). 

“statue,”  Pvoj.  b  1. 

n.  pr.  fam.  Pm53,  alt.  1JHJD. 

“middle,”  Zh28,  p10  (?) ;  cstr.  nySID  Zb9. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


77 


pva 

wnapa 


’pa 

Vxa'pa 

la’pa 

wpa 

’nbapa 

npa 

xia 


inxna 

Sxaia 

-paia 

yna 

iona 


n.  pr.  loc.  “Egypt,”  146  c  l2,  c  23.  'ft  mbx  145  a8,  d2  (cf. 
Min.  "Mft  nW?X  J.  As.  1893,  t.  xxii.  p.  520).  'ft  “ion 
“wine  of  E.”  146  c  24. 
v.  Sap. 

“place  of  burial,  grave,  sepulchre,”  w.  ]"Q  (=  nn  “house”) 
P  641,  cstr.  mnp»  1961 ;  pi.  p*QpO  TQ  Nab.  Pet.  (cf. 

«?  •  *  ^  O'  * 

Barth,  ad  loc.  p.  273).  Syr.  |  /  onl  Ar.  Zj*^JL.a. 

* 

n.  pr.  ra.  P  1165  (cf.  Vog.  Syr.  p.  64  n.) ;  but  f.  in 
P  Mull.  4;  Gr.  eq.  /xa/o«uos  (cf.  Dal.  142,  n.  1,  ZMG 
xv.  621). 

n.  pr.  (“El  raises”)  N  l2,  cf.  Ph.  StfOpO,  and  v.  'rbftpft. 
n.  pr.  233,  N  l2,  171;  PI2,  42,  311,  mi2,  32.  Gr.  eq. 

yUOK^Jl/XO?. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  53  (so  for  ippo),  perh.  rd.  13'p. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  608. 

n.  pr.  dub.  279. 

“lord,”  cstr.  (cf.  NTO  Dn.  ii.  47)  Zb3,  235  a2;  Xftby  N1D 
P731,  ZMG  xv.  616;  w.  suff.  noS  (“to  my  lord”  or 
perh.  “to  the  lord,”  cf.  <05"I$  and  Fr.  monsieur)  1112-3, 
'Xlft  Zp19,  b5;  1441 ;  3  S.  nK“)0  Zp11,  etc.,  145  a7;  \nn» 
P  1036;  1  pi.  1857"8  (3234),  337,  N  48,  ll6;  p» 

P  232,  253;  3  pi.  pmo  P  284.  For  retention  of  K  cf. 
Kau.  §  58,  b  1.  For  ")D  as  pr.  n.  cf.  Ph.  VTno,  etc.;  Syr. 
also  frG“lO  “the  god  of  Gaza”  (cf.  yapva  W  2412  g); 

Ass.  BO  i.  393,  *  ZMG  xxix. 

110;  0ew  fieehyapL  (inscr.  fr.  Tyre)  Rev.  Archeol.  April, 
1875,  p.  267.  Cf.  also  no  Eut.  SB,  June  11, 

1885,  p.  684;  v.  Hoff.  ZA  xi.  234,  and  infra. 

n.  pr.  79  (Vog.  Intailles  Aram.  15  nn&niD,  cf.  also  Levy, 
Siegel  u.  Gemmen ,  pi.  i.  9). 

n.  pr.  (“  Rabel  is  lord”  ?)  306  a,  v.  Stfin. 
n.  pr.  (“  the  lord  blesses  ”)  85. 

n.  pr.  68,  Ass.  eq.  Marduk-rimanni  (“M.  pities  me”); 
cf .  Hb.  TIT?  . 

n.  pr.  P  963,  Sach.  1  ;  cf.  use  of  |nx,  in  Ph.  as  pr.  n., 
v.  &onx ,  X"lO  above. 


78 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


x'-ib 

jv-ib 


Drib 

IDOnb 

ib'wib 

IbDIb 

pb 

Dp-ib 

mb 

mb 

'nib 


DD’b 

pt?b 

K'UD'b 

lb’b 

nib'b 

rrb 

nva 

-pb 

iob^b 

IDD'b 

psrb* 

NbWb 


n.  pr.  Marius,  P  224,  151  ;  M43. 

n.  pr.  P  123a  (Ox.  2)2  erroneously  p'^ift;  P  Eut.  23, 

Schr.  32,  VOJ  a  6a  [=  |_»;.Sd  w.  addition  of  Gr.  cor, 
cf.  J Vote,  a £i£cor  W  1910  ( v .  IT'TV),  Derenb.  Hist.  Pal. 
253]. 

n.  pr.  Marinus,  Pf215. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  300,  rd.  l&y*QQ  ? 

n.  pr.  61,  Ass.  eq.  mar-esaggil-lu[mur]  (second  D  perh.  X  ?). 
n.  pr.  on  an  Aram,  seal,  v.  Eut.  ZMG  xxxvii.  543. 

?•“  illness,”  1501  (nip  jn^zi  mnn-i),  ib.  1.  3  ('p  o  nrana) ; 
rd.  perh.  y-ift  “  knowledge”  ? 

n.  pr.  P  52,  Gr.  /xapKo s  (Cl. -Gan.,  J.  As.  1888,  t.  xi.  p.  303, 
DIpID). 

(1)  “  mistress,”  cstr.  Pvoj.  A  33  (perh.  “wife”);  w.  suff. 

pn-,  P  294. 

(2)  n.  pr.  278,  N  181,  Sin.  210;  cf.  Sab.  nN“iD  1 

n.  pr.  1582  (cf.  “to  admonish,”  Edd.),  P  13‘  (Gr. 

x 

eq.  fxapOtiv),  voj.  A  6a ;  Cl. -Gan.  128,  no.  10;  cf. 
Map#a  ? 

“  seat,”  Zh8>  20,  w.  suff.  *>—  Zh15j  25 ;  n—  Zh20  (*?  v.  s.  n). 

Pm 54,  “gold-worker”  ?  (cf.  Hb. 
v.  fcHJDD. 

n.  pr.  280,  cf.  Macro-os  J.  As.  1881,  t.  xix.  487  ? 

Zp21  ?  “ID&O  “  [il]  en  fixa  les  contributions 

[=  JVlKb'D]  ”  (Hal.). 

(1)  “oil,”  44  (v.  op),  Pfi27;  P  163,  [147],  fi12. 

(2)  v.  “to  anoint,”  145  c1,  dub. 

“skin,”  Pf217  ;  “per  skin,”  Pf28  (on  deriv.  cf. 

ZA  hi.  54). 

“couch,  bed,”  234. 

n.  pr.  1903,  P  1244,  Sin.  280.  Gr.  p.oar^o s,  /xacre^os  freq., 
cf.  Ar.  ^XwU. 

v.  “to  pledge,”  impf.  -•»  N  45,  pi.  p— *  N143;  cf.  Syr. 

and  v.s.  |m. 

n.  pr.  2261,  cf.  Ar.  Ibn  Dor.  27015. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


79 


’pSPtt 

(tfl't'U 

ma 

na 

na 

no 


ana 

Sinna 


Witt 

nSpna 

KMpntt 

newina 

ininntt 

tnntt 

nna 

nna 


3 


toa-i 


n.  pr.  3181,  Sin.  157  ;  c£.  fiacraXefJLov  W  2412  b. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  656  ? 

“camp(s),”  1964  ('»  m  “chief  of,”  etc.). 

“drink,”  Zp6,  =  Heb.  nntpp,  cf.  NWD  Dn.  v.  10,  or 
perh.  f.  form  of  “  load  ”  ? 

(1)  “land,”  31  (jpKOl  non) ;  cf.  Ass.  matu,  Talm.  KflKD. 

(2)  “gift,”  Zh12  (for  |FM?),  or  perh.  =  Hb.  'Dp  “when”  ? 

(3)  “mankind,  people,”  only  in  Z,  e.g.  *6d  n»  mm 
maDD  P4 ;  cf.  P10,  H26.  Meaning  dub.,  acc.  to  Hal. 
=  “  aussitdt,  alors,”  in  H12>  13>  14>  28.  For  “land”  (1)  = 
“people”  (3)  cf.  Wi.  AF,  p.  107. 

n.  pr.  PI2,  36a> 3.  Gr.  eq.  /laOSas  (cf.  Ma##(uos  Matt, 
ix.  9) ;  cf.  TlD  Sanhed.  43a  and  v.  Dal.  142,  n.  2. 
n.  pr.  fam.  P  J.  As.Vog.  I3  (Gr.  Mavtf/koAeiwv),  P  Schr.-S. 
le,  Eut.  41 ;  cf.  P  702  (frag.).  Gr.  eq.  <PvXr)  Ma##a/?o)AiW 
(cf.  W  2579).  [flD  perh.  for  cf.  Ph.  ^ynnOK  al.  or  = 
'inn  (“gift  of  B.”).] 
n.  pr.  239. 

“weight,”  531  (so  No.  ZMG  xlvii.  101),  v.  nnbw  (2). 
v.  s.  jpn . 

n.  pr.  1441  (Mithra  +  C-AyJ,  Pers.);  cf.  Mi^pavo-n??. 
n.  pr.  1021  (Mithra  +  Pers.  “  to  stand  ”  ?). 

5 

n.  pr.  dub.  101. 

(1)  n.  pr.  133,  cf.  Hb.  nnng,  rrmn. 

(2)  in  jto  \n  (?)  n?n*6  'BB  nnn  D1'2  “  in  the  day  of  death 
my  mouth  was  not  deprived  of  words”  ?  Nerab  24 
(Hal.);  cf.  nnnoo  “his  death,”  ib.  210  ?  v.  DID. 

Epenthetic,  v.  s.  qon,  b'3,  my,  &6n,  t>pn.  Apocope  in 
Impf.  (if  not  Juss.),  v.  s.  Omitted  in  middle  of 

words,  cf.  obanax,  d-hdd^,  pox  (v.  p*?d),  nn«,  anno, 
K'pDD,  Xp'D'ppD,  XntDp.  Apocope  in  pi.  freq.  in  Z  (v6n%, 
*>ton  al.),  cf.  ZMG  xxiv.  100,  xxxvii,  566,  xlvii.  102,  so 
in  Talm.  (cf.  Dal.  151),  Ass.  (Del.  .4ss.  Gram .  §  65), 
and  Mod.  Syr.  (Wr.  SG  67,  147).  Final  j—  in  Pf.  3  pi. 
v.  s.  *lpQ. 

n.  pr.  Pm83.  Rd.  Kama  “Nebo  built”? 


80 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


n*o* 


nnx^ 

♦Ttt) 

•him 


jnyiM 

[TlDIM 

tflplM 

IBM 


nnon: 

roj 

boj 


jfcranM 


m* 


him 

Snnn: 

*n*na 


m 


v.  135001  Zb14,  error  for  1313nn  “they  offered  willingly.” 
Acc.  to  Hoff.  ^SJB3nn  conjug.  of  ax'*  “to  wish,  desire” 
(ZA  xi.  320). 
n.  pr.  f.  N  24\ 

n.  pr.  57  (a  seal),  Nebo,  Nabu. 
n.  pr.  423  (Nabu-dari). 
cf.  33,  133131,  13313,  and  v.  infr. 
n.  pr.  (“N.  is  god”)  1545. 

n.  pr.  P  243  (662),  see  Vog.  Syr.  153.  Gr.  eq.  ve/3o/3a$o<; 
(not  vefiofiaXos,  wh.  however  is  quoted  in  We.  Heid.2  1), 

cf.  13313. 

n.  pr.  (“  N.  has  presented  ”)  P  732. 
n.  pr.  (“1ST.  has  given”)  1544. 
n.  pr.  (“  N.,  the  lord,  has  given  ”)  29. 
n.  pr.  (“N.  is  pure”  ?  cf.  Xp^13)  P  674. 
n.  pr.  (“N.  made  safe  ”)  25. 

n.  pr.,  the  Nabataeans,  N  l4  and  often;  v.  No.  ZMG 
xxv.  122  ff. 


n.  pr.  f.  N  171.  Dim.  of  (“fruit  of  the  lotus”). 

✓ 

n.  pr.  392. 

n.  pr.  (“N.  save  the  king”)  387. 
n.  pr.  (“N.  increased”)  91. 

“soul,”  cstr.  Zh17,  “monument,”  w.  suff.  n—  Zp18;  cf. 
£3>S3  and  v.  s.  3 . 


v.  s.  503 . 


n.  pr.  dub.  58. 


n.  pr.  112  (alt.  133 

0  s 


“  workman,”  cf. 


n.  pr.  (cf.  ^a*i)  1712. 

“generosity,”  w.  suff.  n—  Zh33,  v.  350. 

v.  “to  vow,”  152  b  ?  Inf.  1131?  164  b  46  (v.  s.  qrTO). 


n.  pr.  P  931. 
n.  pr.  P  Sach.  8. 

“illustrious,”  P  222,  232;  f.  NDlVn  P  291  (read  '3  '3TJ13 
for  NOT  13'3Tri3). 

n.  pr.  272,  cf.  5W1113  275;  cf.  Pers.  “cucumber”? 

n.  pr.  274,  cf.  Hb.  03,  Syr.  *_k>QJ  ( v .  YOJ  viii.  303). 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


81 


*e  y 

Xb13  n.  pr.  311  B1,  cf.  (_£QJ  vovtyjs  ?  alt.  ntSIJ. 

DU*  caus.  “  to  cause  to  flee,  to  remove  ” ;  Impf.  2  S.  Mfin 
(cf.  s.  “DK),  Nerab  l6,  28,  w.  suff.  0-,  ib.  29. 

*1)}*  v.  “to  kindle,”  Hi.  “on  Zh81,  perh.  [n]on,  ib.  29. 

Sni'D  n.  pr.  (“B.  is  light”)  P  124“,  Sach.  12;  cf.  vovp/3rj\ov 
W  2616. 

Dm*  v.  “to  comfort,”  ptcp.  pi.  jttniO  138  a2. 

ND*m  (1)  “bronze,”  P  ll4,  F329.  kto  Nerab  27. 

D^m  (2)  “worker  in  bronze,”  1581,  Syr.  ]  ».-»  i  (cf.  perh. 

•,  P  P  V 

|xj^J  “  hariolus  ”). 

attero  n.pr.  120,  “N.  (or  serpent)  is  father”;  cf.  Hb.  K'rO,  Pehlevi 
GJTOnsX  (i.e.  fc^n^niy),  and  v.  ZMG  xviii.  35,  812  ff. 

Jim  v.  “to  descend,”  P  44  (pi.  defect.),  Impf.  jinn'  145  b6; 
v.8.  k'djo*. 

Dvm  n-  pr>  i482. 

n.  pr.  (“El  guards”)  1742,  1752;  . .ntD3  1941-2.  Gr. 
eq.  rarap^Ao?. 

U--  in  ...02  '3...nt3BDK,  155  b6. 

JDU  Nisan,  the  first  month  (April),  N  24,  53,  107,  11 11 ;  PI5, 
25,  45,  276,  342. 

D'pU  n.  Pr*  (—  NtKtas)  N  59. 

DDDpU  n.  pr.  (Nt/co/xa^os)  306  a  =  N  69  DitDp'J  Nikomedes  ? 
n.  pr.  dei,  Nerab  l9,  29. 

“law,”  Pf6’  9  al. ;  02  “  according  to  the  law,”  Pf237. 

1414,  0  nn^D  on  an  error  for  ;  v.s.  .ODJO  (2). 

nim  n-  Pr-  (n  for  n)  Sin.  79  (=  “leopard,”  cf.  WRS  Kin. 
201). 

U3-.*  frag.  n.  pr.  2932. 
n.  pr.  P  132,  and 

n.  pr.  P  671,  perh.  cf.  deity  Nanai;  v.  Hoflfm.  Ausz. 
p.  21,  n.  157.  Cf.  veros  J.  As.  1881,  t.  xix.  p.  12  1 

XD3  n.  pr.  P  Eut.  421,  Gr.  eq.  vto-rj ;  cf.  KDJ  Erub.  20a  ( v . 
Dal.  143,  n.  6),  and  v. 

C. 


6 


82 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


nor 

nnto 

nDjw 

najtt* 

mjn 

tyayiBW 

vw 

per 


«pw* 


wirnaj 


aw 

run 

-ma 


v.  “to  pull  out”  ;  ’inD1’  Nerab  l9,  hmnDJ'  113®’ 14  (optat.), 
cf.  nWJV  Ez.  vi.  11. 

“a  copy,”  N  129.  (For  deriv.  cf.  ZMG  xxxii.  760, 
ZA  iv.  267;  REJ  vi.  161  ff.) 

(1)  n.  pr.  N  56,  cf.  Hb.  np,  |DM,  Wr.  Josh. 

Styl.  §  51 ;  Sab.  U]}:i>  (v-  J.As.  1883,  t.  ii.  p.  252);  Gr. 
voe/xos  (J.As.  1881,  t.  xix.  16);  cf.  Lag.  Sem.  1.  32 
(1878),  Grun.  62  f.,  Kerber  55  f. ;  v.  also  Dy3N. 

(2)  in  Tl£>y3  1414  (v.  Tl ypj)  “my  pleasant  one,  my 

darling,”  or  perh.  “my  songs”;  cf.  IASqsj,  aju. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  636,  Gr.  voepov,  W  2412m,  voaipov  CIG  4595, 
yapos  J.As.  1881,  t.  xix.  p.  487  ;  cf.  Hb.  n}*)W. 

n.  pr.  154°,  v.  Dm  (1). 

n.  pr.  N  42  (cf.  and  “  to  expel  ”) ;  CIS  rd. 

1'BB  q.v. 

v.  “to  go  out.”  Causative  pDN  Pf243,  ptcp.  NpBD  Pf247, 

cstr.  pDD  fi34,  F231,  F313.  Impf.  pa:'  21 13,  N  22;  cf. 
[pB3]iT  113®’  21  (for  retention  of  3  v.  Dal.  241);  ptcp. 
pass.  pBNtt  Pf312  (i.e.  PS&JP  for  N  cf.  s.  hb]} ;  perh. 

error  for  pQSDD).  Reflex.  3  m.  S.  pf.  pa:nK  145  d5, 
ptcp.  KpSHD  Pfi3.  pari'  dub.  2154. 

“expense,”  pi.  cstr.  npD:  147  bi7>  14.  Emph.  nnpBJ  146 
A21,  cf.  NHp?}  Ez.  vi.  4,  ]An  ^  i 

n.  pr.  132  (Eg.  nofir  hontu,  “qui  [bonus]  est  ascen- 
dendo  vel  subeundo  flumen.”  Edd.). 

(1)  “memorial,  grave-stone,”  1693,  Nl1;  n^a:  162, 

w.  (m.)  159,  192,  333,  \v.  *n,  m  (f.)  191,  195, 

P311.  Cstr.  £>a:  1151,  1161,  al.;  pi.  1961.  Found 

in  Sab.  (ZMG  xxxii.  203),  Syr.  (e.g.  1  Macc.  xiii.  28) 
and  MH  ( v .  Rev.  Sem.  July,  1894,  259  flf.). 

(2)  reflex,  pron.  w.  suff.  rt—  (m.)  1144,  147  bi7,  N  22, 

n—  (f.)  2 1 1 2,  Dn—  2032,  N  32;  pi  “souls,  persons,” 

139  a1. 

(1)  v.  “to  set  up,”  1822,  Pvoj.  bi;  ptcp.  pass.  3VD  q.v. 

(2)  “pillar,”  Zp1’  20,  h1  ;  Zh10  “prefect”  (so  DHM). 
n.  pr.  P  21,  Gr.  va acrmpov cf.  Levy  ZMG  xviii.  97. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


83 


rbm 

)lp: 

wpj 

ITpJ 

rrpi 

bp: 

yi: 

mi: 

ypi: 

xm 


ym 

w: 

ym 

tfW 

pm 
•  •  •  •  • 
nwn 

rwuiM 

vim 

pn:* 


v.  “to  guard.”  Impf.  “iVJ'  Nerab  l13,  'n  ib.  12. 
n.  pr.  P  150. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  441,  v.  in'pj. 
n.  pr.  (N iKrjTrjs,  -tio?)  N  66. 

n.  pr.  dub.  Sin.  99,  153;  cf.  » »  n  1  Wr.  Syr.  Mart. 

p.  V»-  Alfc-  12'|T)  or  (cf.  Ar.  Juii). 

✓ 

n.  pr.  161,  22;  cf.  Hb. 

“libation,”  146  B43;  cf.  Syr.  1_k„OQJ. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  62,  cf.  ^SUI  in  Q  (“one  who  carries  from 

place  to  place  ”). 

n.  pr.  loc.  Nerab  near  Aleppo,  Nerab  l2,  21 ;  see  Intro¬ 
duction,  p.  3. 

n.  pr.  105  ? 

n.  pr.  P755.  Perh.  =  “Narcissus,”  cf.  *£Q£Q^..O;J  Cur. 
ASD,  p.  §  <n. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  358  ? 

n.  pr.  P511,  61c’2,  123®  (Ox.  I)4,  F3,  and  P  681  (Mord.)  ; 
Gr.  eq.  recra,  abbrev.  of  (“El  forgets”?);  cf. 

va(rarj\o<i  W  2070c,  v.  Dal.  143,  n.  6. 

n.  pr.  P  152  (1271),  128,  Ps11,  Pvoj.as  (>DT13);  cf. 
vacraov/xos  W  2608. 

“women,”  Zp8,  v.  NfirtiK. 

“kinsman”  (=  Ar.  waJ),  N  127,  here  used  of  a  descen- 

* 

dant  in  the  female  line  (v.  WPS  Kin.  315  f.). 

n.  pr.  Sin.  15,  27  (.  .'EO  ib.  120),  169  +  4  t. ;  cf.  vocro-eyos 
W  2292®. 

n.  pr.  dei,  Nerab  l9,  29. 

n.  pr.  f .  N  82,  alt.  . 

n.  pr.  Sin.  35. 

n.  pr.  205  (CIS  for  nODW),  cf.  Sin.  51,  190,  364®,  604, 
610. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  644. 

y.  “to  pour  out,”  Impf.  n3n>(?  ton  mm  Zh23. 


6—2 


84 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


|J"|}  v.  “to  give,”  Zh2’8;  3  f.  S.  nana  Zh15  (?),  pi.  «ona  Zh80. 
Impf.  }n:'  145  d1,  N  23;  in'1  149  b-c12,  Pfi5  (f220  ?) ;  pi. 
pan(')  138  b2,  urv  Zh4.  Imp.  >:n  1506  ( v.s .  wn). 

n.  pr.  (borne  by  an  inhabitant  of  Jerusalem),  320  b, 
cf.  Hb.  rrgna . 


D 


-D 

*OD 

[X2]JD 

*JD* 

ID* 

K'jrrD 

1HD 

jaiD 

ND1D 

N'DID 

xniD 


•  •DD 
D^'tDtDD 
]VD 

x'^iSd 


n.  pr.  frag.  251. 
n.  pr.  P  1191. 

n.  pr.  17  (written  3d).  Ass.  eq.  sigaba  (D  gen.  represents 
Ass.  s). 

adj.  “many,”  pi.  f.  jN'JD  P155;  cf.  qisy. 

uJ 

v.  M.  91  iOS  HID  “the  pain  is  stopped,”  cf.  ju>  and 
Hb.  "IP  “  stocks  ”  1 

pi.  Pf11  (=  W|T]p),  (tvvSlkol  ;  cf.  "^QjJOTJQ-CD  and 
Epiph.  44,  31,  v.  Lag.  Sym.  ii.  190,  1. 

“witness,”  P  156  ^  “inD  JYlD. 
n.  pr.  1545. 

n.  pr.  Pmh3,  cf.  Hb.  'P-1D,  Sjr.  «._»_£OQ.r 0  Wr.  Syr.  Mart. 
1.  4,  .  »  mm  ib.  1.  13,  v.  Kerber,  36  f. 

“horse,”  Sin.  410;  cf.  Syr.  ]  Lmn m  (for  deriv.  v.  ZMG 
xl.  719). 

f.  “stele,  pillar,”  113®’ 13 ;  deriv.  dub.  ( v .  ZMG  xxxvi. 

346),  cf.  perh.  and  v.  Hoffm.  ZA  xi.  236  ;  Barth, 
Hebr.  July,  1897,  p.  276;  and  Wi.  AF  2nd  ser.  (’98),  76  f. 

n.  pr.  P  993  (cf.  <TcueA.os,  ocraieAos  Wetz.  Ausg.  Inschr. 
362  f.)  <  bion'  (Mord.). 

n.  pr.  frag.  P  150b. 

n.  pr.  Statilus,  Pf35.  Gr.  eq.  crron-eiA... 

Sivan ,  the  third  month,  June-July;  P  265  (Vog.  p'a), 
33®» l,  b>  *,  Mie4,  Eut.  2. 

n.  pr.  loc.  Seleucia,  P  J.  As.  Vog.  24. 

n.  pr.  Silvanus,  Sin.  542,  580. 


DlplSo 

5?Sd* 

pSo* 


NpD 

Nn’DD 

iOiSD 

nS»d* 

in»D 

33D 

PC31DDD 

^“IDD 

nj?D* 

'SyD 

KSD  1 


[1SD 

Nt3SD 

N'ftDSD 

N'DtOBD 

DV&tOSD 

p’SD 

K~lSD 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY.  85 

n.  pr.  Seleucus,  P  172;  cf.  o-cAcukos,  .ctio  no  \ffl  1  Macc. 
vii.  1. 

“ladder,”  Pll3;  alt.  Np'PD,  v.  Np^D^. 

“shekel,”  pi.  py^D  N  39,  148,  197;  21 16  (py^D).  Freq. 
in  N. 

v.  “  to  ascend  ”  (used  of  caravans,  and  in  Aph.  also  of 
the  taxing  of  articles),  3  f.  S.  n[p^D]  P  54,  pi.  1p^>D  P  62, 
defect.  p*pD  P  Eut.  422.  Caus.  pf.  pDK  P  74,  pi.  lpDK  Pf5 
(i.e.  -IpDN,  or  pass.  -IpDK).  Ptcp.  pass.  pDD  Pf8  (i.e.  P5B 
cf.  pDn  Dn.  vi.  24,  or  pDE  on  anal,  of  Syr.). 

M.  on  Pll3  for  (Yog.),  “landing-place,  or  stage” ; 

v.  Np^D  n. 

n.  pr.  Pzmg  xviii.  p.  99  “seal”;  cf.  also  ZMG  xxiii.  289. 
dub.  'D  mi  Nab.  Pet.  (“triclinium,”  Yog.). 

Pza8,  |D  “on  thy  left  side.” 
n.  pr.  (=  07x777-,  Eg.)  1484. 

“two-thirds”  (Ass.  sinibu)  71. 

“sesterces,”  Pf221. 

n.  pr.  (“  king  of  kings  is  El  ”  [^K“iD“lD]  ?)  82. 

v.  “to  support”  (or  perh.  “to  feed”),  Impf.  iyD'  Zh15’21  ; 
v.  -nK. 
n.  pr.  83  1 

v.  “to  nourish,”  P  157;  acc.  to  M.  “ threshhold,”  or  cf. 

perh.  “  be  liberal  ”  [n‘SD  H  with  preceding  charac¬ 

ters  unfortunately  illegible,  perh.  corruption  of  some 
title,  Gr.  eq.  too  e^oytoTarov  e7ra p\ov  tov  Itpov  7rpatTa>ptor]. 

w.  11H  PF314, 45  [f246],  Gr.  eq.  crvvccjiojvrjcrev  avrots ;  cf. 
ZMG  xxxv.  727,  xlii.  412. 

n.  pr.  (Septa)  289. 

(1)  pi.  ot  ^eTTTLfXLOL,  the  Septimii,  P  282;  NI'DDSD  (v.s. 
DtODDlp)  P  292.  Cf.  AvprjXcoi  J.  As.  1896,  t.  viii.  329. 

(2)  n.  pr.  f.  (Septimia)  P  291. 

n.  pr.  Septimius,  P  221,  231 ;  D'fttODD  P  241. 
n.  pr.  P  1182,  cf.  pQDN. 

“scribe,”  46,  84. 


86 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


Kp'ttSpD 


“ID 

["inlD'JOD 

p“lD* 

anno 

ID’-lD 

pno 

PD 

'“I31D 

XD“lD 

Sdid 

nsiD 

xnnD 


V 

^lxy 

'jj-.ay 

XDy 

nay 


“  senator  ”  (crvyKA^TiKos)  P  221,  'pJD  P  222  ;  cf. 

■  ron  ftVmnm,  crvyi<\r]TO<i,  ^Xqjocd,  ( TvyKXrj - 

TIKOS. 

v.  s.  pD. 

n.  pr.  21,  sar-istar  <£ventus  deae  I.”  (Edd.);  ^  an 
abbrev.,  but  ty  should  represent  Ass.  s. 

(i.e.  12“??)  “dispute,”  pi.  p—  Pf7. 
n.  pr.  149  bc4. 

n.  pr.  P  264,  1013 ;  cf.  nnty. 

“empty,”  Pf2u,  pi.  p—  Pf319. 

“prince”  (cf.  Hb.  |^D),  138  b6>7,  or  from  “ID  (=  Hb.  pb 
“  prince  ”). 

n.  pr.  396,  cf.  Ass.  sarrunuri,  Eponym.  list  674  b.c., 
KAT2  479. 

“eunuch,”  753. 
n.  pr.  P  Eut.  24. 

n.  pr.  81  (cf.  Hb.  “nettle”);  alt.  unD  (Levy), 
pi.  108  “guardians”  (Yog.),  “satraps”  (Levy),  “staters” 
(cf.  Syr.  and  cf.  also  Wi.  MYG  ’97,  iii.  35; 

see  pDDK).  [The  inscr.  weighs  ca.  25-657  kilog.  which 
is  very  near  the  Pers.-Euboean  golden  talent  of  25’92 
kilog. ;  cf.  Meyer,  Entstehung  d.  Judenthums ,  p.  11,  n.  1, 
who  renders  “  officials.”] 

y 

elided  in  pDjy.  For  exceptions  to  the  equation  y  (vj)  = 
*  =  i^>,  v.  ¥. 
n.  pr.  Praa  ii.  144  1 
n.  pr.  Pm23. 

n.  pr.  (=  Niay,  Yog.)  P864,  1022,  ms4,  PSach.  15. 

(1)  v.  “to  make,”  109,  1703,  N  21 ;  P  83,  ll3;  w. 
“make  peace,”  P  Eut.  413,  v.  ND^DHny;  3  f.  S.  may 
1411,  2261 ;  P  32,  842,  982,  1241;  2  m.  S.  may  145  c3, 
pi.  nay  1881;  N  31,  81;  P  l1,  62,  731.  Impf.  nay'  N  37, 
nayn  N  74 ;  pi.  nay  Zh7.  Ptcp.  act.  w.  pron.  njjnay 
Cil6,  pi.  cstr.  NDDD1  may  P  234;  v.s.  X.  Pass.  w. 
internal  vowel  change,  3  f.  S.  muy  1968  (cf.  ZMG 
xxxvii.  564,  Dal.  202). 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


87 


*7^  (2)  “  servant,”  Zb3  ;  cstr.  761  Dn.  iii.  26) ;  w.  sufF. 

“|—  144'.  [l2V  freq.  in  cpd.  pr.  ns.;  for  Ar.  examples 
v.  No.  ZMG  xli.  724  f.,  We.  Heid.2  2  ff.  Not  all  cpds. 
of  'y  are  theophorous  (cf.  Baeth.  Beit.  20,  Cl.-Gan.  Rec. 
d’Archeol.  Orient.  139),  in  ID^my,  imy 'y,  nmn  'Jl 
the  second  name  is  that  of  a  king  (perh.  deified  'l  cf. 
No.  in  Eut.  Nab.  32  f.,  WRS  Bern.  42  n.).  For  cpds. 
of  *ny  v.  infr.  Abbrev.  to  2]}  v.  Nes.  Marg.  87  f.  and 
K3y  above.] 

n.  pr.  N  251,  Sin.  115  ;  cf.  Wr.  Syr.  Mart .  p. 

vwray  n.  pr.  Sin.  80,  for  VilK  '])  or  ']}  ? 

vnam y  n.  pr.  Sin.  156,  472,  v.  supr. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  512,  perh.  for  l^irus^N  'y  cf.  biriN. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  10,  .22,  427,  etc.  (c.  50  t.). 
xjbiroy  n.  pr.  1572,  1734  5;  cf.  a/3Sa\yov  (v.s.  perh. 

“servant  of  the  tribe  (Jt)  Ge”  (Cl.-Gan.  Rec.  16). 

n.  Pr*  238,  cf.  HofF.  t Tul.  599,  and  freq. 

GeoSouAos  in  1st  cent.  A.  D. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  106,  160,  214',  374,  442  +  6  t. 

wySsnay  n.  pr.  Sin.  146,  cf.  Ar. 

**?j/woy  n.  pr.  Sin.  187,  1S8  (=  ^ys^K  ']}). 

n.  pr.  P  65,  Gr.  eq.  A/38i/3aAos. 

n.  Pr-  P  123®  (Ox.  I)5. 

trwrniy  n.  pr.  Sin.  559;  v.  fro&yn. 

Sin.  445,  for  'aiwiay. 

n.  pr.  121,  303;  Sin.  214g,  467;  P  844;  cf.  Orn.S> 
J.As.  1891,  t.  xviii.  p.  125. 

n.  Pr-  (“servant  of  'n ”)  1591,  N  55;  Sin.  363.  Lat. 

/  *  J  0  / 

eq.  Abdaretas,  cf.  Ar.  Ajjh*.  juc. 
n.  pr.  3332,  P  72. 

V*Dy  n.  pr.  Sin.  364a  (for  ITOy  ?). 
n.  pr.  Sin.  228,  for  'n'pK  '])• 
n.  pr.  v.  Mord.  ZMG  xxxviii.  588. 


88 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


'rbiiy 

nSnay 

ttWiay 

romay 

majnay 

n&jnay 

nnynay 
may 
b^amy 
. .  may 
K^may 
K&Smay 

may 

n&ay 

way 

rway 

xrway 

vay 

ray 

may 

rmay 

'Day 


aay* 


n.  pr.  Sin.  162. 

n.  pr.  (“servant  of  vbtt  ”  q.v.)  P  943. 

n.  pr.  161.  23,  1951,  230. 
n.  pr.  2713  ?  cf.  Eut.  Sin.  p.  51. 

n.  pr.  1881"2,  1962,  229,  235  a,  288;  N  311,  al.  Freq. 
in  inscr.  fr.  Hegra. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  72,  cf.  Ar.  (Eut.  Nab.  p.  32). 

n.  pr.  (“servant  of  'y”  q.v.)  PM4a. 
n.  pr.  (“servant  of  v.  NY)  P  1173. 
n.  pr.  (“servant  of  '"l”  q.v.)  304. 
n.  pr.  frag.  Sin.  317. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  431. 

n.  pr.  Pm 59  >  “..made  peace”  (cf.  P  Eut.  413);  cf. 

jr.Ql  Cur.  ASD,  p.  1.  11  fr.  end;  Nes. 

Marg.  8*7  f. 

n.  pr.  344. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  77,  158  ? 

n.  pr.  3232 ;  N  241,  P  844,  Sin.  38,  78,  93  +  15  t. ; 

d/J 

cf. 

n.  pr.  N  234,  248,  277  [but  CIS  rd.  rroy] ;  cf. 

“work”  (cf.  Dn.  ii.  49),  1967,  cstr.  JYVQy  Nab. 

Pet.,  pi.  p'ly  (i.e.  n'21[)  Pf4. 

n.  pr.  N  33  (alt.  pqy),  Sin.  236. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  141,  156,  198. 

n.  pr.  1952  (cf.  lEP'jy). 

n.  pr.  181  ;  n&J”iy  1641,  ji)  “ gens  ‘Obaisat.” 

Gr.  eq.  6  Srjfios  6  tw v  o/3atarjvo)v  (cf.  also  ZDPV  iii. 
123),  v.  infr. 

n.  pr.  PEut.  422  (Gr.  eq.  apuraeov,  for  wh.  rd  a/3\  Eut. 

cfs.  cuf/aiov  W  2582 ;  cf.  NDny  Praa  i.  77,  no.  1,  ii.  76, 

0  * 

o/3aucra6o<i  W  2172,  al.,  pr.-Ar.  D2y,  and  Ar. 
v.  “to  pass  over,”  Impf.  Zp18. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


89 


n.  pr.  loc.  1964,  alt.  Nrnsy*  Perh.  named  from  some 
ford,  cf.  Ma/3op0a  Jos.  BJ  iv.  8,  1  ;  and  v.  Dal.  134,  1). 

n.  pr.  1583,  cf.  Ar.  3ut. 

n.  pr.  m.  P  172,  18',  P  Schr.  7,  Cl. -Gan.  Bee.  132,  no.  14; 
M32;  f.  P  671,  M123;  Gr.  eq.  oyya. 

n.  pr.  frag.  P  53. 

b'y  n.  pr.  P  70',  943,  Pm31,  ii4,  203,  raa  iii.  28,  no.  2 ;  dim.  of 
jiA,  *????  “calf”  (cf.  Hb.  Gr.  eq.  oyr/Aos. 

n.  pr.  P  93",  140,  153,  M87;  cf.  ZMG  vii.  341  f.,  xxv. 
538. 

Sia'Sjy  n.  pr.  Pm25!. 

“  until;”  Zp7,  iDt'  IV  Zh17,  145  a3;  pn  iy  163  d  “as  long 
as  life”  [i.e.  “as  long  as  N.  lives,”  cf.  Dal.  186] ;  cbv  iy 
N  92,  ND^y  ly  P  36a> 4 ;  myD  lyi  KpIDO  “from 

East  to  West,”  Zp13;  ...ID3  IV  DJYin  “a  seal...,”  151 1  1 

n.  pr.  Sin.  649,  for  TtPfrnay. 

H'lJ?  n.  pr.  (cf.  Hb.  HHIJ)  1 221  ;  cf.  Ar.  U,  alt.  nny. 

S’  s 

n.  pr.  2951,  345  [Eut.  Nab.  V3y] ;  cf.  Ar.  IV  in 

✓ 

pr.-Ar.  and  Ibn  Dor.  52,  304. 

"ly  n.  pr.  2193  [Eut.  Nab.  piy] ;  cf.  Ar.  jjet,  or  perh. 

*  »  »,  A  “  foreigner  ”  ? 

n-  Pr*  Sin.  175,  and  390  (<  iDiy  1). 

toiy  (i)  p  742  &QD  KJiy^  “to  good  fortune”  (cf.  I+oi)- 
M.  rds.  &OD"),  an  error  for  K»m. 

(2)  “time,”  137  a3. 

*"47^*  v.  “to  help,”  P  Eut.  424,  ji3"ny  “he  helped  them”; 
P  54  n-ny  “because  he  organised  it  (i.e.  the 

caravan).” 

xmy  “  custom,”  Pf24,  F38,  w.  “pn  “according  to  custom”;  cf. 

KTy. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  9C,  34,  38  +  33  t. ;  cf.  auSo?  Leps.  86, 
avSrjXos  Miller  p.  121 ;  5QA  Hoff.  Ausz.  p.  123,  n.  1086. 

n.  pr.  1904,  cf.  IpiOA  Cur.  Spic.  p.  1,  1.  8 ;  Cur.  ASD 
p.  156;  a ov(c)l8os  W  2413b,  2512;  Cl. -Gan.  Bee.  13; 

v.  fiya. 


arriy 


90 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


wiy 

eny 

i&iy 

vrWiiy 

iniy 


m 

'iy 

'iy 

'iy 

viy 

wy 


nry* 

Swny 

my 

'Briny 

boy 

KTy 

vry 

imy 


n.  pr.  Sin.  28,  44,  82,  85  +  4  t. ;  dim.  of  iftiy  v.  infr. 
n.  pr.  N  381,  CIS  rd.  tsmy. 

uJ  y 

n.  pr.  Sin.  175  (390  >  IDiy) ;  cf.  Ar.  Gr.  av/xos 

(occurs  in  the  Hauran  both  as  a  divine  and  personal 
name);  v.  Baeth.  Beit .  101,  1  '0''$  supra. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  72,  cf.  Ar.  a.XJI  Sab.  niy,  ^Nniy ;  v. 

infr. 

n.  pr.  (cf.  C^£)  N  252,  Sin.  199;  abbrev.  fr.  above, 
cf.  av6os  W  2204,  yavTos  ZMG  xv.  444;  yovros  Cl. -Gan. 
Bee.  19. 

n.  pr.  1841  (alt.  iniy),  P  Schr.  8. 

“  goat,7’  Pfi23’  25 ;  ry  H  ppT  Pf243. 

(1)  in  P 146  kjdpi  nidpi  *ty;  P  147  Nnsy(E)i  (nd)pj^  (')ty; 
“  goat-skins  77  ? 


(2)  n.  pr.  90;  P  146  (Vog.) ;  cf.  Hb.  ;  t^ty  Ber.  14c. 
Perh.  connected  w.  Ar.  deity  Uzza,  v.  ZMG  xli.  710. 

(3)  n.  pr.  f.  19 12. 

n.  pr.  279,  292.  (Also  found  on  O.  Hb.  seals.) 

n.  pr.  1361,  311b3;  P  173,  J.  As.  Yog.  I2,  22 ;  cf.  a£i£o? 
W  2044,  ah,  a CtZuov  W  2413;  Hb.  KH?-  For  Aziz,  a 
divine  name,  cf.  kCD?")  Cur.  Spic.  p.  b  4  fr. 


end;  J.As.  1891,  t.  xviii.  227  f.  and  v.  We.  Reid.  61, 
Baeth.  Beit.  76. 


v.  imp.  my  tyn b  “and  (he)  whispers  ‘help!7’7  145c7; 
cf.  my. 

n.  pr.  (“  El  helps  me  ”)  43  b. 


n.  pr.  dei,  136,  146  A26,  >  “iny. 


n.  pr.  (“'y  is  good,77  '3  Eg.  nufi,  a  later  form  of  O.Eg. 
nufir)  146  B411. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  48,  cf.  olttclXov  Leps.  92.  Alt.  ibsy  cf.  Ar. 

J&,  J&. 

y 

“custom,77  'y  “pn  Pf337  ;  'y  jft  Pf5’9  and  '])2  Pf6  “accord¬ 
ing  to  custom.77 

n.  pr.  N  21,  241,  3232,  Sin.  355;  cf.  Ar.  JuU,  aeSo? 
W  2034,  al. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  12,  96,  161  +5  t.,  dim.  of 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


91 


iS'J?  n-  Pr-  320  d,  cf.  Ar.  JLp, 

(1)  “  eye,”  w.  suff.  >-  Nerab  25,  Zh30,  q-  ib.32. 

(2)  “well,”  P  951  (of  E<£Ka,  cf.  CIG  4502);  P  994  see 

2\*7D;  pi.  p'y  Pf28,  Pfi  title,  F213. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  306,  cf.  Ar. 

“py*  (1)  v.  “to  alter,”  *YJP  (cf.  Ar.  j*Ju)  N  98,  147. 

(2)  “other,”  N  36,  45;  “VyD  N  46,  ll5,  127;  w.  suff.  m'y 

y  J  0  y 

N  12°  —  l “another  than  it,  or  anything  else.” 
fcOI’l'y  n.  pr.  235  A1. 

n.  pr.  loc.  393,  alt.  p'y. 

prep,  “over,”  N  52,  etc.;  w.  suff  qpy  146  A25 ;  3  m.  S. 
>rr6y  N  27,  207  ;  P  94,  30a> b ;  f.  why  Zh34  ;  3  pi.  nn'by 
2233.  “  Over  ”  (position),  N  52,  cf.  2233 ;  w.  2&^ 

“sit  upon,”  Zh15';  with  “p  “by  means  of,”  P  954  ;  w. 
b$&  “to  ask  on  behalf  of,”  138  a4;  byb  |0  “above,” 
Pf218;  “on  account  of,”  Pf6  lin  pjTlD  NJYOV  by 
“ disputes  arose  with  reference  to  these  matters ” ;  “on 
behalf  of,”  N404;  “  incumbent  upon  ”  (of  payments  due, 
Ass.  eq.  ina  pan),  pT  by  M  NSDD  miK  302,  cf.  38  ;  w. 
WKB  N  207,  27 11  (v.  oy) ;  v.  also  s.  ndi. 

(1)  •  ■Zh26)  in  parallelism  with  Ta“)[2  IS]. 

tfSj?  (2)  n.  pr.  f.  P  983,  Wr.  PSBA  Nov.  1885,  no.  4 ;  cf.  )i>y. 

(3)  “above,”  182s,  N  2”,  37,  47  (v. s.  Din);  followed  by 
p  (cf.  Dn.  vi.  3  "O  x'fg)  196s. 

jvhy  n.  pr.  dub.  Sin.  18  («nr6y),  26,  67,  366  ;  cf.  jrfey  Rev. 
Sem .,  Jan.  1896,  p.  66,  1.  1. 

n.  pr.  341  \  cf.  Ar.  or 

(1)  n.  pr.  1581,  Sin.  644;  cf.  Ar.  aAeio?  W  2520. 

(2)  “upper,  higher”  (cf.  HrW,  ktib  wbv  Dn.  iii.  26); 
wby  tna  Sin.  550,  Pm 57  'by  ^2  X'  “O  sublime  Bel”? 
f.  xr\'by  1643. 

Sx'Sy  n.  Pr-  (“El  is  high”)  N  251. 
n.  Pr-  Sin.  321,  654. 

vb])  n*  Pr*  Sin.  173,  226,  252,  564  +  4  t. 


92 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


"Sy  n-  Pr-  Pf3,  Gr.  eq.  oXcuovs ;  cf.  Hb.  'by. 

D'^Jf  “youth,  slave,  fellow,”  1522,  Sin.  524a,  601  ;  H'O'bv  Sin. 
193,  w.  suff.  n—  P  33a>6 ;  pi.  cstr.  'D'by  235  a1  (v.s.  btf  3). 
K'B'by  Pfi1  ;  f.  KnD'by  f326,  v.  d by  2. 
ayby  n.  pr.  P  101,  ll1 ;  Gr.  eq.  aXair^s. 

XW'by  n.  pr.  PWr.  3,  1.  2;  cf.  Ph.  'EOy  (  m.  and  f.)  ncyby  (f.)  • 

|  why  n.  pr.  Pm  63. 

Jlv y  n.  pr.  Sin.  405,  Praa  ii.  94,  no.  4;  cf.  Ar.  <uX£. 
n.  pr.  ?  145  d5. 

%  v.  “  to  enter,”  Pf316  K"0n  pt^nb  bby  '1  bsb  ;  Impf.  43  A5 
NSDD  by'  DPI  internal  pass.  ?  Ptcp.  byD  Pf230,  pi.  cstr. 

Pfi1’23’26.  Reflex.  by'KJV  Pf2h  (for  •>  cf.  Dal.  277, 
n.  4,  5)  more  correctly  byNJY  Pfi31,  F26.  Ptcp.  [b]yxn?0 
Pfi13,  pi.  pbyxriD  fi1,  F320. 

d  by  (1)  'l  Zii1  'Dbyn  “in  my  youth,  or  in  my  life”  ('pbjp), 
v.  'ttbyn. 

(2)  “fellow,”  Pfi3>4,  F236  ;  v.  D'by. 

(^)  “eternity”  (cf.  xroby),  Dbyb  “for  ever,”  2263,  3374, 
3422,  N  44,  Sin.  6  ;  Dby  ny  Sin.  186,  Nab.  Pet.  5 ;  NJobyb 
P  33,  21,  771  [whereby  an  error  Nftbrtb],  P  Sach.  1;  obyb 
poby  N  29,  cf.  Dn.  vii.  18  wpby  oby  iy ;  also  s.  rvo. 

ntby  “the  world,”  P  73‘  'y  *00  jBpbyib.  Gr.  eq.  Ait  /xeyiuro) 

KepavvLw. 

(1)  n-  Pr-  115  ? 

(2)  dub.  N'DJ  NQ3D  |by  1471  “paper,  sheet”  (cf.  Hb.  nby), 
or  “estimation”  (cf.  Targ.  fcOlb'y).  Perh.  rd.  jbyn  “we 
have  inscribed”  (^/bby),  or  (i.e.  i'H’)  ptcp.  pi.  ? 

nby  dub.  153  a1. 

xisby  n.  pr.  P  123a  (Ox.  3)3;  Gr.  eq.  aXa^an/as. 

n^Sj;  n-  Pr-  ZMG  xlii.  474;  cf.  aAa<Ta#os  W  2042,  al.; 

J  *  * 

aAeiros,  aXaicros  W  2269,  al.  ;  Ibn  Dor.  169. 

n.  pr.  2032,  cf.  Ar.  die  Ibn  Dor.  2279. 

“altar,”  P  74‘,  82s  (w.  mi),  981,  123-  (Ox.  I)2,  mis2. 
riJT  N'n[by]  P  935,  pi.  dub.  ( V .  No.  ZMG  xxiv.  100, 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


93 


oy* 

oy 

ay* 

rnay 

xniay 

•'ay 

vay 

vvay 

m’ay 

Say 

iaay 

py 

njay 

nay 

nay 

nay* 

&nay 

nay 

pay 

xmnay 

ruy 


i’ijy 


(1)  “people,”  w.  suff.  in  fifty  Dm  “lover  of  his  people,” 
1834,  N  25,  49,  55,  and  freq. 

(2)  “kinsman,”  1822  (Hal.)  ?  perh.  prep.  cf.  infr. 

(3)  prep.  “  with,”  w.  suff.  >-  Zh2,  q-  Zh17,  n-  P  44,  63, 
Eut.  423.  noy  WKB  2 1 1 4,  N  37,  47,  ll5,  127,  148,  2011 
“  it  is  incumbent  upon  ”  (cf.  also  s.  by). 

n.  pr.  f.  N  222,  alt.  m»y. 

“pillar,”  P  9\  Eut.  22;  pi.  p-  P  84,  ll3;  *0-  P  Eut.  1. 
n.  pr.  f.  frag.  Sin.  223®,  for  Vfty  1 

n.  pr.  Sin.  3,  18,  64  +  c.  50  t.  ( v .  .  .roy  supra) ;  cf.  Gr. 

wJ  ✓  J 

a/x(fA)aLos,  a/xeos,  etc.,  and  in  Q. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  157. 

n.  pr.  N  191;  Sin.  63,  634;  cf.  Ar. 

* 

v.  in  Zb7-8  bs  fubuy  UN  JVD1  ?  perhaps  “to  be  bereft, 
stripped.” 

n.  pr.  Sin.  Ill,  122,  187  +  6  t.  ;  cf.  Ar.  yj. 

wii  *  *  J 

n.  pr.  235  a2,  cf.  Ar. 

n.  pr.  loc.  ?  'y  |d  nbtt  N  34. 

(1)  v.  “to  dwell,”  Sin.  551. 

(2)  n.  pr.  ?  P  Eut.  25. 

(3)  P  156  moy  “QT)  “he  passed  his  life”  (cf.  Syr. 

liioai)>  “procured  his  food”  >  “did  his  duty.”  M. 
reads  the  line  niTOT  'moy  'lb 

“wool,”  Pf243. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  20,  21,  68  +  15  t.;  cf.  Ar.  Hb.  noy  ; 

v.  WRS  Kin.  265,  and  cf.  noy*,  moy. 

n.  pr.  1142-3,  cf.  Hb.  E"}py,  Ar.  eppavos  Wetz.  17. 

* 

n.  pr.  %  P  Eut.  40. 

v.  “to  answer,”  P  1053;  pf.  w.  suff.  nuy  P  (794),  926, 
1035  ;  >nuy  P1167,  uy  (defec.)  Pill3;  my  (suff.  f.) 
P  83®> 3  (M.  ad  loc.)-,  ptcp.  in  joblD  my  (cf.  Dn.  ii.  5) 
145  b2. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  107,  for  P“Dy. 


94 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


awuy 

wnroy 

♦snroy 

tojftroy 

i^oy 


wy 

vay 

nnoy 

vsy 

nicy 

amy 

^ny 

'i'll)* 

v:ny 

jny 

■my 

nn'Ty 

lainy 

^ny 

ammy 

ifcny 

npny 

xsny 


“impost”  (cf.  BOl?  Ez.  vii.  26),  P  1243,  cstr.  IWOy  ib. 
Gr.  eq.  (e7ri)  dpyvpoTapdov. 

n.  pr.  147  bi9,  Eg.  Anh  (“life”)  -habis;  cf.  D2nn  and  v. 

Dnn. 

n.  pr.  142,  147  ai4,  “life  of  Apis,”  or  “Apis  lives.” 
n.  pr.  1484  “life  of  Mut.” 

n.  pr.  Nab.  Pet.,  cf.  Ar.  ^ I  Ibn  Dor.  296. 

Alt.  Vog.  J.As.  1896,  t.  viii.  496. 

n.  pr.  N  151,  552;  Sin.  260,  ib.“,  313,  413,  424,  524“; 
cf.  Gr.  avapos  freq.  in  Hauran,  dim.  ovrjpa6r]  W  2229  ; 

x-  Os  £i  s  s  s  s 

cf.  Ar.  v0“3U’,  and  ;  v.  WRS  Journ.  of 

* 

Phil.  ix.  81  f. 

♦ 

n.  pr.  P  1246,  Gr.  equiv.  avanSos. 

n.  pr.  1548,  cf.  Sab.  pjjj  DHM  Ep.  Denk.  7. 
n.  pr.  P  Schr.  10;  alt.  nnQJL 
n.  pr.  Sin.  125. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  362,  604,  610;  cf.  j.*a£  (Q). 

“pledge,”  65. 

(1)  n.  pr.  (“Arab”?)  P  944. 

(2)  pi.  X'(2"i)y  Sin.  4633  “Arabs.” 
n.  pr.  Sin.  124. 

n.  pr.  P  Schr.  9. 

n.  pr.  299,  cf.  $j£-  Ibn  Dor.  315. 
n.  pr.  Arad-nebo  15,  cf.  inBWlK. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  363,  cf.  Ar.  ^1*1 oj&. 
n.  pr.  3381  > 

?  “portico,”  Nab.  Pet.;  cf.  Barth  ad  loc.  p.  275.  Wi. 
suggests  “pillars.” 
n.  pr.  256. 

“small  gold,”  Kipp  a  Pf38;  cf.  Syr.  |_La5(UL.  1  defect,  cf. 

p“1D,  and  v.s.  1. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  622. 

“couch,  bed,”  Pzmg  xv.  616;  cf.  Syr. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


95 


x'wy 

wy 

p&y* 


V'lwy 

nnwy 

Dwy 


r\y 

nny 

jnnj? 

'ny 


*o^ny 

p*ny* 

nony 

irony 

'm 

ipm 

nny 


n.  pr.  Sin.  432,  for  iDfcyy  ? 

Pf324  %  “les  herboristes  ”  (Vog.);  cf.  Dn.  iv.  22. 

/  /  / 

n.  pr.  N  34 ;  cf.  Ar.  or 

n.  pr.  dub.  2053  (=  N  8  TiJKBtyy  Eut.). 

v.  “to  oppress,”  Impf.  pltyyn  (w.  1  plene  !)  Nerab  28. 

“ten,”  in  rbn)  y  N  49;  yn&^i  y  1823;  y  ns^on  lc;  xmtsy 
Pf7[10]  ol  ScKa-n-pcoTOL.  [For  order  of  num.  cf.  No.  §  148. 
In  B.  Ar.  the  unit  precedes  the  decade.] 

“twenty,”  N  64  ynnxi  y;  1  S33  K»Dm  y. 

n.  pr.  f.  Pm62.  P  Eut.  3  rds.  xn*?y. 

n.  pr.  P  42,  Sach.  1,  Eut.  20;  Gr.  eq.  acrOoipov.  Masc. 
form  of  (Hb.),  ’A  err  a  pry] ;  cf.  Ass.  Istar,  Sab. 

nnny,  and  Ph.  “in^yny  Academy,  no.  1237,  Jan.  18, 
1896. 

“time”  ?  1513  nyD. 
n.  pr.  m.  Pm473,  v.  Tiy. 

n.  pr.  (“Tiy  is  gracious”)  P  Cl. -Gan.  Rec.  126,  no.  9; 
cf.  BAA  1886,  July,  p.  25. 

n.  pr.  f.  P  541,  M47,  voj.  B5;  for  cpds.  v.  infr.  ['ny 
(«-»Aa  Cur.  Spic.  *fiD),  a  goddess;  cf.  eOaos  W  2209, 
a  Bov  W  2039,  /3(o\a0r)v  ('nyt>12*,  v.  Baeth.  Beit.  88), 
vaaeaOrj  (v.  ZMG  1881,  740  f.)  ;  cf.  Ph.  nyi)  ? 
Nnynnt  above,  and  v.  nnynny. 

n.  pr.  (“A.  is  for  us,”  cf.  joys'll  ?)  P  Sach.  8. 

“ancient,”  pi.  p—  P  64. 

n.  pr.  Praa  ii.  144,  nos.  1  f. 

n.  pr.  P  30a> 2,  Schr.  21 ;  voj.  b1,  raa  ii.  24,  no.  3. 

n.  pr.  1  P  983. 

n.  pr.  (“'y  rewards”)  P  322,  662  ;  P  Eut.  15,  16,  29; 
Cl.-Gan.  Rec.  125,  no.  7  ;  RAA  ii.  24,  no.  3;  Gr.  eq. 
aOrjaKafios,  cf.  Baeth.  Beit.  158.  Simonsen  cites  Qpyny. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  122  (cf.  jit  “black-red”?),  cf.  aOapov  W 

1966® ;  cf.  perh.  jZc-,  Ass.  atarsamain  (KAT  148).  Or 

✓ 

cf.  mny  and  v.  infr. 


96 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


nrymy 

nnymy 


manny 

K^ny 

^ny 


a 


ks 

ks 

*SKS 

pKS 

*o:& 

sons 

n(i)s 

ns* 

-pms 

rvTis 


n.  pr.  52  (“  'y  strengthened  him,”  cf.  rymn^y  Cl. -Gan. 
Sceaux,  no.  16). 

n.  pr.  P  34,  Gr.  eq.  (a T€p)yar€i;  cf.  arapyarr]  W  1890 
(also  arcpyart?,  aTTayaOtj).  Goddess  freq.  associated  w. 
Hadad.  Lat.  Derceto,  Talm.  Nnyin  (Ab.  Zar.  llb);  cf. 
my"iny  on  a  coin  ZMG  vi.  473  f.,  v.  Schiir.  Gesch.  ii.  12, 
n.  39,  Baeth.  Beit.  701,  120,  n.  3;  ZMG  xxxix.  421, 
ZA  xi.  246  1 
n.  pr.  Praa  iii.  28,  no.  3. 

n.  pr.  f.  P  Sach.  5;  for  “  V  lifts”?  cf.  vacreaOrj 

W  2230,  or  v.  infra. 

n.  pr.  (cl  fc^ny  ?)  Sin.  262a. 


£ 

part.  Tl'ND  “and  there  is,”  2 1 14,  N  37,  D'pD  N  310, 
nn33D  N  63  (“and  his  daughters,”  a  error  for  i),  1E0y*?S 
“and  to  'y,”  N  153.  In  Z  freq.  NHS  “and  it,”  b18,  TDD 
H3  (dub.  H13  ib.15  1E0BD,  ib.21  m»ND).  8?rD^B  H31 

(v.s.  pro). 

(=  a)  Zp22  nn  ND  “and  Hadad,”  h33  KB.  (Perh.  = 
“  here,”  cf.  Hb.  ns). 

Sin.  291,  cf.  P  75. 

the  month  Haoicfn  (Oct.-Nov.),  146,  col.  I1,  1513. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  314,  420,  429,  479;  cf.  Ibn  Dor.  322. 
n.  pr.  (Pers.  ?)  98. 
pi.  p—  “  bodies,”  Pf39. 

21 12,  error  for  JOBD. 

(M.)  >  &0-|B(DK),  "P  165.  No.  KH3K,  cl  Dn.  xi.  45, 

v.  No.  ZMG  xxix.  433. 

n.  pr.  1482. 

“mouth,”  dub.  in  Z,  “)T  DQ  Zh29,  DD2  H30  (v.  JB)  ; 

w.  suff.  'a  Zp11  ?  'na  Nerab  24  (v.  riDD). 

n.  pr.  138  b4. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  489®. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


97 


n.  pr.  1548. 


n.  pr.  (Eg.  pi-unsh  “dog”  ?)  145  b2,  cf.  149  d2. 

•  •  •  • 

’SIS 

n.  pr.  Sin.  214  ? 

NH3 

n.  pr.  (“snare  ”)  P  61  b1  c1. 

“ins 

“tribe”  (lit.  “thigh,”  cf.  j^Li,  v.  ZMG  xix.  639),  P  323, 
33b> 2,  123“  (Ox.  I)6;  P  Schr.-S.  I5. 

nns 

(1)  n.  pr.  146  A  211. 

nns* 

(2)  “satrap,  ruler”  (Ass.  pihatu  KAT  186  h),  pi.  cstr. 
'ns  Zp12. 

D’ns 

n.  pr.  1441  “belonging  to  Khim,”  cf.  on  Gr.  pap.  freq. 
7ra^o(v)^t,  Tra^y/ir)*;,  al. 

*sns 

n.  pr.  1481,  cf.  on  Gr.  pap.  7raa7ri9. 

£33* 

Eg.  “one  devoted  to”  in  cpds.  infr.  cf.  Hb.  “IS'DIQ, 

jna'ma. 

•  •XDS 

n.  pr.  frag.  1485. 

'DXDS 

n.  pr.  (“...  of  Isis”)  147  a  l4,  1486  ;  'DNIOB  155  b4. 

HD1D3 

n.  pr.  (“...  Osiris”)  138a4,  v.  nDBQ. 

DltflDS 

n.  pr.  (“...  Hnumu  ”)  155  a4,  cf.  Gr.  7 rtTexvov/jus,  v. 

BUnDN. 

n-  Pr«  (“•••  Harpocrates  ”)  138  a7,  147  b  l11;  cf.  Gr. 


'£33 

7T€TCap7TO^paT^9. 

n.  pr.  1481. 

V£33 

[n*]D3 

IDES 

n.  pr.  1546. 

“free,”  Pfi4  >  Reck.  [}]l01  “  veteranus.” 
n.  pr.  (“...  Tumu  ”)  155  b2. 

flDDS 

jnn33C23 

n.  pr.  (“...  Ammon”)  126. 

n.  pr.  149  B-C2.  Masp.  rds.  P\ — ,  and  cf.  Gr.  irtTeve^niO^ 
(“whom  Nefhoth  counsels”),  Eg.  petenofihotpu. 

irotas 

n.  pr.  (“devoted  to  the  gods”  ?)  138  b8. 

p3DD3 

n.  pr.  (“...  Sobku  [the  crocodile]”?)  147  b  l12;  cf. 
Gr.  TTtTtOr  OVAL'S. 

HDDS 

n.  pr.  113“>9;  for  '“iDKDD  “...  Osiris,”  cf.  Gr.  7T€Too-ipi<?, 
and  v.  HD1DD. 

[S’lVsDB 

“workshop,”  Pf28;  Gr.  eq.  7rarT07ra)Xeia. 

c. 

7 

98 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


n.  pr.  (“...  Ptah  ”)  134;  cf.  Ph.  nnsmy. 
n.  pr.  (“...  of  Turn”)  147  b115. 

YB  “misfortune,”  Pmio4  ?  v.s. 

ITS  n.  pr.  Sin.  593,  626;  cf.  Ar.  ,>Li. 

DISC'S*  n.  pr.  Philip,  erased  in  P  157,  v.  Yog.  ad  loc. 

“angle,  corner,”  146  b3u  ? 

~ah&  n.  pr.  frag.  2155. 

(1)  “middle,”  145  d8  2 

(2)  “half,”  Pf331,  Abi  Kyintf  F339  ;  cf.  A?  Dn.  vii.  25. 

NirmnVs  “presidency”  (irpo&pLa  w.  Aram.  term.  cf.  niJDnODtf), 
Pf1.  Cf.  MH  pima,  7rpoeSpoi,  and  for  ^5  =  n  Mil  “IlAb 
(7rpaT7]p),  nOJoSa  (frumentarium). 
frag.  3231  .  .'Di  N'T. 

Kn*/?B  “miracle,”  1292;  cf.  ? 

XnSs  n-  Pr*  P  224  =  “soldier”  (Gr.  eq.  gtt  po.T  kottjs')  ;  cf.  ZMG 
xviii.  85,  n.  1,  xxiii.  287 ;  >  “worshipper,”  see  below. 
nnSs  f.  “worshipper,”  1414,  v.  TtyDJ. 

aSs  *  v.  Pa ‘el  (cf.  “to  deliver,”  pi.  w.  suff.  Zp2. 

D^'Sb  n*  Pr-  P  224,  DJ—  P  Eut.  31  ;  cf.  Praa  i.  77,  no.  2. 

Gr.  eq.  (fn\(e)Lvo<;. 

“iDfiSs  n.  pr.  ( (JnXo7raT(j)p )  Pf2. 

DpSs  n.  pr.  (Felix)  Pzmg  xviii.  101  (Dp  —  $,  but  cf. 
DIDDDO). 

n-  Pr-  (“Bilat  gives  brothers”;  B.-ahi-idini  [Edd.])  80. 
Zh3  =  nt  +  HO  +  “and  that  which,”  cf.  13  l^i,  and 


pa 

pa 

no^a 

n&a 

p 

DaillS 

isrus 

1D33 


v.  s.  B. 

(1)  n.  pr.  1224  =  (2)  ? 

(2)  n.  pr.  1483,  Gr.  eq.  ^a/xtrts  “belonging  to  Amen.” 
n.  pr.  147  b  l13  =  “crocodile,”  v.  CIS  ad  loc . 

n.  pr.  (“belonging  to  Mut”)  146  a  24. 

prep,  “before,”  in  (i.e.  so  No.  for  DD1  v.  ns) 

Zh29>  30. 

n.  pr.  62;  Ass.  eq.  pani-nabu-temi ;  cf.  ZA  iii.  17  f. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  386 ;  cf.  Ar.  Q,  Ibn  Dor.  252. 

n.  pr.  ( a )  the  elder  son  of  *?np  Zp5,  h1j  14  etc.,  ( b )  the 

younger  son  of  nVQ  Zp1.  Deriv.  dub.  h  cf.  Panammu 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


99 


nSds 

“JK'DDS 

Vys 

NS3 

'S3 

IN'SS 

7X'S3 


VS3 

ms 

P‘2 


* 


of  Sam’al  in  inscriptions  of  Tiglath-Pileser  iii,  v.  KAT 
253. 

“engraver,  carver,”  229,  230  [288],  N  55;  pi.  X'—  N  910. 
n.  pr.  (Per.  ?)  1482. 

v.  “to  make,”  138  a1;  ^ysrp  1 5 14.  qsy  more  usual, 
n.  pr.  Sin.  405,  484,  v.  infr. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  25,  47a,  184,  313  +  12  t. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  195,  347. 

n.  pr.  P  Eut.  10;  cf.  <£ao-a/?aAos  (Miller  121),  </>ao-i/?aAo9, 
ff>acrau\r]  (We.  Held.  1). 
n.  pr.  Sin.  (27),  81,  227  +  7  t. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  425. 

v.  pVDJV  “to  remove,”  Nab.  Pet.5;  cf.  Barth,  ad  loc., 
p.  277. 


Ipfi*  v.  “to  command,”  Nab.  Pet.4  pi.  jllpSS  (w.  end.  3)  “and 
they  commanded.” 

‘D'ibttHpS  n.  pr.  Sin.  431  1 

Ssmtopa  n.  pr.  21,  Ass.  eq.  paqana-arbail  (“he  trusted  in  A.”). 
HH^pIp^  n.  pr.  (Eg.  =  “gift  of  P.”)  1504. 

H'Tfi  n.  pr.  Sin.  537,  alt.  1TVJ. 

n.  pr.  N  1 01,  Sin.  226  ;  cf.  Ar. 
n.  pr.  Pertinax,  P  Cl. -Gan.  J.As.  1888,  t.  xi.  p.  303. 
n.  pr.  60,  alt.  W12. 

n.  pr.  ZMG  xxiii.  273;  cf.  <£apva/o7?,  <£apmKas ;  Pers. 
Jins  (Saturn),  v.  Lag.  GA  13,  n.  1,  and  cf.  ms. 

v.  “to  look  after,  guard,”  P  Eut.  413. 

n.  pr.  P  753,  M.  rds.  TiS;  Sach.  (ZMG  xxxv.  737)  “pIS, 
cf.  supra. 

a  measure,  weight,  Zp6  ;  cf.  D“iQ  Dn.  v.  25. 

v.  “to  pay,”  Impf.  JDS'  Pf232  ;  ptcp.  jns  Pf229’  47 ,  F330  ; 
Kins  Pf238>  44. 

“  purple,”  Pfi10  (cf.  Talm.  X*YS“I1D,  Syr.  ,05CL2)5(L£)  al.)  ? 
n.  pr.  Sin.  497. 

“a  half  (mina),”  10;  cf.  Ass.  parasu,  v.  No.  ZA  i. 
414  ff. 

n*  Pr*  (Pers.  ?)  1002. 


yr& 

nns 

ons 


7—2 


100 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


ms 

p^s* 

p^s 

b^s 

nnsns 

frnins 


nns 

iyns 


K¥* 

ttx 


rrii 

aro^* 

•  .-ra 
rm 

HX 

ptf 


p*7¥ 


n.  pr.  loc.  P  Eut.  423,  <E>opa#o<;  nr.  Tigris;  cf.  I^’P'7!  rn$ 
Join  a  10a  -  O.T.  “w  ninrn. 

(1)  v.  “to  explain,”  1  S.  npt^S  Pf326  ;  cf.  %D.m  £i. 

(2)  “explanation,”  Pf35. 

vJ 

v.  “to  explain,”  1291  (cf.  ;  *  £),  Ass.  pasaru)  ? 
v.  “to  search,”  Zp8  ;  or  “to  destroy,”  cf.  Ass.  pasasu. 
n.  pr.  149  d2.  Rd.  JYnnns  “gift  of  the  infant  god” 
(Eg.  petehroti)  ? 

N  51  'Q  DHM  (Anzeig.  d.  phil.-hist.  Classe  d. 

Wien.  Akad.  Dec.  17,  84,  p.  7,  n.  1)  “  nummularius,” 

cf.  ]5oA^)  “  table.”  [If  n.  pr.,  cf.  Ph.  fcOHS  n.  pr.  ?] 
v.  “to  open,”  2113;  reflex,  nflBIV  2262. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  675. 


¥ 

in  Old  Aram,  instead  of  Vi,  v.s.  “IV,  KV“). 
perh.  divine  name  (shortened  from  xvV"l  q.  v.  1)  in 
XVr IDK,  KVDTl,  and  in  mny,  v.s.  N&. 
v.  “to  wish,”  Impf.  KIV'  N  105  (cf.  N3V.'  Dn.  iv.  14), 
N  74. 

n.  pr.  Praa  ii.  25,  no.  4. 

“matter,  thing,”  P  l4  m  (Hal.  n»i>D3,  Mel.  Epig. 
p.  103),  55  rVQV  (n  difficult),  PEut.  414 ;  pi.  Nmnv  (i.e. 

«W??)  p*6. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  597. 

pi.  cstr.  TQY  “all  ornaments,”  137  b1,  or  “  bundles”; 
cf.  Hb.  Dflpav. 
n.  pr.  frag.  244. 
n.  pr.  f.  156  b,  v.  pv. 

n.  pr.  P  753’5.  M.  rds.  nn  (*13)  “freed-man,”  1.  3,  ^pnn 
1.  5  (for  'v)  ;  v.  his  Beit.  p.  29. 

n.  pr.  f.,  156  a  (cf.  in  Ph.  CIS  i.  273,  o-a8Sa  CIO  4519); 
V.  rm,  xmx  (for  n  and  :  cf.  nbV,  vqVd..,  \ -  etc.). 
For  *n  as  n.  pr.  dei,  cf.  Baeth.  Beit.  59  f.,  Baud.  i.  16, 
n.  2  ;  Bloch,  5.  v.  IV. 

(1)  “justice,”  cstr.  Zp19,  b4;  w.  suff.  *-  Zp19,  b5,  n- 
145  a6,  Zp11;  cf.  mpt  ('V  also  in  Pal.  Syr.). 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


101 


pns* 


pipnv 

xnpns 

xrns 

xmns 

DlS 

xns 

ins 

lans 

KTS 

xts 

its 

p's 

nnSs 

D  *7S 

xoVs 


xhdSs 


(2)  v.  (a)  “to  sanctify,”  i(pp)^  113®’ 11  ?  (b)  pl¥K  N  93 
“one  legitimate,  authorised,”  'X3  N  N  53,  92,  10fi,  ll2, 
123,  136,  157,  223  ('2  distributive) ;  w.  suff.  n-  N  232,  278  ; 

DH—  N  172.  Elative  form  (Jjjuet),  v.  Eut.  Nab.  p.  37  ; 
CIS  ad  201,  cf.  in  Lihyan  (DHM  Ep.  Denk.  16,  18). 
n.  pr.  (“  R.  is  just”)  73.  perh.  divine  name,  cf. 
Baud.  i.  15,  n.  1,  Moore,  Judges  15  f. ,  Kerber  39  f. 

(a)  “justice,”  145  d4,  w.  suff.  'np"l¥  Nerab  22.  (b)  “gift,” 
113®’  15.  Wi.  (AF  183)  cfs.  Bab.  sattukku  “temple 
gift.” 

n.-  pr.  f.,  P  Cl. -Gan.  Bee.  132,  no.  14;  cf.  aa&Sados 
W  2044. 

x  0  «<» 

pi.  “springs,”  Nab.  Pet.2;  cf.  Ar.  and  v.  Barth, 

ad  loc.  p.  275. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  22®,  88,  89,  120,  290®,  589  ;  cf.  Ar.  w>3-o, 
v.  )2)*  pK. 

n.  pr.  138  b1,  146  a  24,  1 51 J  (Maspero  cfs.  Eg.  Zeho,  Gr. 

Tews,  rayws). 

✓  x  x 

n.  pr.  Sin.  417,  cf.  Ar.  and  (Q). 

n.  pr.  Sin.  645,  cf.  Ar.  1 

(1)  n.  pr.  P  762. 

(2)  “meal,  food,”  Cil5. 

X  X 

n.  pr.  1583,  cf.  ju Us,  A-wo. 

x 

n.  pr.  loc.  Sidon,  146  A  22 ;  “iftn  “wine  of  S.” 

n.  pr.  loc.  1822  'V3  H  Dnnnbs  r6x  [=  O.T.  n^p  (Deut. 

iii.  10),  mod.  a.swAo]. 

n.  pr.  dei,  113®’  2> 3,  w.  Xi"6x  1143-4;  ¥  JT»3  113®’ 12, 
v.  Baeth.  Beit.  80  f.,  Hoff.  ZA  xi.  244  f. 

“image,”  1641,  Nerab  l6;  P  31,  M131  and  Pf330  ; 
cstr.  P  91,  38,  Mull.  1,  J.  As.  Yog.  1  (written 
Praa  ii.  144?),  w.  suff.  n—  Nerab  l3,  22;  pi. 

Pf331,  emph.  X'bttV  PI1,  PM31,  Wr.  p.  31 ;  cstr. 

PF329. 

“female  image,”  P  131  (w.  nn) ;  cstr.  P  291, 

Eut.  20,  Cl.-Gan.  Bee.  122,  no.  4,  voj.  A31.  For  use 
of  fern.,  cf.  Wr.  Apoc.  Acts  1,  49,  1.  2  ;  DHM 

Ep.  Denk.  71;  Ph.  rbvD  (v.  Bloch) :  cf.  use  of  tf-Qp 


102 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


Chwolson,  Grabinsch.  122,  162;  and  of  1  Kings 

xv.  13,  and  v.  DHM,  YOJ  vi.  321. 

n-  Pr-  (“'¥  delivers,,)  113a9’11’21  b;  cf.  Hb. 

Ass.  salm-musizib  Rawl.  366,  32  f.,  nabu-sizibanni  KAT 
421 ;  v.  s.  D 

HKftV  11  •  pi*.  Sin.  378  ? 


‘"QJtt  P  130  1 

n-  Pr*  286,  Sin.  6,  207,  219,  438;  cf.  Ibn  Dor.  29. 

n-  Pr*  P  701,  Put-  19,  raa  ii.  24,  no.  3,  Wr.  PSBA,  Nov. 
1885;  Gr.  eq.  (raeSei. 

“grief,”  pi.  w.  suff.  145  d8;  (cf.  Syr.  “disgrace”?), 
n.  pr.  P  (101),  ll2,  122.  Gr.  eq.  <re(f)<j>epa  (hence  perh. 

V  =  “bird,”  cf.  Hb.  iTVsV) ;  cf.  otherwise  Gr. 

(m.)  aacfiapa,  and  v.  Cl. -Gan.  Rec.  23. 

“adversary,”  pi.  *n¥  Zh30  (cf.  “Ill  Dn.  iv.  16). 

Knnx  n.  pr.  N  153,  Nab.  Pet.1  “sepulchral  chamber”;  cf.  Hb. 

O'H'tf  Jud.  iv.  46,  49  ( v .  Moore  ad  loc.),  1  S.  xiii.  6  ( v . 
Dr.  ad  loc.) ;  cf.  Sab.  m¥,  nmv  CIS  iv.  I4  [eq.  word  in 
Eth.  =  “  conspicuous  building,  or  upper  chamber  ” ;  v. 
ZMG  xxiii.  274  for  n.  loc.  crapiya,  and  cf.  Barth,  Hebr. 
loc.  cit.  p.  273;  Hoff.  ZA  xi.  322  f.]. 


•  •  • 

nap 

Sap* 

Sap 


For  interchanges  v.  s.  J,  D.  p  for  Aram.  (=  ^ 
in  p“iK,  Np',  'p"i;  cf.  Wr.  SG  63.  Perh.  due  to  foreign 
influence  or  represents  a  hard  ]),  v.  Zimmern  Sem. 
Spracli.  §  9,  n. 

n.  pr.  f.  N  102  ( v .  i:'p),  (233). 

(1)  v.  “receive,”  reflex.  ^apnb  Pf337.  Also  caus.  “to 
place  before,”  ptcp.  N^2pD  NT1MK  Pzag  “the  i$4Spa  in 
front.” 

(2)  nnx  ^2p  Pm 33  ?  “  he  received  (or  the  receiving  of) 
a  wife.” 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


103 


mp 

"Dp* 


Kiap 
•  •  •  • 
map 

K&np 


onp 


N'mp 

xnmp* 

trip* 

Slip 

P^P 

Dip* 


(3)  “because,”  108,  Pf10;  w.  h  1643,  cf.  Sab.  m  'b 
(J.  As.  1883,  t.  ii.  p.  255),  Syr.  VlCLQQ.1^,  and  B.  Ar. 
(cf.  Bev.  ad  Dn.  ii.  8). 

w.  NT  P712  ?  used  with  reference  to  a  sepulchral  monu¬ 
ment,  perhaps  to  some  regulations  concerning  it  (cf. 

1). 

n.  pr.  dub.  Sin.  407,  alt.  I^p  (rd.  imp  ?). 

v.  “to  bury.”  Impf.  “Qp'  N  23,  pi.  p—  N  14°.  Inf.  “QpD 
N135  (v.  s.  xnm).  Reflex.  "Qp]V  N  174,  'n  ib.,  pi.  jnnprv 
2033,  N84;  in  N  123,  2 42  fern. 

“grave,”  Zp21,  1841,  N  21;  w.  suff.  mip  145  d7. 

dub.  N  275,  cstr.  “grave,”  cf.  ]Z5clojD. 

PM53  pn  NOHp  rii'lNI  Nil  “...  precede  here”  ? 

n.  pr.  Sin.  384  (pr.  Ar.  inscr.);  alt.  cf.  Jjudt  Ibn 
Dor.  244. 

“before,”  Zp21.23,  651,  P222,  1233,  130,  146  a26;  Sin.  320, 
327,  437  ;  w.  p  132,  1413,  N  382;  w.  suff.  TilDHp  Nerab 
22;  DIT'Dlp  Nab.  Pet.2;  '"IE)  Dip  “before  that,”  etc. 
PF215  (alt.  [Dj]n?D  'p). 

“former,”  NDRD3  'p  Pf9  ;  pi.  NWp  *0331  (K^lp  cf.  Dn. 
vii.  4)  Pf4,  f.  emph.  Xn'Olp  (cf.  NHVpIP  Dn.  vii.  8)  1585. 

“former  state,”  w.  suff.  nnDnp  |D  rDDVll  (“he  made 
it  better  than . .”)  Zp9. 

v.  “to  sanctify,”  caus.  pf.  1  S.  nDHpN  P711.  Reflex. 
DH(pDD)  “sacred  to  ...,”  165. 

n.  pr.  320  e. 

in  *om3  jl'plp,  P  Cl.-Gan.,  J.As.  1888,  t.  xi.  p.  303; 
Gr.  eq.  koXw  /I^punos  “  a  colonist  (Lat.  colonus )  of 
Beirut.” 

v.  “to  arise,”  pf.  Dp  Zp2> 8,  h3,  N  145;  w~.  'j'y  Zh30  (cf. 
1  Kings  xiv.  4);  pi.  IDp  Zh2.  Pa‘el  “to  strengthen, 
continue,”  N  310,  85 ;  w.  suff.  inD'p  P  793.  Caus.  pf. 
Dpn  Zp18,  D'pn  161,  l2,  D'pN  P  132,  1  S.  nftpn  Zh1,  DD'pK 
Pf310;  pi.  iD'pK  1641,  P  53,  1 02,  Mi33;  in  P  294  D'pN  w- 
pi.  subject  written  defectively  ( v .  s.  l).  Impf.  [D'jp'1 
1442;  w.  suff.  nniD'p'1  Zh28  (v.  ZMG  xlvii.  104,  n.  2). 


104 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


»1p  n.  pr.  Sin.  128,  cf.  IDIp  pN.  The  only  Ar.  analogy 

•  ^ 
is  . 

TiyDlp  n-  Pr-  (“'P  helps”),  Sin.  423;  cf.  KocraSapos  Miller  117, 
jJUDp  infra.  Dip,  a  divine  name,  cf.  Koayrjpos  ib.  181, 
'fiapaKos  (CIG  5149),  '/3avos,  p.aA.a^os  etc.;  v.  Baeth.  Beit. 
Ilf.,  WRS  Kins.  296,  We.  Heid.  77,  170;  No.  ZMG 
xli.  714. 

bntp  n.  pr.  P  131,  Sach.  12  (M36  for  “DTE?  ?). 

nip  n.  pr.  181,  cf.  ^J.5,  Ko£e  Jos.  Ant.  xv.  7.  9 ;  v.  ZMG  iii. 

200  f.,  and  references  s.  ViyDIp. 
pnp  n*  Pr*  P  Eut.  1. 

pLDp  “small,”  137  b6. 

^O'tOp  n.  pr.  Sin.  451,  cf.  Hb.  |T?i?n ;  alt.  ITDp. 

StOp*  v.  “to  kill,”  pf.  2  m.  S.  rfco(p)  145b4;  Impf.  bop'  145 Ah, 

c4;  cf.  Syr.  v.s.  n^Dp. 

ntOp  “  centuria,”  Pzmg  xii.  214;  cf.  Syr.  (“  centu¬ 

rion  ”). 

DVp*  “patron,  supporter,”  w.  suff.  n—  P  265,  275  (Gr.  eq. 

\  0  *x  P 

TTpocrrary]^)  \  cf.  Syr.  p0Q.-k.-O . 
lO^p  n-  Pr-  Sin.  47*. 

Q'p  “authority”  (cf.  E'i?  “edict”  Dn.  vi.  8),  N  23,  145  ;  CIS 
here  and  in  2034  “firm,  standing,”  i.e.  D.'i?,  or  D*i?  (cf. 
np*p  Dn.  iv.  23). 

n.  pr.  Sin.  323,  353  ;  cf.  Kaiap,os,  and  dim.  Koep-os  J.  As. 
1881,  t.  xix.  487. 

)yp  n.  pr.  f.  2072  (=  N  102  where  mp),  N  82 ;  Sin.  4,  53 

’  0  s 

(>  l^po),  557,  561  ;  cf.  Ar.  n.  pr.  fam.  ^>3,  Hb.  Pi?, 
I  Pi?.,  v.  ZMG  xxxi.  86,  CIS  iv.  p.  20. 

fcOO'p  pb  “smiths,”  P  233  (cf.  Syr.  |  >  i  *  o) 

nD'p  Caesar,  1702  (alt.  "i¥>p,  cf.  Ar.  j*cu3),  Pf212,  F34;  “iDp 
P  153,  253,  pi.  p-  Sin.  457. 

Vp*  “city,”  pi.  nTp  Zp4»  15  (also  in  Ph.  cf.  Wi.  AF  305). 

n.  pr.  N  1 2°,  cf.  Ar.  ^**3  and  perh.  Hb.  tjbp,  v.  Grun. 
71  f.,  and  Wi.  AF  2nd  ser.  p.  62  (’98). 
n&'p  n-  pr.  N  25,  34  (v.  Eut.  Nab.  p.  76,  n.  e/3). 

W*p  n.  pr.  249. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY.  105 

'nSp 

146  A  l2,  pi.  }-  ib.3  “wine,”  cf.  Eg.  kelbi  <  the  name 

1 

unbp 

bbp 

of  some  measure,  cf.  wJIS  “mould.” 

n.  pr.  Claudius,  Pzmg  xviii.  101 ;  defect.  D'lSp  1701. 

“jar,”  146  a  l3,  pi.  j—  ib.  a25;  cf,  Eg.  qerer  (qelel), 
Copt.  KaXwX  “small  utensil,”  Ar.  <x\$,  Syr.  ]AXq..O. 

wbp 

D*pt7p 

“colony,”  P  152,  244,  Gr.  KoA.coj/cta ;  cf.  Syr.  l-iuJQ.Xo.il) . 

X 

n.  pr.  Pf212,  cf.  Gr.  /aAi£  (alt.  Dp^p  Vog.). 

1  1 
op 

■j  0  7 

44  (w.  n^D)  “  aromatic  cane  ” ;  cf.  Syr.  1 

wntup 

“centurion,”  N  201 ;  cf.  Syr.  jjQ^JLiD . 

Dip 

JICSDp 

“penalty,”  21 18;  N  38,  128. 

n.  pr.  loc.  'p  '1  KHE)  Pf219  “a  Modius  of  'p”  [but  ^a^CO-C, 
koo-7-05,  a  kind  of  plant,  Low  305],  v.  ptDDpH. 

iO'Dp 

n.  pr.  Cassianus,  P  274. 

jniDp 

n.  pr.  (“'p  gives”)  N121;  cf.  Koo-varavos  Miller  109; 
v.8.  YWDIp. 

"iDp 

nyp 

v.  s.  ID'p . 

v.  “to  carve,”  Nab.  Sach. ;  cf.  Ar.  j.s.3.  Alt.  iyp,  cf. 
jk.x$  “to  place,  set.” 

*oxp 

PF33,  'p  '1  XDH7D ;  Gr.  eq.  to  too  crcfrdKTpov  reA.os  “the  tax 

*  0  0  7 

paid  for  slaughtered  victims”  “butcher”). 

VXD 

n.  pr.  of  a  god,  'p  nStf  1742;  so  'p  165,  or  <  the  clan 

XDXp 

(^Jl)  of  'p ;  Nab.  Sach.  (where  it  is  apparently  wor¬ 
shipped  under  the  form  of  an  ox).  As  n.  pr.  man,  1704 
(a  priest  of  l"1'5**),  1822,  1831 ;  v.  Baud.  ii.  238  ff.,  Eut. 
Nab.  p.  63. 

“cell,”  3361 ;  cf.  perh.  Ar.  SjLas,  v.  ZMG  xl.  735. 

•op 

145  a3  ..ip  pH'  iy;  “city”  (Hb.  HHp  or  Ip  M.  I24),  or 
=  Hb.  T&  «  wall  ”  ? 

tnp 

(1)  v.  “to  call,”  145  c2  (PM85);  qp  (in  nb  Ip  “he  called 
to  him”)  P  925,  1113;  w.  suff.  nmp  P  795,  ii'lp  P  1035. 
Imp.  np  1704.  Ptcp.  NipnD  P  172,  36b>  *,  n—  P  341  ; 
K1p[n»]  P  662  (m.),  1582  (f.). 

[N]1p 

2T 

(2)  n,  pr.  P  913. 

v.  Pa.  “to  offer  up,  bring  near,”  1141,  1741,  3361 ;  2  S. 
ami p  1502,  pi.  nip  1572;  P123«  (Ox.  l)3.  Hi.  mpn 
754. 

'  106 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


aoip 

xnmp 

mp 

nmp 

imp 

DtODDIp 

xnp 

Dip 

DiyfiDIp 

XDD'p 

wS'DD’p 

Wp 

H-D'p 

Nf'D'p 

l^p* 

mp* 

nV'np 

Niiinp 


n.  pr.  f.  P  1051. 

“a  drawing  near,”  nDIX  Dip  'p  1221;  cstr.  rQlP  123 

(cf.  Hb.  n?li?  Ps.  lxxiii.  28). 

n.  pr.  Pf323,  cf.  Kovp/3ov\wv,  Lat.  Corbulo. 

n.  pr.  Nab.  Sach.,  cf.  Kapaov  W  2160a. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  582. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  9C>  d,  58,  500,  616;  cf.  Ar.  I  (and  Hb. 

nip,  nip?).  c 

KpaTLaTos  “best,”  P  241 ;  DID—  P  26l,  pi.  XD—  P  284, 
X1D—  P  293  [x—  reps.  Aram.  pi.  e,  XI—  Gr.  pi.  oi;  cf. 
Syr.  pi.  in  o  =  oi  No.  §  89,  and  v.  s.  X'DDDD  (1)]. 

Pf313,  pi.  (of  XJVlp  ?)  “  villages,”  or  cf.  ywpa  “  country  ”  ? 

n.  pr.  Zp5,  h1’  13,  al.  ;  cf.  Paphlagonian  KopvXos,  or  n. 
loc.  KopvXeiov  ? 

(=  Lat.  carrus)  w.  “  cart-load,”  Pf;  Gr.  eq.  yopcos 
KappLKOS. 

n.  pr.  Crispinus,  P  154;  Gr.  eq.  KpicnreLvos. 

(1)  “archer,”  Pzmg  xii.  214  (cf.  M7i);  cf.  Syr.  |^y .m  n 
(v.  Derenb.  Hist.  Pal.  14,  n.  1). 

(2)  in  [xd]d>P  Pf332  “  pure  salt  ”  ? 
n.  pr.  Sin.  599. 

in  PSach.  1,  n.^pi  nn'nYrn  ni...  ? 

(cf.  “old”?)  Praa  ii.  94,  no.  3,  H  XSWp 

i 

XT1.  Perh.  name  of  some  relation, 
v.  “  collect,”  ptcp.  pi.  422  p&ypD  X'iyD\ 

“  bow,”  w.  suff.  n—  Zh26>  32. 

“slaughter,  killing,”  Zp8;  cf.  ^Dp. 
n.  pr.  268  ?  (cf.  *j)05Ajk_.Q,  /a#apw86s  ?). 


"1 

The  diacritic  dot  which  distinguishes  1  (5)  from  1  (?)  in 
Syr.  is  first  found  in  the  Palm,  inscriptions  where  the 
"1  alone  is  so  marked.  P  123a  (Ox.  1),  the  most  ancient 
of  the  religious  inscriptions,  is  noteworthy  for  the  omis¬ 
sion  of  this  distinction. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


107 


m* 


am 

xm 

Sam 


Nn'Dxm 

on 

anim* 

*nran 

rvom 

onom 

ym 

JW 

mjnn 

anjnn 

ran 

n:n 

nn 

bn 


(1)  “a  chief,  great  one,”  1113  J;  voc.  1521  (rd.  N2"l 

or  •Q“l);  cstr.  v.  t6'n,  amt^D,  pity,  Nnw. 

(2)  “great,”  N2"),  P  33b>  2,  492,  135  ( v .  2ty),  w.  n!"6n 
146  b43;  pi.  pin  Zb10>  13,  P  Eut.  414;  cf.  PTOI  Dn. 
iii.  33. 

(1)  “great,”  v.  sujjt. 

(2)  “mistress,”  w.  suff.  Tin")  146  b44,  ron—  150'» 7. 

n.  pr.  (“El  is  lord,  or  great”)  N  27 13,  283;  161,  33,  1833, 
305,  PWr.  1 ;  cf.  pa/3l3r]Xo<s  Miller  117,  182;  cf.  ^>N2“iD, 
N  213  '1  “the  god  of  R.”  (perh.  an 
ancestor  of  the  fam.  or  tribe,  cf.  WRS  Sein.  68,  n.  2). 

n.  pr.  Pf10  “great  palace”  (cf.  Pers.  serai  “palace”)  or 
Rab-Osiris  ;  Gr.  eq.  pa/3acreipa,  cf.  ? 

“ten  thousand”  (cf.  12“}  Dn.  vii.  10),  P  175. 

pi.  cstr.  2D  )12“l  PM271  “manifold  good  things”  (cf.  I)?"! 
Ktb.  Dn.  vii.  10). 

n.  pr.  P  129. 

n.  pr.  287,  cf.  pa(3L/3r]Xos  We.  Held.2  5  ?  Alt.  '“l. 

“captaincy,”  P  55  (K)m'ty  '“12 ;  Gr.  eq.  <jvvohiapxr)s  (M. 
rds.  r02“l). 

n.  pr.  (“  chief  eunuch  ”  h)  386. 

(1)  “a  fourth,”  11;  f.  cstr.  flJDI  Zp14,  pi.  cstr. 

Np“lK  *yn  Pb4;  cf.  Hb.  V2“i}  Syr.  ]ac>o5. 

(2)  y22  *02  “  children  of  fourth  generation,”  Nerab  25 ; 
cf.  Hb.  Q-m 

n.  pr:  loc.  P  674. 

1601  mng.  dub.,  perh.  ££a  square  stele,”  or  cf.  PxO? ;  v. 
No.  ZMG  xli.  722,  WRS  Kins.  292  f. 

n.  pr.  Pzmg  xii.  214,  P  Mull.  4;  cf.  Rubatis  (CIL 
viii.  2515),  and  v.  Baeth.  Beit.  159. 

n.  pr.  (“  one  born  in  month  Ragab  ”  ?)  Sin.  220. 

“wrath,”  Zh26;  cf.  131  Dn.  iii.  13,  Syr.  ]l~^o5. 
n.  pr.  f.  (Regina)  PWr.  S.-Sh. 

“foot,”  w.  suff.  n—  Pm186.  *PJ"I  ^>2*?  Pfi2’5,  F231  “for 

J  / 

every  one”;  pi.  p-  Pf230  used  of  slaves  (cf.  Ar.  ^J.^).  ' 


108 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


fctyjn  n.  pr.  N  402,  cf.  Ar.  j  (Q). 

[m*  v.  “to  pledge,”  Impf.  N  2e,  35,  165,  295,  Imp.  ):m  43  a2, 
Refl.  jmiV  Nil4.  =  Ar.  (the  Aram.  eq.  is  less 

common,  v.  s.  pS^D). 

KITH  “breath,  wind,”  Pans5  p3E5>  '"). 

inn  n-  pr.  1821,  1842;  cf.  pouatos  W  2034. 
n*  pr.  N  1210,  152.  Abbrev.  fr. 

xp&n  v.s.xwmi. 

I  0 

^',“1  n.  pr.  f.  N  43  (cf.  Ar.  2ls\j  “pity”),  alt.  isn. 

'p*")*  v.  “to  run,”  pf.  1  S.  n^"i  Zb8  <  “to  help”;  Ass.  risu 
(Wi.).  For  n¥"i1  Hal.  reads  n¥“in  “energy,  eagerness,” 
cf.  p-nn  Pr.  x.  4. 

XT*"I*  “evil,”  pi.  psn  M.  on  P  156;  cf.  SjJj,  pi.  Ujj  ?  v.  Yog. 
Syr.  pp.  17—19,  ZMG  xviii.  81.  Of.  pan. 

EH*")  (1)  154'  Dm  ?  V  difficult,  perh.  belongs  to  1.  6 

ad  Jin. 

EH*’)  (2)  n.  pr.  P  83  (so  Eut.  No.  Mord.),  cf.  sim.  in  Sab. ;  v. 

J.As.  1883,  t.  ii.  264,  Ha].  Mel.  Ejrig.  104. 

Dm  (3)  “  lover,  friend  ” ;  cstr.  noy  '"1,  ^i/\o7rarpis  N  25  and 
freq. ;  w.  suff.  [>]—  P  621 ;  n—  P  244,  265,  D'm  (cstr.) 
P  l3,  157. 

a&m  w.  p  “through  love,”  P  184. 

nDm  P  67 1  *033  “  N.  friend  of  Julia  ”  ?  (cf.  n£>m  mi17  ?). 

Mfc'n'l  “merciful,”  P  752,  123a  (Ox.  I)1,  written  NtDm  P  933. 
Also  in  Sab.,  cf.  J.As.  1883,  t.  ii.  264. 
n.  pr.  Roman  ?  (Riborus,  Ribodus  ?),  P  Sach.  64 ;  alt. 

on'-. 

n.  Pr-  3 1 63,  cf.  oryx  (Hb.  081)  ? 

Dm  “chariot,”  '"I  '^yn  Zp1". 

n.  pr.  Zp22,  h2’  18,  b5,  -  “chariot  of  El”;  or  for 
“Cherub  of  El”  (Sacli.),  Hal.  IH  91  “  monture  d’El”; 
cf.  mm. 

XD1  n.  pr.  255  ( v .  1D"DN). 

n-  Pr-  (“El  is  high”)  Sin.  414. 

n.  pr.  318  (cf.  Ar.  “the  archer”?). 

n.  pr.  (“  R.  gives”)  117. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


109 


T> 

Ti 

x"$n 


nnjn 

vsi 

XS*f 

Ksn 

Vx3“i 

*?nxs“i 

XHSI 

’3*1 

'31* 

nsi 

xxn 

xm* 

xttn 


xsm 

'pi* 

Sx3'p*i 

Xtn 


n  pr.  (=  NK^“D"|  “the  lofty  one  bears”?)  P  Sach.  13;  alt. 
N^pn. 

(1)  n.  pr.  (“friendly”)  P  162,  224;  cf.  Hb.  'VI  1  Kings 
i.  8  (?);  Gr.  eq.  pacuov  [in  P  224  Gr.  yXt oSwpov];  cf.  povaiov 
W  2034;  for  ijn  n.  pr.  dei,  cf.  Kerber  72. 

(2)  147  a  l6,  a  weight;  cf.  ib.  13  ? 

n.  pr.  P  139  (cf.  supr .),  M.  rds.  '“i  “be  gracious  to 
the  shepherds”;  v.  1V"lX,  K¥“l. 

n.  pr.  P  Cl. -Gan.  Bee.  120,  no.  2  (cf.  H-11H  Hb.  “friend,” 
B.  Ar.  “desire”)  ;  cf.  payeros,  Miller  181. 

n.  pr.  P  Sach.  10,  rd.  inBI;  and  cf.  Hb.  na*i. 

(1)  v.  “to  heal,”  in  KEH13,  KSHDBP,  and  infr.  ;  cf. 
pLffmOrjs  ('nyBT)  “Ate  heals,”  J.  As.  1881,  t.  xix.  487. 

(2)  “physician  ”  ?  P  984  (Syr.  prefers  N'DK  9-  v.). 

n.  pr.  (“  El  heals  ”)  P  Eut.  422 ;  Gr.  eq.  pe^eXov,  cf.  Hb. 

n.  pr.  (“ Bol  heals”)  P  662,  P  Eut.  10,  16;  Gr.  eq. 
peef)  a(3<i)Xos. 

n.  pr.  P  814,  alt.  S1QT  (m). 

(1)  n.  pr.  1543. 

(2)  v.  “to  release,”  Hiph.  Zp8. 
n.  pr.  (“my  healing”  ?)  51. 

(1)  n.  pr.  Pm  67  '"l. 

(2)  v.  (=  Aram.  ?  “be  gracious,”  P139  (M.); 

v.  N^JTl  (perh.  n.  pr.,  cf.  N1V"1  infr.). 

n.  pr.  Nil1.  Cpds.*l¥Tl!l,  WlO'n  (Syr.  HofF. 

Ausz.  n.  159)  show  that  it  is  a  divine  name;  cf.  perh. 
Risuil  (=  ^NIVT)  OIL  viii.  10525,  and  v.  Eut.  Nab. 
p.  47,  ZMG  xli.  712,  We.  Held.2  59,  n.  1  (Held.  54, 
62,  n.  1).  See  also 

Pf32  (Schr.)  '"1  N‘D1E0  “a  firm  law”;  cf.  Ar. 
v.  “  to  take  pleasure  in,”  Impf.  »pT  w.  2,  Zh18>  22. 

n.  pr.  (“  El  guards,  or  is  a  guardian,”  cf.  Ar.  w**S)) 
N  277. 

“head,”  Pfi41  ?;  cstr.  i£nn  P  222;  w.  suff.  n^“l  P  55 
(but  v.  M.  ad  loc.),  pn —  P  Eut.  413,  424  ;  cf.  SI  K\S"l, 
Ph.  ^(k)i,  MI  85n,  Syr. 


110 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


W*  (l)v.  “  to  be  allowed,  have  power  ”  ;  Impf.  'bY  Zh27’  23. 
Hal.  cfs.  Eth.  'D“i  “to  do.” 

(2)  adj.  “allowed,”  N  124,  pi.  N  143;  cf.  W.  Aram. 

(3)  n.  pr.  P  136. 

n.  pr.  Zh2,  cf.  Hal.  IH  92. 


& 


& 

)•••& 

m* 


b)w 

bm 


x'ixw 

mw 

nnnxsr 


& 

For  exceptions  to  the  equation  &  =  0  =  2,  v.  "ibX,  nbtf, 
3GY,  KGj6b,  'DGJ\  For  interchange  of  sibilants  cf.  esp. 
DHM  in  YOJ  v.  5  ff. 

=  Bab.  s  =  Ass.  s ;  D  =  Bab.  s  =  Ass.  s ;  cf .  however 
3nTN‘,  K3JD,  “WK“ID.  V  (i.e.  b)  =  D  in  NmjO,  KIJIEPO, 
KGny,  (pLry,  kitw),  nn^?,  dig?, 

Kinb,  IbSED  ?  G?  rel.  pron.  in  “GGlNb,  pinG?  ? 

abbrev.  of  ^pty  153  a  35,  pi.  j^Jpb  642. 
n.  pr.  frag.  301. 

in  NtPr6tf,  XG^ny  =  in  KGfD'n  (v.  NV)  a  divine  name, 
cf.  We.  Heid.  62,  Baeth.  Beit.  89,  Kerber  49  f.,  YOJ  iv. 
339 ;  or  abbrev.  of  Kfcyft&y  cf.  Praetorius  ZMG  xxviii. 
512,  Baeth.  Beit.  303,  and  v.  NG2HDN. 
n.  pr.  “  of  'X,”  Nerab  21  ? 

“corn,  grain,”  Zp6. 

Sheol,  145  b6,  cf.  Hb.  Syr.  (No.  §  84). 

n.  pr.  P  173,  182,  953,  Gr.  eq.  aeeiXa  (cf.  arjaXXcv;  W 
2298  ?);  cf.  perh.  $b''&  Meg.  16a,  onX as  and  perh. 

infr. 

v.  “to  ask,”  138  a4’6?  Impf.  SngY  Zh23,  ^KG^X  ib.12,  w.  je> 
of  person  asked.  Aph.  “to  borrow,”  Impf.  ^NGY  N  94. 
Ptcp.  pass.  nSsbD  1514,  “res  mutua  ”  (edd.). 

“remnant,”  137a4;  v.  nnNGy. 

Sin.  617  fcOKGP 'B  “13  'B  YD“I  (possibly  the  name  of  some 
trade  or  calling). 

“remnant,”  cstr.  Nab.  Pet.3;  cf.  "IXG^. 
n.  pr.  2351. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


Ill 


(l)n.  pr.  P  31,  Gr.  eq.  craftas ;  cf. 

X1W*  (2)  v.  “to  carry  off,”  v. 

raw*  v.  Pa.  “to  praise,”  nnrQt?  149  bc5;  3  f.  S.  w.  suff.  3  m. 
or  rd.  mn3^  1  pi.  w.  suff.  3  m. 
n.  Pr*  f-  P  Eut.  43. 

tons?  Shebat,  the  eleventh  month,  February,  N  4®,  P  673,  B9fl. 

(1)  v.  “  to  carry  off,”  2  m.  S.,  JV38P  145  b5. 
aW  (2)  “captives,”  coll.  HK'  '&  Zp8;  pi.  jonE?  145b5. 

(3)  n.  pr.  N  171,  PWr.  3,  1.  2;  cf.  tra/lao?  W  2101,  and 
v.  >nn^. 

n.  Pr-  PSchr.  10. 

jn w  “seven,”  1701;  V)  “TO  1823,  njDEPI  px>y  N  305,  njde? 
P  ll3.  'jnt?  “seventy,”  Zp3;  v.  |JDtP. 

+  0  * 

)  yiw  n.  pr.  Sin.  412;  cf.  Gr.  <m/3aos  freq.,  Ar. 

H5,  'W  mi  “daughter  of  S.  (cf.  Hb.  or  seventy 

years  old,”  v.  ])2W. 
v.  “to  give,”  Pmi34;  cf.  Ar. 
r\2W  n-  Pr-  P  32,  v.  infr. 

'niW  n*  Pr-  Sin.  370  (cf.  Hb.  1,  fem.  rVIHE?  Chwol.  49. 
Abbrev.  to  nik>,  '1E5>,  cf.  (Ta/3/3as  (Jos.  Ant.  xv.  7.  10), 
cra/3/3(uo<;  (ib.  xiii.  2.  4) ;  /3ap-aaJ3l3as  (Acts  i.  23), 

Sheb.  17b,  v.  Dal.  143,  n.  10). 

MW  137  a4  “  erring”  'l  (cf.  Syr.  }_>— u--*);  or  —  “greatly”; 

v.  'M. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  398a. 

*}W*  “much,  many,”  pi.  f.  (i.e.  I^b)  P  15s,  (i.e. 

p|b>)  pF4,6-  cf.  tjcq  and  v.  fcOE^  supr. 

^ W  n-  Pr-  f-  P  491,  561,  57‘,  60  ;  mis4,  Schr.-S.  5,  cf.  perh. 
and  v.  'JVIdWk. 

**"0^  n.  pr.  P  1246  (cf.  “tree,”  or  “to  send”  ?). 

rnw*  v.  “  to  cast  down,”  ptcp.  pi.  (i.e.  HE^P)  pn^D  P“)3S 
PF39. 

nw  n.  pr.  P  Eut.  6,  10,  11,  raa  ii.  24,  no.  3;  cf.  craSSa 
W  2562,  -ios  W  2197,  v.  Baeth.  Beit.  294. 

VjTT  W  n.  pr.  314,  alt.  Dp"lEJ\ 


112 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


inw 

tip 

rw 

saw 

pIP 

tip 
nip 
tip. . 

NTP 

STP 

otp 

wanp 

nrip 

nnp* 

nrip 

..&p 

Ntop 

ntop 


map 

wp 

mt^tp 

nrvp 


n.  pr.  PvOJ.  bi,  v.  DHM  loc.  cit.  p.  13  ;  and  cf.  crarpaTry]^ 
(J.  As.  1895,  t.  v.  p.  171). 

n.  pr.  (prob.  Pers.)  1112.  Acc.  to  Hal.  rel.  pron.  =  nt ; 

cf.  J.As.  1896,  t.  vii.  546. 

frag.  353,  cf.  IjoiCD  “witness,”  v.  *jnD  ? 

n.  pr.  Nerab  l2,  p"iT^  priest  of  'ty(“the  moon,”  cf. 
l5axCD);  cf.  ib.  I8,  21’9. 
n.  pr.  166,  alt.  i*w. 

n.  pr.  320  d. 

v.  “to  set,”  pf.  Zp1’  10 ;  w.  suff.  'IW  Nerab  23,  riD^ 
113a>4  (or  perh.  from  2);  1  S.  DD^  Zp20.  Impf. 
1!D'85>(*)  149  a2. 

P  155  'W  21  “chief  of  the  market”  (possibly  connected 

w.  Hb.  ngp  2i  ?). 

“millet”  ?  Zp6  nsm  1!)V)  ntW. 
n.  pr.  1542,  cf.  <ropos  J.As.  1881,  t.  xix.  487. 
frag.  P  108,  M.  rds.  mity  “he  has  drunk  of  it.” 
n.  pr.  fam.  Pm  55. 
v.  s.  IT 

n.  pr.  138  a,  cf.  crty/xo?,  J.As.  1881,  t.  xix.  16. 

n.  pr.  147  bI10,  alt.  'nnfc^ ;  cf.  cray7r7/pis. 

(1)  26‘  “bribe”  (=  Hb.  irr,  Syr.  ? 

(2)  v.  “  to  destroy,”  Hi.  nn^n  Zh29. 

(3)  “destruction,”  Zp7,  h27,  nnn^  (w.  suff.  ?)  Zp2.  Acc. 
to  Hal.  “fault,  injury.” 

n.  pr.  frag.  2852. 

n.  pr.  Praa  ii.  95,  no.  6. 

“writing,  contract,”  67,  N  245,  Pf8;  cstr.  N  73,  pi. 
pen n  “writings  of  the  objects  dedicated,”  Nab. 

Pet.4;  cf.  Syr. 

Zp6,  the  name  of  some  kind  of  measure,  alt.  m*V  “...  a 
fourth,”  Wi.  AP  106. 

n.  pr.  260,  cf.  Ar.  Yak.  iii.  1 9 5 1 . 

n.  pr.  Sin.  87  for  ? 

n.  pr.  (loc.  ?)  1861. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


113 


'W 

NflD'S? 

kjtw 


inw 


row 

mnot? 


X*W 

nW* 

rb&* 
i  b& 

ab& 

xrb& 

£2^* 

pts1^* 

h& 

n&’bt? 

ubw* 

dS^ 


n.  pr.  101,  cf.  Syr.  Wr.  Syr.  Mart.  p.  «_»,  1.  2 

fr.  end,  cf.  ? 

“treasure,”  113®’  18  N2^D  'T 'E£>,  cf.  ]AV)  >, CO  <  cf.  Bab. 

x 

simtu  (“the  king’s  crown  estate,”  Wi.  AF  184). 

“  caravan,”  P  5  5,  74;  V  *33  P  43,  53,  Eut.  422;  nmi 
P  55;  'E^  21  (Gr.  eq.  (rwoSiapy^s)  P  62,  72  ;  cf.  Syr. 

12*1.. 

n.  pr.  N  212. 

n.  pr.  P  371,  533,  126,  M73  (Eut.  20);  Gr.  eq.  o-o^aia?, 
cf. 

*  0  *  J 

n.  pr.  f.  N  181,  cf.  Ar.  <Lu£*>. 

P  15b  JVrV2l2>  or  'pep  “quietly,  still”;  >  error  for  JV^DE^, 
n'lrhiw  “prudently,  with  skill”;  cf.  ZMG  xxiii.  284  f.; 
v.  mn'2T. 

J  J 

n.  pr.  Sin.  651,  =  Ar.  w.  accidental  repetition 

of  o. 

P  Eut.  1  “  re  warder,”  epithet  of  ;  cf.  crayp^Aos 

We.  Held.2  5,  and  Sab. 

(1)  n.  pr.  1854,  cf.  NUKES'?  Alt.  *6^  (Vog.). 

(2)  v.  “to  neglect.”  Reflex.  Nab.  Pet.4,  cf.  |2TJV, 

s.  )2T.  No.  Wi.  rd.  fcOESTP. 

v.  Impf.  2  S.  n^n  145  c6  “to  stand”? 

“  limb,  portion  of  the  body  ”  (=  Ar.  jJlw),  N  36. 

n.  pr.  Praa  i.  77,  no.  13,  ii.  76. 

+  0  * 

Pf343  “  weapon”  (^Aw),  or  cf.  Ar.  ~s. 

v.  “to  rule,”  pi.  pf.  1965. 

“rule,”  w.  suff.  DPI-  1965  ;  cf.  Syr. 

n.  pr.  Nil1,  244;  cf.  o-vAAaios  Strabo  vi.  4,  23,  Ar. 

0  J 

H 

* 

“peaceful,  or  perfect,”  f.  1414? 

n.  pr.  N  124,  cf.  aeXefJLaOr]  Wetz.  148. 

(1)  v.  “to  complete,”  Aph.  pf.  3  S.  f.  P  954. 

(2)  “peace,”  freq.  esp.  in  Sin.  At  beginning  of  inscr. 
cf.  1521,  253,  N  291,  56;  at  end,  137  a7,  164,  229,  230; 

291,  al.;  Sin.  274  bftW  ! 


c. 


8 


114 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


(3)  n.  pr.  1541,  cf.  Gr.  aaX/xov,  aoXegov ,  tao’A.c/xos ;  v. 
ZMG  xxxv.  737. 

•  •  n.  pr.  frag.  168  (Sin.  12  for  ?). 

n.  Pr*  f-  P  273,  671,  Wr.  1,  Eut.  14;  cf. 

Hb.  K&fe,  Gr.  croA^s,  al.  (Dal.  117,  n.  3). 

“  man  of  Sin.  544  ? 

n&Se'  (1)  n.  pr.  f.  Sin.  600,  cf.  traXtofirj  Mark  xv.  40,  f.  □  '172’ 
Shebi  36°  (Dal.  122,  n.  1). 

r\tbw  (2)  nn1?^  n^pn-0  532  “perfect,  or  whole  weight’’  (v. 
n^pn  d). 

(1)  n.  pr.  gent.  N  29,  44,  93,  383,  ol  %aXdfiioi;  v.  Hal. 
REJ  1885,  no.  19  f.,  p.  260,  Targ.  'tvchw  =  Hb.  ‘O'p ;  v. 
Merx  Targ.  290,  and  v.  s.  1D23. 

(2)  n.  pr.  N  13"  (f.),  339 ;  Sin.  115,  164  +  6  t. 

’IJbSs?  n.  pr.  f.  PWr.  PSBA  Nov.  ’85,  p.  30. 

Vtfaty  n.  pr.  Sin.  12,  and  Sin.  544  (>  nIsSe’  ?). 

nbzbw  n.  pr.  (“submission  to  rbn,”  cf.  WRS  Sem.  79  f. ;  v.  also 
Dal.  122)  P  72,  541,  Miill.  1;  Gr.  eq.  (aaXgaX)Xa Oos ; 
cf.  Hb.  al. 

pbty  n.  pr.  N  561,  652;  P33“-!,  49',  76';  Schr.  I3,  RAA  ii. 

^  o  s' 

95,  no.  6;  cf.  Ar.  aoXagavg^  J.  As.  1881,  t.  xix. 

1 1  ;  Ass.  salamanu  (a  Moabite  king),  KAT2  440  f. ; 
ZA  xi.  246  f. 

inJkSE'  n.  pr.  Sin.  474  1 

n  rhv  n.  pr.  f.  P  Sach.  4,  voj.  a  1 ;  cf.  AVn\  m  Addai  94,  and  v. 
Sach.  ad  loo.  p.  737. 

•  n.  pr.  Sin.  469  ? 

‘‘three,”  3C;  pi.  \vhw  (so  in  Ml)  “thirty,”  Zb2;  v.  nbn. 
Dfey  (1)  56  (a  seal),  abbrev.  ? 

D&T*  (2)  “name,”  freq.  OOP -patf))  P  741,  791  (v.  ZMG  xxii. 
106,  n.  3).  Hence  “  descendants,  progeny  ”  (cf.  De.  xxv. 
7),  w.  suff.  n—  113a> 14.  So  perh.  w.  suff.  j—  Nerab  l10. 
2D  “good  name.” 

n.  pr.  loc.  (“left”1?)  Zb2’3’17;  the  district  at  the  foot  of 
the  Amanus  mountains,  v.  Bab.  and  Or.  Bee.  Ill,  p.  3 ; 
Wi.  AF  1  ff. 

pi.  p-  N  38  “curses”  (cf.  Bar.  ES  10). 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


115 


w 

pet? 

ive^ 

w 

pep 

*oap 

yep 

N'nyep 

*?w[yep] 

pyep 

;yep 

nes? 

niep 

N'snep 

map 

pep 

pep 

pep 


Zp6,  cf.  sammu  “  vegetables,”  Wi.  AF  106. 

n.  pr.  P  652  ;  Gr.  eq.  o-a/xoviyAos  ;  cf.  VOJ  iv.  338. 

n.  pr.  fam.  (=  py»S5>  V)  P  155,  M49  [cf.  |jakl^  Cur. 
ASD,  p.  012),  1.  10  fr.  end;  Wr.  Syr.  Mart.  p. 

1.  15]. 

Zh6,  p“)S  “land  of  'Wn  (“garlic”  =  jlDoZ,  Hb.  D-lt?). 
n.  pr.  2362. 

n.  pr.  2053  (=  N  8  D n'»y)  1 

n.  pr.  143  ? 

n.  pr.  (sum[u]kin)  71. 

“oil,  fat,”  P  146. 
v.  “  to  hear,”  145  b1. 

P  145  ? 
v.  bfcOW. 

n.  pr.  P  132  (written  I^DE^),  1142,  129  ;  Schr.  4,  Eut.  21, 
Pzmg  xviii.  110  (v.  xxiii.  290) ;  Gr.  eq.  avpuovov ,  v.  infr. 

n.  pr.  Praa  ii.  23,  no.  1  ;  N  276,  v.  iroyJO. 

n.  pr.  Zp16. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  2,  6,  26  +  20  t. ;  cf.  Ar.  w. 

n.  pr.  Pm  13  ( v .  ZMG  xxxviii.  587);  for  E^DE?  v.s.  K2“i 

(!)• 


/  J  ^ 


n.  pr.  Sin.  86;  cf.  Ar.  v.  Sab.  yfiW  DHM  Ep. 

Denk.  7. 

(1)  v.  “to  serve,”  P  153,  173  (J.  As.  Yog.  25) ;  v.  NE^TXTl. 

(2)  “  the  sun,”  KpiD  “  the  rising  of  the  sun,”  Zp13’  14. 

(3)  n.  pr.  dei  (“the  Sun”),  Nerab  l9,  Zp22,  h2>18;  P  85, 
l23a  (Ox.  l)6,  M692  v  ;bn  (v.  bn) ;  P 108  («)nt5  xnbs  nh, 
Gr.  eq.  yjXito  7rarpa)a>  kcu  i-rryKou)  dew  (but  v.  M .Beit,  adloc.)’, 
P  135  Km  pE?  E?£E^  “S.  our  supreme  lord.”  'EJ>  personal 
name  PM51,  54.  For  V  (in  Sab.  a  goddess,  cf.  DHM 
Ep.  Denk.  p.  60)  v.  We.  Held.2  60  ff. ;  cf.  crapo-cuos 
W  2007,  af3Sa(rap(To<s  W  2569  ;  -  m  m Cur.  ASD 
143,  163;  Ass.  samsi  (Ar.  “queen,”  v.  KAT2  25530) ; 
v.s.  KE^  and  cf.  E^EE^b  and  infr. 


8—2 


116 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


n.  pr.  331,  P  754,  Schr.-S.  6;  has  caused,”  cf. 
cra/xi/aKepa/xos  (Jos.  Ant.  xviii.  5.  4),  crap-o'iyepap.os  (CIG 
iii.  4642,  cf.  o-a/u/4  (Strabo  753,  §  11),  v.  also  Cur. 
Spic.  77. 

n.  Pr-  (“  S.  my  help  ”)  86. 

n.  pr.  113“> 16,  cf.  «  queen  ”  ?  ref.  to  Y enus  ( v .  Lag. 
GA  17);  cf.  Neubauer  Stud.  Bibl.  i.  224,  n.  5. 

43  a3,  mng.  dub. ;  cf.  crarSaA tor,  used  here  of 

an  article  given  in  pledge. 

(1)  “sleep,”  Zh24. 

(2)  “year,”  PI3G5Q  'W  “year  by  year,”  113a’20;  cstr. 

N  l4,  Sin.  319,  457,  463,  P  75  and  freq.  Once  n&*  (cf. 
in  Ph.)  113a> l.  Emph.  Krot?  KD  “in  this  year,”  145  b5. 
PI.  pfi?  N  307,  1966;  p£y  145  a9;  cstr.  w  1966. 

n.  pr.  (“of  ?)  Nerab  l1.  [Is  it  sin-zir-ibanni  “Sin 
created  posterity  ”  ?  He  was  a  priest  of  infe?  “  the 
uioon.”] 

“sharp,  bitter,”  NITH  Pmis5. 
n.  pr.  311  b1,  cf.  Ar. 

* 

n.  pr.  Sin.  162,  —  1 

n.  pr.  88  (Sin-sar-usur  “  S.  protect  the  king  ”). 

'byzbti'W  n.  pr.  Sin.  401  >  ’W  in  this  and  cpds. 

infr.  —  “fortune.” 

n.  pr.  Sin.  87  (>  ntan'P),  155,  177;  Nab.  46,  +  c.  25  t.  ; 
cf.  Ar.  aAJI  Peril.  N201,  alt.  (v.  V^DEOt^); 

cf.  aA.1I  v. 

n-  Pr-  231,  253 ;  Sin.  186,  191  (il^)  (281),  671,  P  243, 

0  * 

Gr.  eq.  aoaSov;  cf.  Ar.  ,  and  peril.  aaeSos  J.  As.  1881, 
t.  xix.  15. 


nSw 

rop 

nit? 


ptt> 

1£W 

n’DJK’ 

‘IX'lDiE’ 


'nycy  n.  pr.  P  Eut.  30,  v.  RAA  i.  77,  no.  3. 
'irh'iyw  n.  Pr-  Sin-  410,  412,  416;  v.  ’n^iOVK'. 
rSbiyw  n.  pr.  Sin.  425.  For  q.  v. 

n.  Pr-  Sin.  295,  537 ;  cf. 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


117 


1W 

vyp 

myp 

pys? 

Dinys? 

■nap 

.  •  Kp£? 

nS'p^ 

Spe? 

i^p* 

p&y* 


nns?* 

rw* 


irn^ 

njna> 

*on^ 

may* 


V.  s.  1  w. 

.  j 

n.  pr.  1 764  '{?  n?N  (alt.  Ill'yjp,  iyw,  cf.  w~o«^)  “the  god 
of  the  Sa‘idu”;  N  121,  231 ;  cf.  aocuSos  W  2196,  troeSos 
freq. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  558. 

“barley,”  Zp6»  9,  pi.  WtytP  421,  ny&P  Zh6,  v.  m/r. 

262,  381,  391,  [40];  “barley”  (or  perh.  “taxation,”  cf. 
jjuj  ;  v.  ZA  iii.  241). 
n.  pr.  loc.  145  c5. 

(1)  v.  “  to  merit  well  of,”  w.  b ,  P  45,  64,  pi.  l"iQ^  P  l4. 

(2)  n.  pr.  136. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  148  (cf.  <Ta.7r<£eipa,  cra<£</>',  MH  XTDt?,  v.  Dal. 
130,  n.  1). 

n.  pr.  273  ? 

n.  pr.  f.  fD^D  'W,  Hebr.  xiii.  (’97)  278. 

(1)  v.  “to  bear,  take”;  ptcp.  fc&pt?  Pfi47,  F328  ;  pi.  fem. 
ppty  H  KD ’O'hv  F327  (acc.  to  Schr.  =  “burden,  toil”). 

(2)  “shekel,”  Zp6 ;  pi.  J-  13,  14,  43 A4. 

v.  supr. 

“prince,”  w.  suff.  1  pi.  fcO"l  pt?  WDW  P135;  M.  rds. 
pD,  cf.  P  23,  25. 

v.  “to  drink,”  M.  on  P  108  for  "nit?  q. v. 

y.  “to  liberate,”  Impf.  rw  145a7.  Reflex,  ptcp.  w. 
pron.  ri3KmnSP!D  Oil.6  “I  am  taking  my  meal,”  cf. 
;  >  mnra  DHM. 

\L 

n.  pr.  Pmi33,  cf.  •  Hoff.  Jul.  281  ? 

n.  pr.  P  ll1  (129,  130);  cf.  ZMG  xii.  214,  where  Lt.  eq. 

0  y  J 

suricus ;  cf .  Gr  tropouyos,  crcopcuyos,  Ar.  . 

n.  pr.  244;  cf.  Ar.  duvJj. 

/• 

“strong,”  1442;  cf.  Syr. 

i 

“beam,  rafter,”  w.  suff.  pn—  P  84,  Eut.  1;  cf.  Pal.-Syr. 
(Schwally). 

n.  pr.  32,  i.  q.  flpP,  v.  VOJ  v.  6. 


118 

ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 

VST 

“IT* 

n.  pr.  Sin.  141  (ib.  198  ?) ;  cf.  Ar. 

v.  Aph.  “to  set  firm,”  Pf321,  f.  rnt^N  Pf3  (of  a 

decree) ;  pf.  pass.  "itPK  (i.e.  “IP'N)  f9  ;  cf.  Syr.  | ,  more 

gen.  ^ 2ZT . 

n.  pr.  105,  cf.  Hb. 

xnT 

it 

“feast,”  146  a 22’ 3;  cf.  *|Z.Oi.-». 

(1)  “six,”  'm  \'uhv  1966,  N  107;  V)  pymx  1 96s.  m  rb 
31 1  a2  “  to  him  six  times  ”  (supply  tb>W  “  peace  be  . . .”  ?). 

xnv  P  84,  F21. 

nsr 

xw 

(2)  Sin.  567,  ...  H  T\W  b'D  ? 

“  drink,”  Zh9. 

“  winter,”  Zb18  ;  cf.  Hb.  Iflp  secondary  form  for  'bt  Ar. 
Syr.  |oAro. 

* 

w* 

v.  “to  weave,  bind  up,”  Impf.  2  m.  Tl^D  Zh17,22  (perh. 
3  S.  f.  “[the  soul]  shall  drink...”). 

t|JT* 

ptcp.  “an  associate,”  Pf229  ?  in  Syr.  s^LoI^mSd . 

n 

n 

gen.  =  Gr.  0,  but  cf.  fcOmDN,  N'rTO,  K'naD',  Nftan;  n  inter¬ 
changes  w.  D  in  nS'np ;  does  not  suffer  metathesis 

in  reflex,  forms  of  pT,  ;  pref.  n  =  Eg.  fern,  in  Nnn, 

Dnnn,  'ann,  KfiaDn.  n  final  in  f.  names;  also  in  masc. 
cf.  n:HN,  man,  nana,  nmn,  nn'te,  nTiy,  n^>ny, 
mnjmy. 

xn 

divine  name  in  Nn  pi  “priest  of  Ta,”  Sin.  223®  (cf. 
ZMG  iii.  212)  <  tfnaro  (q.v.)  “priestess.” 

Kan 

n.  pr.  f.  141 x,  147  bi8.  Eg.  ta-bai  (or  tobi,  tabit,  Masp.) 
“she  who  is  of  the  spirit.” 

cnn 

n.  pr.  f  2154;  perh.  deriv.  fr.  01^  »  1 

“straw,”  Pf29. 

n'Kjnn 

adv.  “by  service,”  Pf220  ;  cf.  M zdZ  “to  demand,”  or  rd. 
kjdiv  (v.s.  nyn)  ? 

ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


119 


n.  pr.  Zb3>  6  “iD^D  'n  Zp13>  15 ;  cf.  Hb.  "iDX^Q  rtan 


Kwn 

(once  *1D^£),  Ass.  tukulti-habali-sarra.  [The  third  king 
of  that  name  is  the  one  referred  to,  he  reigned  743 — 
727  b.c.] 

“guild,  corporation,”  X’O'p  H  'n  P  233;  cf.  rayfxa,  jln^.Z. 

-on* 

v.  “to  sell.”  Impf.  "15 XT’  Pf330  ?  cf.  Syr.  j^jZZ]. 

x-un 

“  merchant,”  Sin.  208 ;  pi.  ib.  P  43,  Pf7,  F316,  i.e. 

( v .  s.  x). 

xn“on 

“commerce,  business  transaction,”  Pf  325  ;  cf.  Syr. 

xnn 

?  in  'n  Pm 90  “  may  he  be  praised  wholly  ”  (Ed.). 

•  •  • 

mn 

n.  pr.  (goddess  of  spring,  cf.  HsZ)  xnn^X  'J“l  N  403; 
cf.  ,  alt.  mn,  cf. 

imn 

n.  pr.  loc.  Tadmor,  P  223,  284;  “icnn  Pfi1,  F213’ 30  etc. 

“man  of  Tadmor,”  P  202,  36“>  3>  b> 2,  P  Eut.  27;  pi. 
xnmn  Pzmg  xviii.  101,  no.  17,  xncnn  ^2  Pf225  (Pm34). 

D’Din 

n.  pr.  N  29’,  cf.  Gr.  6e(o)8ocnos  Strabo  566;  alt.  D'D'in, 
cf.  Oapo-eas,  depcrrjs  % 

sin* 

v.  “to  return.”  Impf.  nin1*  N  264. 

Non 

tnw 

gent.  278,  cf.  ^1)1  in  Yemen  (Yak.  i.  901). 

“bullock”  (?)  P  145,  n.  pr.  N  212;  cf.  freq.  Ar. 

xmn 

onnn 

KOinn 

1481  ?  (Ledr.  xrvn  “butter,”  cf.  1Zo]Jj). 

n.  pr.  f.  142,  Eg.  ta  +  Habis  “the  light,”  cf.  D2nniy. 

“border,”  Pf312’20;  pi.  w.  suff.  rp—  Pfi2;  cf.  Hb.  Dnn 
“1T3  “boundary  line  of  Gezer,”  Chwol.  2. 

'snn 

n.  pr.  f.  141  “she  who  is  of  Hapi,”  cf.  masc.  pahapi 
freq.  in  Eg. 

,  nnn 

“  underneath,”  'n1?  |E>  Pf4,  cf.  A-k»A^>  ^Ad„ 

“roof,”  P  86  (M.  >  b^DD),  Eut.  23;  w.  suff.  pn—  P  936 

S'a'n 

(>  /{?[DT0]),  Eut.  1  ;  cf.  Syr.  U-iZaZZ. 

X 

(1)  Pm 45  “pn  pvn  Tl  “H.  is  removed  (jbl'')  from  the 

Wn 

way  ”  ? 

(2)  n.  pr.  Praa  i.  75,  no.  3 ;  v.  Wr.  PSBA  Nov.  ’85,  74  f. 

120 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


'3'n 

DVin'n 

*nmi 

n.  pr.  loc.  Pm  68. 

n.  pr.  (Theodorus,  0eoSwpos)  P  Sach.  1. 

“tower”?  w.  N1  163b;  cf.  ^0^12,  Oearpov  >  “the 
setting  up  of  a  column”;  cf.  Targ.  “YlD'. 

D'n* 

“servant,”  w.  suff.  n—  Sin.  431.  In  cpds.  =  “devotee” 
(but  see  WRS  Sem.  80,  n.  3).  Among  cpds.  cf.  Lat. 
Timagenes,  Timolaus  ( v .  Mord.  Beit.  ap.  no.  3). 

..O'n 

xa'n 

N'^’D 

n.  pr.  frag.  Sin.  320,  552,  v.  infr. 

(1)  n.  pr.  loc.  113a>3;  cf.  Hb.  NO'ri. 

(2)  n.  pr.  (“servant”)  P  6,  701,  113,  Mi27,  za3;  Sin. 

(3332)  494,  *02  (M52  ?).  For  another  meaning  v. 

nSxon 

,irbnb‘T\ 

YOJ  iv.  333,  n.  2. 

n.  pr.  Sin.  591  ;  cf.  Sep. aAAov  W  2020. 

n.  pr.  N  71,  Sin.  282,  294,  331,  374  +  7  t.  ;  cf.  Ar. 

0  * 

<UJI  and  Timolaus,  son  of  Odainat  and  Zenobia  ;  v. 

Vog.  Syr.  p.  31. 

*WH£>\n  n.  pr.  Sin.  499,  v. 


lfi'n 

n.  pr.  1573,  1762,  2031,  243,  259,  276,  318,  3383,  and  v.s. 
IJD'PI.  Sin.  604a  (“men  of  Taimu”);  cf.  Gr.  dai/xos 
(ZMG  xv.  443). 

wn 

n.  pr.  of  a  god,  P  34,  Gr.  eq.  Tv^r]  Oaiycios,  M88,  RAA  ii. 
95,  no.  7.  Perh.  nisba,  cf.  AOrjva  Totjumq  W  2345 ;  cf. 

’nSa’n 

We.  Heid.  25,  61.  As  personal  name  cf.  Pm  50  ? 
n.  pr.  Sin.  278. 

gent,  “man  of  Teima  ”  (2031),  N  42  (222);  pi.  f.  Nrvoft'n 
N82. 

niya'n 

naya’n 

xxD'n 

n.  pr.  Sin.  646 ;  for  JVVJJD'n  ? 

n.  pr.  P  1244,  Gr.  eq.  6a i/xoa/xeSos ;  cf.  Sab. 

n.  pr.  P  33b> 2  (49),  v.  NY. 

ixT&'n 

n.  pr.  P  61,  33b> 2,  824,  985,  156,  M73,  Schr.  I4;  cf. 
l^^DoZ  Hoff.  Ausz.  21,  n.  159;  v.s.  N1Y1. 

xwn 

n.  pr.  P  341,  Schr.-S.  6.  Perh.  T\  “servant  of  the 

sun”  (Baeth.),  but  v.s. 

*n'r\ 

so  No.  ZMG  xlii.  474  for  fcO'n;  perh.  “leading.” 

wn 

bn* 

n.  pr.  240. 

“hill,”  '8n  pi.  cstr.  Ill1  ? 

ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


121 


xSn* 

la^n 

nSn 

n*?n 
•  •on 
Nan 
\s\an 
nan 


nan 

NJian 

Waan 

l^aan 

xnaan 

’ian 

N’aan 

Dan 

Nan 


nan 

span 

’an 

faSn 

Ninon 

nayn 

N^sn 

xnan 

n'axn* 
•  •an 


y.  “to  hang.”  Impf.  2  m.  S.  w.  suff.  '  nAn(n)  145  c, 
w.  3  epen. 

n.  pr.  321,  344,  348;  cf.  Hb.  '$B. 

(1)  “  three,”  314  dis  (?);  ]'1D'p  nn1?!!  Sin.  457  ;  HND  nbn 
P6‘;  nn’pn  J'b!?k  N  97;  prim  196s. 

(2)  “a  third,”  N  153;  pi.  pm  pnbn  “two-thirds,”  N  154. 
1522,  for  xon  “whole”  ? 

n.  pr.  f.  P  Eut.  43. 

n.  pr.  145  c5,  cf.  Eg.  tamai  “cat”  ? 

1  “ever,”  1412  (=  JxDoASd)  >  “there”  (Syr.  ^oZ,  cf. 
run,  pn  below). 

Tammuz ,  the  fourth  month,  July,  P  3°. 

“eight,”  Til  p]D*lK  N  164,  176;  KU»n  Pfi48’49,  Pza7; 
v.s.  1 . 

n.  pr.  (“  El  sustains,  or  perfect  as  El  ”)  94. 

n.  pr.  Pm 96.  Deriv.  fr.  .cnnLn  “to  tax”  ? 

v.s.  nnjD. 

v.s.  ivayn. 

v.s.  fcOIDn. 

n.  pr.  235  a1. 

“agreement,  contract,”  69,  Nab.  Pet.5 ;  cf.  «_»QjZ..  Acc. 
to  Wi.  =  nn. 

0  « 

“there,”  Cil.5;  cf.  and  v.  nion,  pn. 
n.  pr.  dub.  314  b. 

1506  “give”  (Imp.  of  }H3)  or  “relate”  (Imp.  of  *Jj2). 
“there,”  P  153,  v.  run. 
n.  pr.  Sin.  559,  cf.  ^LL^-Lj. 

1  “testimony,”  145  b1;  v.  Edd.  ad  loo. 
n.  pr.  f.  1 7 33  (2  83);  cf.  Gr.  Oa/xapr]  ? 
n.  pr.  Sin.  32. 
n.  pr.  dub.  317. 

“ornament,”  w.  suff.  n—  P  142,  652;  pn—  P  1 14,  Sach.  1. 
n.  pr.  frag.  Sin.  31,  for  ispn  (cf.  Ar.  oistf)  or  mpn 


122 


ARAMAIC  GLOSSARY. 


bpn* 

ipn* 

cipn 

x&nn* 

pin 


D'Din 

xjnn 

xmn 

pnin 

x£r»&?n 

iseti 

navi 


v.  “to  hang,”  Impf.  w.  sufF.  and  J  epen.  VobpJV  145  a'1. 

v.  Pa.  “to  set  in  order,”  frOJpnD  P  283  (>  “lamented 
for,”  Vog.);  cf.  ^ibZ, 

N  134,  N  23  'D  DnD;  KDpn  N  106  “ratification”;  cf.  Dn. 

vi.  8  and  MH  nptn  “right  of  possession”;  cf.  Hb. 

“sleep,”  w.  sufF.  1  pi.  K3Enm  1291  ? 

“two,”  4C,  1966.  'n  pD^N  N  143,  'n  pnSn  N  154,  cstr. 
nn  157‘,  w.  sufF.  pn'lin  PI1,  21  (for  '1.10  one  expects 
Ttfi),  in-  PWr.  p.  3;  cf.  pnn'jn  Dn.  iii.  23;  pmn  1863, 
N  2714;  f.  |mn  P  952,  Pfi25  (w.  ppt),  F23  (w.  piy).  Ostr. 
win  1961. 

v.s.  D'Din. 

“gate,”  1703. 

P  162  'n  '1  “for  a  second  time,”  cf.  Syr.  |_»Zj'Z5 ;  v.  No. 

§  154. 

v.s.  pin. 

“use,  service,”  Pf220  ;  cstr.  Pf28,  Gr.  eq. 

v.  DW. 

“  nine,”  N  24,  33,  233. 
n.  pr.  Pvoj.  bi. 

Tisri,  the  seventh  month,  October,  1701 ;  P  175,  22,  854, 
123a  (Ox.2)3,  M24. 


APPENDIX. 


Since  the  above  was  printed  D.  H.  Muller  has  published  over 
forty  new  Palmyrene  inscriptions  in  the  Denkschri/ten  d.  kais. 
Akad.  d.  Wissensch.  ( phil.-hist .  Cl.),  Vienna,  bd.  xlvi.  (1898).  The 
following  list  includes  the  words  and  forms  alone  which  occur  here 
for  the  first  time  in  the  Palmyrene  dialect.  Three  of  these  in¬ 
scriptions  from  the  British  Museum  are  designated  bm. 


”  469. 
466. 


n*  Pr*  26. 

HUSK  n.  pr.  46,  v.  ni31 
n.  pr.  15,  cf.  •Oina. 
jjrrn  n.  pr.  bm 3. 

rOfcS  “  thou,”  464>  7. 

HDpX  n-  Pr-  12,  30;  cf.  KIDpN. 

XSS  “  ga  , 

nnjni&'o  n.  pr. 

44,  KTI  r\V'2  “the  unlucky”  (f.). 
n.  pr.  12. 

n'nmm  46u~12,  v.  -a  (15). 
n.  pr.  18,  cf.  1D"Q  (Nab.), 
n.  pr.  2,  cf.  fjTQ  15. 
n,  pr.  8a,  31  ;  cf.  KnjTQ  • 
n.  pr.  f.  27a. 

“  after,”  w.  suff.  mm  426. 

426,  cf. 
n.  pr.  bm  l. 
n.  pr.  f.  3a,  cf.  run. 
n.  pr.  14,  f.  21 ;  cf.  nJH. 

15,  perh.  cstr.  “to  the  glory  of”;  or  n.  pr.  (m.  V),  cf. 


“13 

ay"i3 

nnjra 

’Snn3 

m3* 

anj 

un 

"un 

mm 


mnn- 

X*V/bT  n-  Pr*  27,  alt.  KTHT  (“prudent”). 

'“1ST  n.  pr.  12  (alt.  »“DT),  cf.  anar. 

ran  v.  4610,  apparently  synonymous  with  nan  (ib.  9)  “to  dig.” 
frOUIl  n.  pr.  8a. 

n-  pr-  6a>  b  i 

vSn  n-  pr- 1- 16. 


124 


APPENDIX. 


nsVn 

n.  pr.  45,  cf.  Na^n,  la^n  etc. 

*TDn 

n.  pr.  f.  31. 

Kin 

w.  *12  “freedman,”  36;  cf.  '“in  (1). 

ip'* 

'mo 

w.  suff.  |,mp'  43. 

n.  pr.  425. 

pno 

n.  pr.  32. 

ro^o 

n.  pr.  f.  BM3,  cf.  etc. 

pro 

n.  pr.  30,  466;  cf.  uyia. 

K11D 

n.  pr.  9,  cf.  fxapSov  W  2429. 

'jno 

n.  pr.  43;  cf.  untD. 

'33 

n.  pr.  f.  432>  6. 

K1X3 

n.  pr.  35,  cf.  T)¥J. 

Sk'HD 

n.  pr.  462> 14.  (This  supports  Yog.’i 

iwnD.) 

'“ID 

n.  pr.  42\ 

n.  pr.  36,  cf.  *ny  (2). 

KSny 

n.  pr.  14,  cf.  ,J,j j (Ibn  Dor.  208). 

Niy 

n.  pr.  28. 

fiy 

n.  pr.  462,  alt.  niy ;  cf.  iniy. 

ptcp.  465> 7;  cf.  bby. 

xninDy 

n.  pr.  462,  TOT  ib.  13.  Perh.  “Asi 

ximy 

n.  pr.  16,  29  ? 

465  “side”  ( v .  DHM  ad  loc.),  or 

(a  as  in  Nab.)  the  other  (i.e.  KDpE^),”  correcting  KTQT^ 
line  6. 

?  29,  "|DP  pa  “on  the  return  of  thy  day.” 

arrrnfi  n-  pr.  io  i 

j*Y)T£  n.  pr.  3a. 

Pap*  P=pd  469,  f.  Nn'papD  42  7 ;  v.  ^>ap  (l). 

n.  pr.  f.  5. 
n.  Pr-  4610. 

kSdd'  “left  side,”  467  ;  cf.  WpDD. 

NOpC?  “  sycomore  tree,”  467  ;  pi.  \t)p&  ib.  3. 

NjlfiG?  n.  Pr-  6  2 

n.  pr.  (personal,  v.  'DTl)  24  (34). 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 


P.  2,  1.  11.  No.  109  from  Limyra  is  a  bilingual  in  Aramaic  and  Greek. 

P.  4,  1.  13.  For  Nab.  Sach.  see  also  Chabot,  Revue  Semitique,  1897,  v.  81  ff. 
He  reads  vbw  soen  m  vvp  d1?^  ntjdd  rrru  r\)tb  sjta  nyp  im 
“Badru  has  set  up  the  ox  in  accordance  with  his  vow  (as  an)  ex-voto. 

Peace  !  Kaisu  son  of  Hann’-el  the  artificer.  Peace  !” 

•  •  • 

P.  4,  1.  15.  For  Nab.  Pet.  see  also  Winclder,  Altorient.  Forsch .,  2nd  ser.  (’98), 
60  ff. 

P.  5,  1.  7.  For  475  f.  read  973  ff.  The  date  of  the  volume  is  1884. 

P.  5,  1.  14.  For  Journ.  read  Transactions  (the  same  error  recurs  on  1.  18).  It 
may  be  mentioned  that  PS.-Sh.  is  a  bilingual  in  Aramaic  and  Latin,  the 
text  of  the  latter  runs :  dm  •  regina  •  liberta  •  et  •  conjuge  •  barates  •  palmy- 

RENUS  •  NATIONE  •  CATUALLAUNA  •  AN  •  XXX. 

P.  5,  1.  18.  Add  to  the  list  of  Palmyrene  inscriptions  “  PWr.  PSBA  (Proceedings 
of  the  Society,  etc.),  Nov.  1885;  cf.  Ledrain,  Rev.  d’Assyr.  et  d’Arclieol. 
Orient,  i.  74  ff.  References  to  the  former  may  be  made  under  and 

*m\” 

P.  8,  1.  11  from  end.  Read  Kos.,  Kosmologie  (the  former  is  to  be  read  again  on 
p.  39,  1.  17). 

P.  10,  1.  7.  (s.  Wr.  Mart.)  See  Journ.  Sacr.  Lit.  4th  ser.  viii.  (’66),  44 — 56. 

P.  11,  1.  14  f.  D2"in  and  113^’’  may  perhaps  be  Hebraisms  (nhprij 

P.  12,  1.  9.  UN  seems  to  be  incorrect,  v.  PWr.  PSBA,  Nov.  1885. 

P.  12,  s.  IY02N.  The  Targ.  NJY03N  should  not  have  been  cited,  the  correct 
reading  is  NfipSN,  see  Dal.  Aram.-Neuheb.  Worterb.  1897,  s.v. 

P.  15.  s.  iriN  (2).  Wi.  (AF,  2nd  ser.  63)  reads  “inN  “after.” 

P.  15,  s.  mrvnN.  Read  PSBA. 

P.  15,  1.  2  from  end.  Read  Lihyan.  Lihyan  or  Thamuditic,  a  name  given  to 
some  inscriptions  from  N.  Arabia  (chiefly  in  the  neighbourhood  of  el-‘Ula), 
for  which  cf.  D.  H.  Muller,  Epig.  Denk. 

P.  16,  last  line.  Omit  and  cf.  s. 

P.  18,  s.  After  oXoyeatas  read  (W  2599).  Other  Greek  forms  cited  by 

No.  Z.  c. 

P.  19,  s.  1*?N.  In  Nab.  Pet.4’5,  No.  Wi.  read  13N. 

P.  19, 1.  14  from  end.  For  read  NDD^N.  It  is  probably  the  same  as  the 

preceding 


126 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 


P.  23,  s.  jlDlbpDK.  The  inscription  (P  95)  refers  to  a  well,  most  probably  that 
of  Aphaca  ( v .  iO'P  2),  to  whose  Nil  (q.  v.)  two  are  offered.  The 

unknown  word  may  perhaps  represent  £axaP'LTVs  “bread  baken  over  the 
fire”  (cf.  =  ecrxapa,  Dal.  Aram.-Neuheb.  Worterb.).  For 

offerings  of  food  in  the  worship  of  wells  see  WRS  Sem.  177. 

P.  23,  s.  *1331"IDK.  For  cpds.  read  cpd. 

P.  24,  1.  5.  For  CIL  read  Gil. 

P.  24,  1.  10.  Read 

A 

P.  24,  s.  KDpK.  Cf.  perhaps  'DpK  PEut.  11. 

P.  25,  s.  HD3D“lX.  For  —  dpiard^y,  aptaTo^vr)  read  perhaps  apiard^*  from 
apiGTo^evr)  (No.). 

P.  26,  1.  5.  For  irzitu  read  irsitu. 

P.  27,  s.  2  (2)  end.  For  read  Dm. 

P.  28,  s.  502J2.  For  Mish.  Aboth  v.  23  read  Talm.  Kidd.  10b. 

P.  29,  1.  4  from  end.  Read  pi.  NTD  Nab.  Pet.2,  cstr.  'TD  Nab.  Pet.1  “Temple” 
in  D '2  etc. 

P.  30.  For  ife  read  T$>3. 

P.  39,  s.  DPll.  For  Himy.  read  Sab. 

P.  40,  1.  4.  For  i.q.  Ass.  read  Ass.  eq. 

P.  41,  1.  6.  Read  drjvdpiov. 

P.  41,  s.  nm.  Read  “ a  contract,  record  of  sale”  (cf.  Ass.  dannltu  and  v.  frOD). 

P.  42,  s.  rifcOUmn.  Read  n.  pr.  72  “  Hadad  gives  brethren,”  Gr.  eq.  adadua- 
divaxys,  cf.  Ass.  nabu-nadin-ah,  etc. 

P.  42,  1.  6  from  end.  For  KIT1  read  'in'. 

P.  43,  1.  1.  For  usi  read  usi. 

P.  43,  1.  10  from  end.  For  j'DDDn  read  |V>n ddh. 

P.  46,  1.  6.  Read  ovopudrjs. 

P.  47, 1.  11.  Read  nnjTQT  n.  pr.  P  193,  631,  1072,  Eut.  16;  N'n[jmr]  P  56. 
Gr.  eq.  etc. 

P.  48,  1.  9.  For  D3T...  zabisi  read  [D]2T...  zabili. 

p.  49,  s.  n  (i.  i).  Omit  nun. 

P.  50,  s.  ITin.  Read  Impf.  HIIT  149,  etc. 

P.  51,  s.  'til.  For  irn  read  1Ti"|*. 

P.  51,  s.  HN'Dn.  Cf.  rather  &ODP1  Ez.  vi.  17  (Ktib). 

P.  53,  s.  .  Gerjin  (with  which  Wi.  AF  106  identifies  'll)  is  the  hill  about 

30  min.  from  Zenjirli  where  the  Hadad  inscription  (Zh)  was  discovered. 

P.  55,  s.  mn*.  For  esidani  read  esidani. 

P.  56,  1.  11  f.  Acc.  to  Wi.  (AF,  2nd  ser.  62)  Jin  =  “property.” 

P.  58,  s.  ttyD  (2).  Cf.  perhaps  KDWtp  Targ.  Deut.  xxviii.  36  (Dal.  Aram.- 
Neuheb.  Worterb.). 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 


127 


P.  58,  1.  4  from  end.  Omit  D'p'D  (?). 

P.  60,  1.  15.  Read  'pD'*  v.  “to  be  able,”  Impf.  N  232,  etc. 

P.  61,  last  line.  For  NDlYlD  read  N2IVD. 

P.  62,  s.  “in'  (2).  For  “Ifl'D  read  “iJVnD. 

P.  64,  1.  15.  For  read 

♦  ♦  *• 

P.  67,  s.  NIVO^.  For  <  read  >,  and  cf.  Yog.  Syr.  p.  153. 

P.  68,  s.  S£>'  =  n'  (the  sign  of  the  accusative)  is  difficult.  Hal.  reads 

“IC^  “to  vow,  consecrate”  (Rev.  Sem.  1897,  v.  84  ff. ). 

P.  73,  1.  14.  For  sarri  read  sarri. 

P.  75,  1.  4.  For  sarra  read  sarru. 

P.  77,  1.  13  from  end.  After  N3"lT0  read  (the  god  of  Gaza,  cf.  /uapra  W  2412  g). 

P.  80,  s.  N“lVO.  The  correct  reading  is  given  by  Vogue  himself,  Syr.  p.  153. 
The  Palm.  NDT  “pious”  should  not  therefore  have  been  quoted  by  the 
New  Oxf.  Heb.  Lex.  s.v.  HT. 

P.  84,  s.  |VD.^  Omit  (Vog.  |D'J),  cf.  Vog.  Syr.  p.  153. 

P.  85,  s. _N3C>D.  Wi.  cfs.  Ar.  “roof.” 

P.  85,  s.  N£D.  It  should  have  been  mentioned  that  the  characters  preceding 
N£D  '1  have  been  intentionally  erased ;  see  Yog.  ad  loc. 

P.  94,  s.  W'ty.  See  Hebr.  xiii.  (’97)  278. 

P.  96,  s.  2.  Q  is  perhaps  to  be  connected  with  ?]N  ;  cf.  No.  ZMG  xlvii.  103. 

p.  112,  s.  rrw.  Add  Zp9  (>  min). 

The  following  cross-references,  references  to  inscriptions,  and  headings  are 
to  be  inserted  in  their  places : 

(a)  see  N“l'rtJ;  “Iftj  see  “IftJD;  |'Ntl  see  NT"!. 

(b)  npybn  PMuii.  43 ;  biy'v  PMiiii.  32;  N^nm'  PMuii.  22. 

(c)  nmnD[N]  109,  Gr.  eq.  racpos,  cf.  Pers.  “sepulchre”;  cf. 

also  ZA  viii.  96,  n.  2. 

N“lll  n.  pr.  PWr.  PSBA  Nov.  ’85,  29  ff.,  no.  3. 
rm  “beast,”  Zh27  ? 

'"!'  v.  “to  set,  found,”  Zh29  ? 

Trfe  “  kingdom,”  Zp17  ? 

The  following  names  are  to  be  marked  as  feminine  :  '^dhn,  N^n,  iron, 
n:'n,  raton,  mn(i),  non',  nbiEO,  and  the  ethnic  niyotd. 


(Cambritjgc : 

PRINTED  BY  J.  AND  C. 
AT  THE  UNIVERSITY 


F.  CLAY, 
PRESS. 


Date  Due 


t  r 

T 

*—.*  ; 

j».  ■ 

5£- 

MNP 

- 

it- 

'  JAN  2  q  t 

j 

J 

r 

- 

.'•^■rtfyi'^tt^nTnii-iirtiiiniii 

pyzr'2*  ,|5 

** 

ririr^ 

wtf 

wrp'f 

T  T-^r 

rii  / 

tJWfr^r  : 

j 

APR  9  0  ‘ 

XWff 

fll  1  >  1  m 1  '  * - 

f> 

